- · PDF fileOracle Database automatically maintains a system-defined moving window baseline....

Oracle.Passguide.1Z0-053.v2014-04-02.by.NORMA.700q

Number: 1Z0-053Passing Score: 660Time Limit: 105 minFile Version: 12.5

http://www.gratisexam.com/

Exam Code: 1Z0-053

Exam Name: Oracle Database 11g: Administration II

Sections1. Database Architecture and ASM2. Configuring for Recoverability3. Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)4. Configuring Backup Specifications5. Using RMAN to Create Backups6. Performing User-Managed Backup and Recovery7. Using RMAN to Perform Recovery8. Using RMAN to Duplicate a Database9. Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recovery (TSPITR)10.Monitoring and Tuning RMAN11.Using Flashback Technology12.Additional Flashback Operations13.Diagnosing the Database14.Managing Memory15.Managing Database Performance16.Space Management17.Managing Resources

18.Automating Tasks with the Scheduler19.Administering the Scheduler20.Globalization

E01

QUESTION 1While deploying a new application module, the software vendor ships the application software along withappropriate SQL plan baselines for the new SQLs being introduced. Which two statements describe theconsequences? (Choose two.)

A. The plan baselines can be evolved over time to produce better performance.B. The newly generated plans are directly placed into the SQL plan baseline without being verified.C. The new SQL statements initially run with the plans that are known to produce good performance under

standard test configuration.D. The optimizer does not generate new plans for the SQL statements for which the SQL plan baseline has

been imported.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Purpose of SQL Plan Baselines

Common scenarios where SQL plan management can improve or preserve SQL performance include:

A database upgrade that installs a new optimizer version usually results in plan changes for a smallpercentage of SQL statements. Most of these plan changes result in either no performance change orimprovement. However, some plan changes may cause performance regressions. SQL plan baselinessignificantly minimize potential regressions resulting from an upgrade.Ongoing system and data changes can impact plans for some SQL statements, potentially causingperformance regressions. SQL plan baselines help minimize performance regressions and stabilize SQLperformance.Deployment of new application modules means introducing new SQL statements into the database. Theapplication software may use appropriate SQL execution plans developed in a standard test configurationfor the new statements. If the system configuration is significantly different from the test configuration, then the database can evolve SQL plan baselines over time to produce better performance.

QUESTION 2You plan to have a larger moving window size for the default system-defined moving window baseline becauseyou want to use the adaptive threshold.Which statement factors in this consideration while increasing the size of the moving window?

A. The collection level for the AWR should be set to BASIC.B. The moving window size must be less than Undo Retention.C. The moving window size should be greater than the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) retention

period.D. The moving window size should be equal to or less than the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR)

retention period.

Correct Answer: DSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Moving Window Baseline (link)A moving window baseline corresponds to all AWR data that exists within the AWR retention period. This isuseful when using adaptive thresholds because the database can use AWR data in the entire AWR retentionperiod to compute metric threshold values.

Oracle Database automatically maintains a system-defined moving window baseline. The default window sizefor the system-defined moving window baseline is the current AWR retention period, which by default is 8 days.If you are planning to use adaptive thresholds, consider using a larger moving window—such as 30 days—toaccurately compute threshold values. You can resize the moving window baseline by changing thenumber of days in the moving window to a value that is equal to or less than the number ofdays in the AWR retention period. Therefore, to increase the size of a moving window, you must firstincrease the AWR retention period accordingly.

QUESTION 3Your database is in ARCHIVELOG mode. You have two online redo log groups, each of which contains oneredo member. When you attempt to start the database, you receive the following errors:

ORA-00313: open failed for members of log group 1 o f thread 1ORA-00312: online log 1 thread 1: 'D:\REDO01.LOG'

You discover that the online redo log file of the current redo group is corrupted.Which statement should you use to resolve this issue?

A. ALTER DATABASE DROP LOGFILE GROUP 1;

B. ALTER DATABASE CLEAR LOGFILE GROUP 1;

C. ALTER DATABASE CLEAR UNARCHIVED LOGFILE GROUP 1;

D. ALTER DATABASE DROP LOGFILE MEMBER 'D:\REDO01.LOG';

Correct Answer: CSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:

QUESTION 4Which three components does the Scheduler use for managing tasks within the Oracle environment? (Choosethree.)

A. a jobB. a programC. a scheduleD. a PL/SQL procedure

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The Scheduler objects include:

ProgramsSchedulesJobsDestinationsChainsFile WatchersCredentialsJob ClassesWindowsGroups

QUESTION 5Examine the section of the Health Check report given below:

DBMS_HM.GET_RUN_REPORT('HM_RUN_1061')Run Name : HM_RUN_1061 Run Id : 1061 Check Name : Data Block Integrity Check Mode : REACTIVE Status : COMPLETED Start Time : 2007-05-12 22:11:02.032292 -07:00 End Time : 2007-05-12 22:11:20.835135 -07:00 Error Encountered : 0Source Incident Id : 7418Number of Incidents Created :0

Which two statements are true regarding the Health Check report? (Choose two.)

A. Health Check was performed manually.B. Health Check was performed to check the disk image block corruptions.C. Health Check was performed to check interblock and intersegment corruption.D. Health Check was performed to verify the integrity of database files and report failures.E. Health Check was performed by the Health Monitor automatically in response to a critical error.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:About Health Monitor Checks

Health Monitor checks (also known as checkers, health checks, or checks) examine various layers andcomponents of the database. Health checks detect file corruptions, physical and logical block corruptions, undoand redo corruptions, data dictionary corruptions, and more. The health checks generate reports of theirfindings and, in many cases, recommendations for resolving problems. Health checks can be run in two ways:

Reactive—The fault diagnosability infrastructure can run health checks automatically in response to a criticalerror.

Manual—As a DBA, you can manually run health checks using either the DBMS_HM PL/SQL packageor the Enterprise Manager interface. You can run checkers on a regular basis if desired, or Oracle Supportmay ask you to run a checker while working with you on a service request.

Health Monitor checks store findings, recommendations, and other information in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository (ADR).

Health checks can run in two modes:

DB-online mode means the check can be run while the database is open (that is, in OPEN mode or MOUNTmode).

DB-offline mode means the check can be run when the instance is available but the database itself is closed(that is, in NOMOUNT mode).

All the health checks can be run in DB-online mode. Only the Redo Integrity Check and the DB StructureIntegrity Check can be used in DB-offline mode.

Types of Health Checks

Health monitor runs the following checks:

DB Structure Integrity Check—This check verifies the integrity of database files and reports failures if thesefiles are inaccessible, corrupt or inconsistent. If the database is in mount or open mode, this checkexamines the log files and data files listed in the control file. If the database is in NOMOUNT mode, only thecontrol file is checked.

Data Block Integrity Check—This check detects disk image block corruptions such as checksumfailures, head/tail mismatch, and logical inconsistencies within the block. Most corruptions can be repairedusing Block Media Recovery. Corrupted block information is also captured in theV$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view. This check does not detect inter-block or inter-segmentcorruption.

Redo Integrity Check—This check scans the contents of the redo log for accessibility and corruption, as wellas the archive logs, if available. The Redo Integrity Check reports failures such as archive log or redocorruption.

Undo Segment Integrity Check—This check finds logical undo corruptions. After locating an undocorruption, this check uses PMON and SMON to try to recover the corrupted transaction. If this recoveryfails, then Health Monitor stores information about the corruption in V$CORRUPT_XID_LIST. Most undocorruptions can be resolved by forcing a commit.

Transaction Integrity Check—This check is identical to the Undo Segment Integrity Check except that itchecks only one specific transaction.

Dictionary Integrity Check—This check examines the integrity of core dictionary objects, such as tab$ andcol$. It performs the following operations:

Verifies the contents of dictionary entries for each dictionary object.Performs a cross-row level check, which verifies that logical constraints on rows in the dictionary areenforced.Performs an object relationship check, which verifies that parent-child relationships between dictionaryobjects are enforced.

The Dictionary Integrity Check operates on the following dictionary objects:

tab$, clu$, fet$, uet$, seg$, undo$, ts$, file$, obj$, ind$, icol$, col$, user$, con$, cdef$, ccol$, bootstrap$,objauth$, ugroup$, tsq$, syn$, view$, typed_view$, superobj$, seq$, lob$, coltype$, subcoltype$, ntab$,refcon$, opqtype$, dependency$, access$, viewcon$, icoldep$, dual$, sysauth$, objpriv$, defrole$, andecol$.

QUESTION 6You are working on a CATDB database that contains an Oracle Database version 11.1 catalog schema ownedby the user RCO11. The INST1 database contains an Oracle Database version 10.1 catalog schema owned bythe user RCAT10.You want the RMAN to import metadata for database IDs 1423241 and 1423242, registered in RCAT10, intothe recovery catalog owned by RCO11. You also want to deregister them from the catalog after import.You executed the following commands to achieve this:RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG rco11/password@catdbRMAN> IMPORT CATALOG rcat10/oracle@inst1 DBID=14232 41,1423242;


What happens if the RCO11 catalog has scripts with the same name as that of the scripts in RCAT10 catalog?

A. The scripts in the RCO11 catalog are overwritten.B. RMAN renames the local stored scripts in the RCO11 catalog.C. The RMAN session in which the command is executed aborts.D. RMAN renames the global scripts that are imported from the RCAT10 catalog.

Correct Answer: DSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 7You need to configure fine-grained access control to external network resources from within your database.You create an access control list (ACL) using the DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN package.Which statement is true regarding the ACL created?

A. It is a list of remote database links stored in the XML file that are available to the users of the database.B. It is a list of users and network privileges stored in the XML file according to which a group of users can

connect to one or more hosts.C. It is a list of users and network privileges stored in the data dictionary according to which a group of users

can connect to one or more hosts.D. It is the list of the host names or the IP addresses stored in the data dictionary that can connect to your

database through PL/SQL network utility packages such as UTL_TCP.

Correct Answer: BSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN package provides the interface to administer the network Access ControlList (ACL).

Refer to here for About Fin-Grained Access to External Network Services

Configuring fine-grained access control for users and roles that need to access external network services fromthe database. This way, specific groups of users can connect to one or more host computers, based onprivileges that you grant them. Typically, you use this feature to control access to applications that run onspecific host addresses.

To configure fine-grained access control to external network services, you create an access control list (ACL), which is stored in Oracle XML DB. You can create the access control list by using Oracle XML DB itself, or byusing the DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN and DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_UTILITY PL/SQL packages. This guideexplains how to use these packages to create and manage the access control list. To create an access controllist by using Oracle XML DB and for general conceptual information about access control lists, see Oracle XMLDB Developer's Guide.

QUESTION 8Which statement is true regarding online redefinition for the migration of BasicFile LOBs to SecureFileLOBs?

A. It cannot be done in parallel.B. It can be done at the table level or partition level.C. It does not require additional storage because the operation is done online.D. Local and global indexes are maintained automatically during the operation.

Correct Answer: BSection: Space ManagementExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Refer to hereCompatibility and Upgrading

All features described in this document are enabled with compatibility set to 11.2.0.0.0 or higher. There is nodowngrade capability after 11.2.0.0.0 is set.

If you want to upgrade BasicFiles LOBs to SecureFiles LOBs, you must use typical methods for upgrading data(CTAS/ITAS, online redefinition, export/import, column to column copy, or using a view and a new column). Most of these solutions require twice the disk space used by the data in the input LOB column. However,partitioning and taking these actions on a partition-by-partition basis lowers the disk space requirements.

Migrating Columns from BasicFiles LOBs to SecureFiles LOBs

The method of migrating LOBs columns is presented in this section.

Preventing Generation of REDO Space when Migrating to SecureFiles LOBs

Generation of redo space can cause performance problems during the process of migrating BasicFiles LOBcolumns. Redo changes for the table are logged during the migration process only if the table has LOGGINGset.

Redo changes for the column being converted from BasicFiles LOB to SecureFiles LOB are logged only if thestorage characteristics of the SecureFiles LOB column indicate LOGGING. The logging setting (LOGGING orNOLOGGING) for the LOB column is inherited from the tablespace in which the LOB is created.

To prevent generation of redo space during migration make sure that you specify the NOLOGGING storageparameter for the new SecureFiles LOB column(s). You can turn LOGGING on once your migration iscomplete.

Online Redefinition for BasicFiles LOBs

Online redefinition is the only recommended method for migration of BasicFiles LOBs to SecureFiles LOBs. Itcan be done at the table or partition level.

Online Redefinition Advantages

No requirement to take the table or partition offlineCan be done in parallel

Online Redefinition Disadvantages

Additional storage equal to the entire table or partition and all LOB segments must be availableGlobal indexes must be rebuilt

QUESTION 9Which statement describes the information returned by the DBMS_SPACE.SPACE_USAGE procedure for LOBspace usage?

A. It returns space usage of only BasicFile LOB chunks.B. It returns space usage of only SecureFile LOB chunks.C. It returns both BasicFile and SecureFile LOB space usage for only nonpartitioned tables.

D. It returns both BasicFile and SecureFile LOB space usage for both partitioned and nonpartitioned tables.


Explanation/Reference:SPACE_USAGE Procedures

The first form of the procedure shows the space usage of data blocks under the segment High Water Mark. You can calculate usage for LOBs, LOB PARTITIONS and LOB SUBPARTITIONS. This procedure can onlybe used on tablespaces that are created with auto segment space management. The bitmap blocks, segmentheader, and extent map blocks are not accounted for by this procedure. Note that this overload cannot be usedon SECUREFILE LOBs.DBMS_SPACE.SPACE_USAGE( segment_owner IN VARCHAR2, segment_name IN VARCHAR2, segment_type IN VARCHAR2, unformatted_blocks OUT NUMBER, unformatted_bytes OUT NUMBER, fs1_blocks OUT NUMBER, fs1_bytes OUT NUMBER, fs2_blocks OUT NUMBER, fs2_bytes OUT NUMBER, fs3_blocks OUT NUMBER, fs3_bytes OUT NUMBER, fs4_blocks OUT NUMBER, fs4_bytes OUT NUMBER, full_blocks OUT NUMBER, full_bytes OUT NUMBER, partition_name IN VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NUL L);

The second form of the procedure returns information about SECUREFILE LOB space usage. It will returnthe amount of space in blocks being used by all the SECUREFILE LOBs in the LOB segment. The proceduredisplays the space actively used by the LOB column, freed space that has retention expired, and freed spacethat has retention unexpired. Note that this overload can be used only on SECUREFILE LOBs.DBMS_SPACE.SPACE_USAGE( segment_owner IN VARCHAR2, segment_name IN VARCHAR2, segment_type IN VARCHAR2, segment_size_blocks OUT NUMBER, segment_size_bytes OUT NUMBER, used_blocks OUT NUMBER, used_bytes OUT NUMBER, expired_blocks OUT NUMBER, expired_bytes OUT NUMBER, unexpired_blocks OUT NUMBER, unexpired_bytes OUT NUMBER, partition_name IN VARCHAR2 DEFAULT N ULL);

QUESTION 10Consider the following scenario for your database:

Backup optimization is enabled in RMAN.The recovery window is set to 7 days in RMAN.The most recent backup to disk for the TOOLS tablespace was taken on November 3, 2007.The TOOLS tablespace is read-only since November 4, 2007.

On November 23, 2007, you issue the RMAN command to back up the database to disk. Which statement is true regarding the backup of the TOOLS tablespace?

A. The RMAN backup fails because the TOOLS tablespace is read-onlyB. The RMAN skips the backup of the tablespace because backup optimization is enabledC. The RMAN makes backup because optimization can be enabled only for backups to diskD. The RMAN makes the backup because no backup of the tablespace exists within the seven day window

Correct Answer: DSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 11View the Exhibit to examine the metrics with a threshold. Which statement is true regarding the Number of Transactions (per second) metric?

Exhibit:

A. Oracle uses statistical relevance to determine when an adaptive threshold has been breached for themetric.

B. The statistics for the metric values observed over the baseline time period are not examined to determinethreshold values.

C. Oracle determines when an adaptive threshold has been breached based on the maximum value capturedby the baseline.

D. The total concurrent number of threshold violations, which must occur before an alert is raised for themetric, has been set to zero.

Correct Answer: ASection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 12You performed the RMAN database backup having a backupset key number 231 with the KEEP FOREVERoption.After some days, you want to change the status of the database backup and you issued the followingcommand:RMAN>CHANGE BACKUPSET 231 NOKEEP;

What is the implication of this command?

A. The backup is deleted.B. The backup is marked unavailable.C. The backup overrides the backup retention policy.D. the backup becomes eligible for deletion according to the existing retention policy

Correct Answer: DSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 13View the Exhibit that sets the threshold for the Current Open Cursors Count metric. Why is the SignificanceLevel threshold type not available in the threshold setting?

Exhibit:

A. because AWR baseline is not enabledB. because Current Open Cursors Count is not a basic metricC. because the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter is set to BASIC

D. because the AWR baseline is a system-defined moving window baseline

Correct Answer: BSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation


QUESTION 14Which two statements are true regarding hot patching? (Choose two.)

A. It requires relinking of the Oracle binary.B. It does not require database instance shutdown.C. It can detect conflicts between two online patches.D. It is available for installing all patches on all platforms.E. It works only in a single database instance environment.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Online Patching

Regular patches typically contain .o (object) files and/or .a (archive) libraries, and therefore require a relink ofthe RDBMS binary. Online patches, however, contain .so files, which are dynamic/shared libraries, and do notrequire a relink of the RDBMS binary. Consequently, since a relink is not needed, you can apply or rollback online patches while the RDBMS instance is running. This simplifies administration, because nodowntime is needed, and also results in a much quicker turnaround time for installing or de-installing OnlinePatches.

A regular RDBMS patch can require many minutes to install, since it requires instance shutdown, a relink, andinstance startup. On the other hand, you can install an online patch in just a few seconds.

Online patches are only applicable for Oracle RDBMS and not any other products. Online patches arecurrently supported on the following Windows and UNIX platforms for version 11.2.0.1.0 and later:

Linux x86Linux x86_64HP-UX ItaniumSolaris SPARC 64-bitSolaris AMD 64-bitAIX (AIX 6.1 and later)

About Patch Conflicts

All patches may not be compatible with one another. For example, if you apply a patch, all the bugs the patchfixes could reappear after you apply another patch. This is called a conflict situation. OPatch detects suchsituations and raises an error when it detects a conflict.

QUESTION 15You are in the process of creating a virtual private catalog in your Oracle Database 11g database. The PROD1,PROD2, and PROD3 Oracle Database 10g databases are registered in the base recovery catalog. The databaseuser who owns the base recovery catalog is CATOWNER. CATOWNER executes the following command to grantprivileges to a new user VPC1 using Oracle Database 11g RMAN executables:RMAN> GRANT CATALOG FOR DATABASE prod1, prod2 TO vp c1;Then you issue the following commands:RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG vpc1/oracle@catdb;RMAN> SQL "EXEC catowner.dbms_rcvcat.create_virtual _catalog;"

What is the outcome of the above commands?

A. They execute and create a virtual catalog for pre-Oracle 11g clients.B. They produce an error because PROD1 and PROD2 databases belong to the older version.

C. They produce an error because you need to connect as CATOWNER to execute this packaged procedure.

D. They produce an error because you need to connect to the target database to execute this packagedprocedure.

Correct Answer: ASection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 16Because of a logical corruption in your production database, you wanted to perform Tablespace Point in TimeRecovery (TSPITR). But before you start the recovery, you queried the TS_PITR_OBJECTS_TO_BE_DROPPEDview and realized that there are a large number of objects that would be dropped when you start the recoveryby using this method. You want to preserve these objects. Which option must you use to perform TSPITR andpreserve the object?

A. Perform Export before TSPITR and Import after TSPITRB. Move objects to another schema that has the same tablespace assignedC. Perform Incomplete Recovery before TSPITR with the Log Sequence Number (LSN)D. Perform Incomplete Recovery before TSPITR with the System Change Number (SCN)

Correct Answer: ASection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 17The INV_HISTORY table is created using the command:SQL>CREATE TABLE INV_HISTORY (inv_no NUMBER(3), inv _date DATE, inv_amt NUMBER(10,2)) partition by range (inv_date) interval(numtoyminter val(1,'month')) (partition p0 values less than (to_date('01-01-2005 ','dd-mm-yyyy')), partition p1 values less than (to_date('01-01-2006 ','dd-mm-yyyy')));

The following data has been inserted into the INV_HISTORY table :INV_NO INV_DATE INV_AMT====== ============ ======= 1 30-dec-2004 1000 2 30-dec-2005 2000 3 1-feb-2006 3000 4 1-mar-2006 4000 5 1-apr-2006 5000

You would like to store the data belonging to the year 2006 in a single partition and issue the command:SQL> ALTER TABLE inv_history MERGE PARTITIONS FOR(TO_DATE('15-feb-2006','dd-mon-yyyy')), FOR(TO_DATE('15-apr-2006')) INTO PARTITION sys_py;

What would be the outcome of this command?

A. It executes successfully, and the transition point is set to '1-apr-2006'.B. It executes successfully, and the transition point is set to '15-apr-2006'.C. It produces an error because the partitions specified for merging are not adjacent.D. It produces an error because the date values specified in the merge do not match the date values stored in

the table.

Correct Answer: CSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 18You create a new Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM) task: instance_analysis_mode_task. Toview the ADDM report, you use the following command:SQL> SELECT dbms_addm.get_report('my_instance_analy sis_mode_task') FROM dual;

You want to suppress ADDM output relating to Segment Advisor actions on user SCOTT's segments.What would you do to achieve this?

A. Add a finding directive for the ADDM task.B. Add a segment directive for the ADDM task.C. Add a parameter directive for the ADDM task.D. Disable the Segment Advisor from the Automatic Maintenance Task.



QUESTION 19A PL/SQL procedure queries only those columns of a redefined table that were unchanged by the online tableredefinition. What happens to the PL/SQL procedure after the online table redefinition?

A. It remains valid.B. It becomes invalid for all options of online table redefinition but automatically gets revalidated the next time it

is used.C. It becomes invalid for all options of online table redefinition and is automatically recompiled during online

redefinition of the table.D. It becomes invalid only if the storage parameters have been modified and it automatically gets revalidated

the next time it is used.

Correct Answer: ASection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 20View the Exhibit and examine the resource consumption details for the current plan in use by the databaseinstance.Which two statements are true based on the output? (Choose two.) Exhibit:

Exhibit:

A. An attempt to start a new session by the user belonging to DSS_QUERIES fails with an error

B. A user belonging to DSS_QUERIES can log in to a new session but the session will be queued

C. The CPU_WAIT_TIME column indicates the total time that sessions in the consumer group waited for theCPU due to resource management

D. The CPU_WAIT_TIME column indicates the total time that sessions in the consumer group waited for theCPU due to resource management, I/O waits, and latch or enqueue contention

Correct Answer: BCSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

Explanation/Reference:V$RSRC_CONSUMER_GROUP Use the V$RSRC_CONSUMER_GROUP view to monitor resources consumed,including CPU, I/O, and parallel servers. It can also be used to monitor statistics related to CPU resourcemanagement, runaway query management, parallel statement queuing, and so on. All of the statistics arecumulative from the time when the plan was activated.

SELECT name, active_sessions, queue_length, consumed_cpu_time, cpu_waits, cpu_wait_time FROM v$rsrc_consumer_group;

NAME ACTIVE_SESSIONS QUEUE_LENGTH CON SUMED_CPU_TIME CPU_WAITSCPU_WAIT_TIME------------------ --------------- ------------ --- -------------- -----------------------OLTP_ORDER_ENTRY 1 0 29690 467 6709OTHER_GROUPS 0 0 5982366 4089 60425SYS_GROUP 1 0 2420704 914 19540DSS_QUERIES 4 2 4594660 3004 55700

In the preceding query results, the DSS_QUERIES consumer group has four sessions in its active session pooland two more sessions queued for activation.

A key measure in this view is CPU_WAIT_TIME. This indicates the total time that sessions in the consumergroup waited for CPU because of resource management. Not included in this measure are waits due to latchor enqueue contention, I/O waits, and so on.

QUESTION 21You are managing an Oracle Database 11g instance. You want to create a duplicate database for testingpurpose.What are the prerequisites for performing the active database duplication? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The source database backup must be copied over the net for test database.B. The source database must be run in ARCHIVELOG mode if the database is open.C. The source database must be shut down cleanly if the database is in mounted state.D. A net service name should be set up and a listener configured with the target as well as the source

database.

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:To ensure that the source database is in the proper state:1. If the source database instance is not mounted or open, then mount or open it.2. If you are performing active database duplication, then ensure that the following additional requirements aremet:

If the source database is open, then archiving must be enabled.If the source database is not open, then the database does not require instance recovery.

(Tips: does not require instance recovery, means you cannot shutdown the source database with abort option,you need to shutdown it cleanly.)

Starting RMAN and Connecting to Databases:In this task, you must start the RMAN client and connect to the database instances required by the duplicationtechnique chosen in "Step 1: Choosing a Duplication Technique". The RMAN client can be located on any host so long as it can connect to the necessary databases over the network.

QUESTION 22An index called ORD_CUSTNAME_IX has been created on the CUSTNAME column in the ORDERS tableusing the following command:SQL>CREATE INDEX ord_custname_ix ON orders(custname );

The ORDERS table is frequently queried using the CUSTNAME column in the WHERE clause. You want tocheck the impact on the performance of the queries if the index is not available. You do not want the index tobe dropped or rebuilt to perform this test.Which is the most efficient method of performing this task?

A. disabling the indexB. making the index invisibleC. making the index unusableD. using the MONITORING USAGE clause for the index


Explanation/Reference:Invisible Indexes

An invisible index is maintained by Oracle Database for every data manipulation language (DML) statement, butis ignored by the optimizer unless you explicitly set the parameter OPTIMIZER_USE_INVISIBLE_INDEXESto TRUE on a session or system level.

Making an index invisible is an alternative to making it unusable or dropping it. Using invisible indexes, you can:

Test the removal of an index before dropping itCreate invisible indexes temporarily for specialized, nonstandard operations, such as online applicationupgrades, without affecting the behavior of existing applications

For more information, see Oracle Database Administrator's Guide.

QUESTION 23Which tasks can be accomplished using the DBMS_LOB.SETOPTIONS procedure?

A. only encryption and compression settings for all SecureFile LOBs

B. only encryption and deduplication settings for only SecureFile CLOBs

C. deduplication, encryption, and compression settings for all SecureFile LOBs

D. deduplication, encryption, and compression settings only for SecureFile CLOBs

Correct Answer: CSection: Space ManagementExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Refer to here.

DBMS_LOB.SETOPTIONS()

This procedure sets compression, deduplication and encryption features. It enables the features to be seton a per-LOB basis, overriding the default LOB settings. This call incurs a round trip to the server to make thechanges persistent.

QUESTION 24Which of the following information will be gathered by the SQL Test Case Builder for the problems pertaining toSQL-related problems? (Choose all that apply.)

A. ADR diagnostic filesB. all the optimizer statisticsC. initialization parameter settingsD. PL/SQL functions, procedures, and packagesE. the table and index definitions and actual data

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answer was BCE, the correct answer is BCD.

Refer to here

The information gathered by SQL Test Case Builder includes the query being executed, table and index definitions (but not the actual data ), PL/SQL functions, procedures, and packages , optimizer statistics , and initialization parameter settings .

QUESTION 25You enabled Flashback Data Archive on the INVENTORY table. Which DDL operation is supported on the tableafter enabling Flashback Data Archive?

A. Drop the table.B. Partition the tableC. Truncate the table.D. Add a column to the table.E. Rename a column in the table.

Correct Answer: DSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Flashback Data Archive supports only these DDL statements:

ALTER TABLE statement that does any of the following:Adds, drops, renames, or modifies a columnAdds, drops, or renames a constraintDrops or truncates a partition or subpartition operation

TRUNCATE TABLE statementRENAME statement that renames a table

Flashback Data Archive does not support DDL statements that move, split, merge, or coalesce partitions or subpartitions, move tables, or convert LONG columns to LOB columns.

QUESTION 26

You are working on a CATDB database that contains an Oracle Database version 11.1 catalog schema ownedby the user RCO11. The INST1 database contains an Oracle Database version 10.1 catalog schema owned bythe user RCAT10.You want the RMAN to import metadata for database IDs 1423241 and 1423242, registered in RCAT10, intothe recovery catalog owned by RCO11. You executed the following commands:RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG rco11/password@catdbRMAN> IMPORT CATALOG rcat10/oracle@inst1 NO UNREGIS TER;

Which two statements are true regarding the tasks accomplished with these commands? (Choose two.)

A. They import all metadata from the RCAT10 catalog.B. They unregister the database from the RCAT10 catalog.C. They do not register the databases registered in the RCAT10 catalog.D. They register all databases registered in the RCAT10 catalog.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:IMPORT CATALOG <connectStringSpec>[DBID = <dbid> [, <dbid>,…]][DB_NAME=<dbname>[, <dbname,…]][ NO UNREGISTER ];

NO UNREGISTER option forces to remain the database registration kept in thesource RC.By default, after the IMPORT command completed, it will unregister database fromthe source RC and register the databases to the tar get RC.

QUESTION 27You are using the flash recovery area (fast recovery area in 11g Release 2) to store backup related files in yourdatabase. After regular monitoring of space usage in the Mash recovery area. You realize that the flashrecovery area is (jetting filled up very fast and it is running out of space. Your database flash recovery area islow on specie and you have no more room on disk.

Proactively, which two options could you use to make more space available in the flash recovery [Choose two]

A. Change the RMAN archived log deletion policy.B. Use the RMAN CROSSCHECK command to reclaim the archived log space.

C. Change the RMAN retention policy to retain backups for a shorter period of time.D. Use OS command to move files from the flash recovery area to some other location

Correct Answer: BDSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 28You have a range-partitioned table in your database. Each partition in the table contains the sales data for aquarter.The partition related to the current quarter is modified frequently and other partitions undergo fewer datamanipulations. The preferences for the table are set to their default values. You collect statistics for the tableusing the following command in regular intervals:SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_STATS.GATHER_TABLE_STATS('SH','SA LES',GRANULARITY=>'GLOBAL');

You need statistics to be collected more quickly. What can you do to achieve this?

A. Set DYNAMIC_SAMPLING to level 4.

B. Set the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter to BASIC.

C. Set the INCREMENTAL value to TRUE for the partition table.

D. Increase the value of STALE_PERCENT for the partition table.

Correct Answer: CSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Oracle will update the global table statistics by scanning only the partitions that have been changed instead ofthe entire table if the following conditions hold:

INCREMENTAL value for the partitioned table is set to TRUEPUBLISH value for the partitioned table is set to TRUE;User specifies AUTO_SAMPLE_SIZE for ESTIMATE_PERCENT and AUTO for GRANULARITY when gatheringstatistics on the table

If the INCREMENTAL value for the partitioned table was set to FALSE (default value), a full table scan is used tomaintain the global statistics which is a much more resource intensive and time-consuming operation for largetables.

QUESTION 29Which two statements are true regarding the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) in Oracle Database 11g?(Choose two.)

A. A single ADR can support multiple ADR homes for different database instances.B. The alert files are stored in XML file format in the TRACE directory of each ADR home.C. If the environmental variable ORACLE_BASE is set, then DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to $ORACLE_BASE.

D. The BACKGROUND_DUMP_DEST initialization parameter overrides the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST initializationparameter for the location of the alert log file.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:the ADR root directory is known as ADR base. Its location is set by the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST initializationparameter. If this parameter is omitted or left null, the database sets DIAGNOSTIC_DEST upon startup asfollows:

If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to the directory designated byORACLE_BASE.If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is not set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to ORACLE_HOME/log

Within ADR base, there can be multiple ADR homes, where each ADR home is the root directory for alldiagnostic data—traces, dumps, the alert log, and so on—for a particular instance of a particular Oracle productor component. For example, in an Oracle Real Application Clusters environment with Oracle ASM, eachdatabase instance, Oracle ASM instance, and listener has an ADR home.

QUESTION 30Which two statements are true with respect to the maintenance window? (Choose two.)

A. A DBA can enable or disable an individual task in all maintenance windows.B. A DBA cannot change the duration of the maintenance window after it is created.

C. In case of a long maintenance window, all Automated Maintenance Tasks are restarted every four hours.D. A DBA can control the percentage of the resource allocated to the Automated Maintenance Tasks in each

window.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 31Which two statements are correct about database transportation? (Choose two.)

A. The source and target platforms must be the sameB. Redo logs, control files and temp files are also transportedC. The transported database must have the same database identifier (DBID) as the source database and

cannot be changedD. The COMPATIBLE parameter must be set to 10.0.0.0 or higher and the database must be opened in

readonly mode before being transportedE. Recovery Manager (RMAN) is used to convert the necessary data files of the database if the target platform

is different and has different endian format

Correct Answer: DESection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 32You want to perform the following operations for the DATA ASM disk group:

Verify the consistency of the disk.Cross-check all the file extent maps and allocation tables for consistency. Check whether the alias metadata directory and file directory are linked correctly.Check that ASM metadata directories do not have unreachable allocated blocks.

Which command accomplishes these tasks?

A. ALTER DISKGROUP data CHECK;

B. ALTER DISKGROUP data CHECK DISK;

C. ALTER DISKGROUP data CHECK FILE;

D. ALTER DISKGROUP data CHECK DISK IN FAILURE GROUP 1;

Correct Answer: ASection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Syntax: ALTER DISKGROUP <disk_group_id> CHECK [REPAIR | NOREPAIR];

The check_diskgroup_clause lets you verify the internal consistency of Oracle ASM disk group metadata. Thedisk group must be mounted. Oracle ASM displays summary errors and writes the details of the detected errorsin the alert log.

The CHECK keyword performs the following operations:

Checks the consistency of the disk.

Cross checks all the file extent maps and allocation tables for consistently.Checks that the alias metadata directory and file directory are linked correctly.Checks that the alias directory tree is linked correctly.Checks that Oracle ASM metadata directories do not have unreachable allocated blocks.

Refer to here

QUESTION 33Examine the following RMAN command:BACKUP DATABASETAG TESTDBKEEP UNTIL 'SYSDATE+1'RESTORE POINT TESTDB06;

Which two statements are true regarding the backup taken by using the above RMAN command? (Choosetwo.)

A. Only data files and the control file are backed up.B. Archived redo logs are backed up only if the database is open during the backup.C. The backup is deleted after one day, regardless of the default retention policy settings.D. The backup becomes obsolete after one day, regardless of the default retention policy settings.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


keepOptionOverrides any configured retention policy for this backup so that the backup is not considered obsolete, asshown in Example 2-26.You can use the KEEP syntax to generate archival database backups that satisfy business or legalrequirements. The KEEP setting is an attribute of the backup set (not individual backup piece) or image copy.Note: You cannot use KEEP with BACKUP BACKUPSET.With the KEEP syntax, you can keep the backups so that they are considered obsolete after a specified time(KEEP UNTIL), or make them never obsolete (KEEP FOREVER). As shown in Example 2-27, you must beconnected to a recovery catalog when you specify KEEP FOREVER.Note: You can use CHANGE to alter the status of a backup generated with KEEP.See Also: keepOption for more information about backups made with the KEEP option

Creating a Consistent Database Backup for Archival PurposesThis example uses a keepOption to create an archival backup set that cannot be considered obsolete for oneyear. The example backs up the database, archives the redo in the current online logs to ensure that thisnew backup is consistent, and backs up only those archived redo log files needed to restore the data filebackup to a consistent state.The BACKUP command also creates a restore point to match the SCN at which this backup is consistent.The FORMAT parameter must be capable of creating multiple backup pieces in multiple backup sets.

BACKUP DATABASE FORMAT '/disk1/archival_backups/db_%U.bck' TAG quarterly KEEP UNTIL TIME 'SYSDATE + 365' RESTORE POINT Q1FY06;

QUESTION 34You want the Automatic SQL Tuning process to stop accepting and implementing the recommended SQLprofiles automatically.

Which action would you perform to achieve this?

A. Edit the automatic maintenance window group configuration.B. Set the CURSOR_SHARING parameter to EXACT for the database instance.

C. Use the DBMS_SQLTUNE.SET_TUNING_TASK_PARAMETERS procedure to set ACCEPT_SQL_PROFILES toFALSE.

D. Set the SQLTUNE_CATEGORY parameter to DEFAULT for the database instance.

Correct Answer: CSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation


QUESTION 35Which two statements are true regarding the functionality of the remap command in ASMCMD? (Choose two.)

A. It repairs blocks that have read disk I/O errors.B. It checks whether the alias metadata directory and the file directory are linked correctly.C. It repairs blocks by always reading them from the mirror copy and writing them to the original location.D. It reads the blocks from a good copy of an ASM mirror and rewrites them to an alternate location on disk if

the blocks on the original location cannot be read properly.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Reference from the Oracle document release v11.1 at here:Repairs a range of physical blocks on a disk. The remap command only repairs blocks that have read disk I/Oerrors. It does not repair blocks that contain corrupted contents, whether or not those blocks can be read. Thecommand assumes a physical block size of 512 bytes and supports all allocation unit sizes (1 to 64 MB).

Reference from the Oracle document release v11.2 at here:The remap command marks a range of blocks as unusable on the disk and relocates any data allocated in thatrange.

QUESTION 36During the installation of Oracle Database 11g, you do not set ORACLE_BASE explicitly. You selected the optionto create a database as part of the installation.

How would this environment variable setting affect the installation?

A. The installation terminates with an error.B. The installation proceeds with the default value without warnings and errors.C. The installation proceeds with the default value but it would not be an OFA-compliant database.D. The installation proceeds with the default value but a message would be generated in the alert log file.

Correct Answer: DSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 37The SQL Tuning Advisor configuration has default settings in your database instance.

Which recommendation is automatically implemented after the SQL Tuning Advisor is run as part of theautomatic maintenance task?

A. statistics recommendationsB. SQL Profile recommendationsC. Index-related recommendationsD. restructuring of SQL recommendations



QUESTION 38View the Exhibit to examine the Automatic SQL Tuning result details. Which action would you suggest for theselected SQL statement in the Exhibit?

Exhibit:

A. Accept the recommended SQL profile.B. Collect statistics for the related objects.C. Run the Access Advisor for the SQL statement.D. Run the Segment Advisor for recommendations.



QUESTION 39Evaluate the following code:SQL>VARIABLE task_name VARCHAR2(255);SQL>VARIABLE sql_stmt VARCHAR2(4000);

SQL>BEGIN :sql_stmt := 'SELECT COUNT(*) FROM customers WH ERE cust_state_province=''CA'''; :task_name := 'MY_QUICKTUNE_TASK'; DBMS_ADVISOR.QUICK_TUNE(DBMS_ADVISOR.SQLACCESS_ADVISOR, :task_name, :sql_s tmt);END;

What is the outcome of this block of code?

A. It creates a task and workload, and executes the task.B. It creates a task and workload but does not execute the task.C. It produces an error because a template has not been created.D. It produces an error because the SQL Tuning Set has not been created.

Correct Answer: ASection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation


QUESTION 40You have applications that have frequently executed queries, and produce small and static result sets. Youconfigure the sqlnet.ora file in the client machine to set a nonzero value for the OCI_RESULT_CACHE_MAX_SIZE parameter.What is the purpose of this configuration?

A. to avoid round trips to the server by enabling caching of query results in client memoryB. to improve performance by storing a copy of the data from the private SQL area of the PGAC. to enhance the query performance by creating a cache in the client memory for sorting operationsD. to avoid the storing of query plans and results in the server by creating a cache in the client memory

Correct Answer: ASection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 41You plan to use SQL Performance Analyzer to analyze the SQL workload. You created a SQL Tuning Set as apart of the workload capturing. What information is captured as part of this process? (Choose all that apply.)

A. the SQL textB. the execution planC. the execution contextD. the execution frequencyE. the system change number (SCN)

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/cn/articles/o69ocp-099954.html

You plan to use SQL Performance Analyzer to analyze a SQL workload, and you’ve created a SQL tuning setas a part of the workload capture. What information is captured as part of this process?

A. The SQL text B. The execution context C. The execution frequency D. The performance statistics

The correct answers are A, B, and C. While creating the SQL tuning set, SQL Performance Analyzer capturesthe SQL text, the execution context, and the number of times the statement is executed. SQL PerformanceAnalyzer then uses that information to analyze the performance of the SQL statement.

QUESTION 42View the following SQL statements:Transaction T1SQL> INSERT INTO hr.regions 2 VALUES (5,'Pole'); 3 COMMIT;

Transaction T2SQL> UPDATE hr.regions 2 SET region_name='Poles' 3 WHERE region_id = 5; 4 COMMIT;

Transaction T3SQL> UPDATE hr.regions 2 SET region_name='North and South Poles' 3 WHERE region_id = 5;

You want to back out transaction T2. Which option would you use?

A. It is possible, but transaction T3 also backs out.B. It is possible with the NOCASCADE_FORCE option.

C. It is possible with the NONCONFLICT_ONLY option.

D. It is not possible because it has conflicts with transaction T3.

Correct Answer: BSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Table 12-2 Flashback TRANSACTION_BACKOUT Options

CASCADEBacks out specified transactions and all dependent transactions in a post-order fashion (that is, children arebacked out before parents are backed out).Without CASCADE, if any dependent transaction is not specified, an error occurs.

NOCASCADEDefault. Backs out specified transactions, which are expected to have no dependent transactions. Firstdependent transactions causes an error and appears in *_FLASHBACK_TXN_REPORT.

NOCASCADE_FORCEBacks out specified transactions, ignoring dependent transactions. Server runs undo SQL statements forspecified transactions in reverse order of commit times.If no constraints break and you are satisfied with the result, you can commit the changes; otherwise, you canroll them back.

NONCONFLICT_ONLYBacks out changes to nonconflicting rows of the specified transactions. Database remains consistent, buttransaction atomicity is lost.

QUESTION 43You have a very large table that your users access frequently. Which of the following advisors will recommendany indexes to improve the performance of queries against this table?

A. The Automatic Memory Manager (AMM)B. The SQL Tuning AdvisorC. The Segment AdvisorD. The SQL Access Advisor


Explanation/Reference:Explanation:The SQL Access Advisor analyzes all SQL running during a given time period and recommends indexes andmaterialized views to improve the overall performance of the database.A is incorrect because there is no such advisor as the Automatic Memory Manager. B is incorrect because the SQL Tuning Advisor looks only at a single SQL statement and providesrecommendations. C is incorrect because the Segment Advisor recommends segment shrink when table and index segments areheavily fragmented.


QUESTION 44What is the advantage of setting the ASM-preferred mirror read for the stretch cluster configuration?

A. It improves resync operations.B. This feature enables much faster file opens.C. It improves performance as fewer extent pointers are needed in the shared pool.D. It improves performance by reading from a copy of an extent closest to the node.

Correct Answer: DSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Preferred Read Failure Groups

When you configure Oracle ASM failure groups, it might be more efficient for a node to read from an extent thatis closest to the node, even if that extent is a secondary extent. In other words, you can configure Oracle ASMto read from a secondary extent if that extent is closer to the node instead of Oracle ASM reading from theprimary copy which might be farther from the node. Using the preferred read failure groups feature is mostuseful in extended clusters.

QUESTION 45What happens when you run the SQL Tuning Advisor with limited scope?

A. Access path analysis is not performed for SQL statements.B. SQL structure analysis is not performed for SQL statements.C. SQL Profile recommendations are not generated for SQL statements.D. Staleness and absence of statistics are not checked for the objects in the SQL Tuning Advisor.


QUESTION 46You issue the following command on the RMAN prompt.REPORT NEED BACKUP DAYS 5;

Which statement is true about executing this command?

A. It will display a list of files that need incremental backupB. It will display a list of files that need backup after five daysC. It will display a list of files that were backed up in the last five daysD. It will display a list of files that have not been backed up in the last five daysE. It will apply the current retention policy to determine the files that need to be backed up



QUESTION 47View the Exhibit to examine the error obtained during the I/O calibration process. There are no data files on rawdevices. What is the reason for this error?

Exhibit:

A. The DISK_ASYNCH_IO parameter is set to TRUE.

B. The FILESYSTEMIO_OPTIONS parameter is set to NONE.

C. Another session runs the I/O calibration process concurrently.D. The pending area has not been created before running the I/O calibration process.


Explanation/Reference:9.1.1.2 FILESYSTEMIO_OPTIONS Initialization Parameter

You can use the FILESYSTEMIO_OPTIONS initialization parameter to enable or disable asynchronous I/O ordirect I/O on file system files. This parameter is platform-specific and has a default value that is best for aparticular platform.

FILESYTEMIO_OPTIONS can be set to one of the following values:

ASYNCH: enable asynchronous I/O on file system files, which has no timing requirement for transmission.

DIRECTIO: enable direct I/O on file system files, which bypasses the buffer cache.

SETALL: enable both asynchronous and direct I/O on file system files.

NONE: disable both asynchronous and direct I/O on file system files.

--------------------------------------------------- ---------------To enable asynch I/O, set two values in the init.ora file (or spfile) and recycle the instances:

disk_asynch_io = truefilesystemio_options = asynch

The first one is default; so you may not have to change it. The default of the second one is NONE; so you willprobably have to change it. After setting these values and recycling the instance,

QUESTION 48Which statement about recovering from the loss of a redo log group is true?

A. If the lost redo log group is ACTIVE, you should first attempt to clear the log file.

B. If the lost redo log group is CURRENT, you must clear the log file.

C. If the lost redo log group is ACTIVE, you must restore, perform cancel-based incomplete recovery, andopen the database using the RESETLOGS option.

D. If the lost redo log group is CURRENT, you must restore, perform cancel-based incomplete recovery, andopen the database using the RESETLOGS option.

Correct Answer: DSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 49Examine the following command:ALTER DISKGROUP data MOUNT FORCE;

In which scenario can you use the above command to mount the disk group?

A. when ASM disk goes offlineB. when one or more ASM files are droppedC. when some disks in a disk group are offlineD. when some disks in a failure group for a disk group are rebalancing


Explanation/Reference:In the FORCE mode, Oracle ASM attempts to mount the disk group even if it cannot discover all of the devicesthat belong to the disk group. This setting is useful if some of the disks in a normal or high redundancy diskgroup became unavailable while the disk group was dismounted. When MOUNT FORCE succeeds, OracleASM takes the missing disks offline.

If Oracle ASM discovers all of the disks in the disk group, then MOUNT FORCE fails. Therefore, use theMOUNT FORCE setting only if some disks are unavailable. Otherwise, use NOFORCE.

In normal- and high-redundancy disk groups, disks from one failure group can be unavailable and MOUNTFORCE will succeed. Also in high-redundancy disk groups, two disks in two different failure groups can beunavailable and MOUNT FORCE will succeed. Any other combination of unavailable disks causes theoperation to fail, because Oracle ASM cannot guarantee that a valid copy of all user data or metadata exists onthe available disks.

Refer to here

QUESTION 50To control the execution of a server process when it is receiving bad packets from a potentially malicious client,you set the SEC_PROTOCOL_ERROR_FURTHER_ACTION initialization parameter as follows:SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET SEC_PROTOCOL_ERROR_FURTHER_ACTION = Drop,10;

What is the significance of this setting?

A. It terminates the client connection after 10 bad packets and the client cannot reconnect to the sameinstance.

B. It terminates the client connection after 10 bad packets but the client can still reconnect, and attempt thesame operation again.

C. It terminates the client connection 10 seconds after receiving a bad packet and the client cannot reconnectto the same instance.

D. It terminates the client connection after receiving a bad packet and the client can reconnect to the sameinstance after 10 minutes.



QUESTION 51You have the following requirements in relation to the detection of block corruption for your database instance:

Check for logical self-consistency of data blocks when modified in memory.Checksums are calculated before and after the block change.Checks are performed for the lost writes to the physical standby database.

Which method would help you perform the above checks automatically?

A. Set the DB_SECUREFILE parameter to PERMITTED.

B. Set the DB_ULTRA_SAFE parameter to DATA_ONLY.

C. Set the DB_LOCK_CHECKSUM parameter to TYPICAL.

D. Set the DB_LOST_WRITE_PROTECT parameter to TYPICAL.

Correct Answer: BSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Parameter type StringSyntax DB_ULTRA_SAFE = { OFF | DATA_ONLY | DATA_AND_INDEX }Default value OFFModifiable NoBasic NoDB_ULTRA_SAFE sets the default values for other parameters that control protection levels.

Values :

OFF

When any of DB_BLOCK_CHECKING, DB_BLOCK_CHECKSUM, or DB_LOST_WRITE_PROTECT areexplicitly set, no changes are made.

DATA_ONLY

DB_BLOCK_CHECKING will be set to MEDIUM.DB_LOST_WRITE_PROTECT will be set to TYPICAL.DB_BLOCK_CHECKSUM will be set to FULL.

DATA_AND_INDEX

DB_BLOCK_CHECKING will be set to FULL.DB_LOST_WRITE_PROTECT will be set to TYPICAL.DB_BLOCK_CHECKSUM will be set to FULL.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter type StringSyntax DB_BLOCK_CHECKING = { FALSE | OFF | LOW | MEDIUM | TRUE |FULL }Default value FALSEModifiable ALTER SYSTEMBasic NoDB_BLOCK_CHECKING specifies whether or not Oracle performs block checking for database blocks.

Values :

OFF or FALSE

No block checking is performed for blocks in user tablespaces. However, semantic block checking for SYSTEMtablespace blocks is always turned on.

LOW

Basic block header checks are performed after block contents change in memory (for example, after UPDATEor INSERT statements, on-disk reads, or inter-instance block transfers in Oracle RAC).

MEDIUM

All LOW checks and full semantic checks are performed for all objects except indexes (whose contents can bereconstructed by a drop+rebuild on encountering a corruption).

FULL or TRUE

All LOW and MEDIUM checks and full semantic checks are performed for all objects.

QUESTION 52You want to use RMAN to create compressed backups.Which statement is true about the compression algorithms that RMAN can use?

A. The BZIP2 compression algorithm consumes more CPU resources than the ZLIB compression algorithm.B. The ZLIB compression algorithm consumes more CPU resources than the BZIP2 compression algorithm.C. The ZLIB compression algorithm provides maximum compression and produces smaller backups than the

BZIP2 compression algorithm.D. Only the BZIP2 compression algorithm can be used to make compressed backups to disk.

Correct Answer: ASection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation

QUESTION 53Evaluate the following function code:CREATE FUNCTION get_dept_avg(dept_id NUMBER) RETURN NUMBER RESULT_CACHE RELIES_ON (EMPLOYEES) IS avgsal NUMBER(6);BEGIN SELECT AVG(SALARY)INTO avgsal FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID = dept_id;

RETURN avgsal;END get_dept_avg;

Which statement is true regarding the above function?

A. The cached result becomes invalid when any structural change is done to the EMPLOYEES table.

B. If the function execution results in an unhandled exception, the exception result is also stored in the cache.C. Each time the function is invoked in a different session, the current result in the result cache gets

overwritten.D. If the function is invoked with a different parameter value, the existing result in the result cache gets

overwritten by the latest value.



QUESTION 54Following is the list of locations in random order where oranfstab can be placed.1./etc/mtab2.$ORACLE_HOME/dbs/oranfstab3./etc/oranfstab

What is the sequence in which Direct NFS will search the locations?

A. 1, 2, 3B. 3, 2, 1C. 2, 3, 1D. 1, 3, 2



QUESTION 55You discover that your Recycle Bin contains two tables with the same name, MY_TABLE. You also have a tablenamed MY_TABLE in your schema. You execute the following statement:FLASHBACK TABLE my_table TO BEFORE DROP RENAME TO m y_table2;

What will be the result of executing this statement?

A. One of the tables is recovered from the Recycle Bin using a First In First Out (FIFO) approach.B. One of the tables is recovered from the Recycle Bin using a Last In First Out (LIFO) approach.C. Both the tables are recovered from the Recycle Bin with one table renamed to MY_TABLE2 and the other to

a system-generated name.D. None of the tables are recovered from the Recycle Bin, and the statement returns an error.



QUESTION 56Which background process of a database instance, using Automatic Storage Management (ASM), connects asa foreground process into the ASM instance?

A. ASMBB. PMONC. RBALD. SMON


Explanation/Reference:ASMB (ASM Background Process): Communicates with the ASM instance, managing storage and providingstatistics, runs in ASM instances when the ASMCMD cp command runs or when the database instance firststarts if the server parameter file is stored in ASM. ASMB also runs with Oracle Cluster Registry on ASM.

RBAL (ASM Rebalance Master Process): In an ASM instance, it coordinates rebalance activity for disk groups.In a database instances, it manages ASM disk groups.

PMON (Process Monitor): Monitors the other background processes and performs process recovery when a

server or dispatcher process terminates abnormally.

SMON (System Monitor Process): Performs critical tasks such as instance recovery and dead transactionrecovery, and maintenance tasks such as temporary space reclamation, data dictionary cleanup, and undotablespace management

QUESTION 57Which statement is true when Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) baselines are created using baselinetemplates?

A. AWR baselines are always created as repeating baselines.B. AWR baselines can be created on the basis of two time values.C. AWR baselines are always created with infinite expiration duration.D. AWR baselines are always created using the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) retention period as

expiration duration.

Correct Answer: BSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 58You have not configured Oracle Managed Files (OMF) in your database. You do not want to scan the entiredatafile every time an incremental backup is performed. You decide to enable the block change trackingfeature. Which statement should you use to enable the block change tracking feature?

A. ALTER DATABASE ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING;

B. ALTER SYSTEM ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING USING FILE <path>;

C. ALTER DATABASE ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING USING FILE <path>;

D. ALTER SYSTEM ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING;

Correct Answer: CSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 59For which two situations would you use functionality provided by the Resource Manager? (Choose two.)

A. setting idle timeout limits on resource plansB. saving storage space by using compressed backup setsC. creating jobs that will run automatically at a scheduled timeD. assigning priorities to jobs to manage access to system resourcesE. creating alerts to perform notification when tablespaces are low on available space resources

Correct Answer: ADSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

QUESTION 60Which of the following advisors within the Oracle advisory framework will analyze a single SQL statement andmake recommendations for performance improvement?

A. SQL Repair AdvisorB. SQL OptimizerC. SQL Access AdvisorD. SQL Tuning Advisor


QUESTION 61You want to convert your existing non-ASM files to ASM files for the database PROD. Which method orcommand would you use to accomplish this task?

A. Data Pump Export and ImportB. conventional export and importC. the CONVERT command of RMAN

D. the BACKUP AS COPY command of RMAN


Explanation/Reference:If you have enough disk space that you can have both your entire non-ASM database and your ASM disk groupon disk at the same time, you can do the migration directly without using tapes.1. Back up your database files as copies to the ASM disk group.

BACKUP AS COPY INCREMENTAL LEVEL 0 DATABASE FORMAT ‘+DISK’ TAG‘ORA_ASM_MIGRATION’;

REF: Oracle(r) 10g Backup and Recovery Advance User’s Guide, 16-2

QUESTION 62Which method would you use to undo the changes made by a particular transaction without affecting thechanges made by other transactions?

A. point-in-time recoveryB. execute the ROLLBACK command with transaction number

C. flashback the database to before the transaction was committedD. determine all the necessary undo SQL statements from FLASHBACK_TRANSACTION_QUERY and use them

for recovery

Correct Answer: DSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 63You performed an incomplete recovery and opened the database with the RESETLOGS option. TheLOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT parameter is set to 'ora_%t_%s_%r.log' . Which statement regarding the archivedredo log files, created in an earlier incarnation of the database, is true?

A. The archived redo log files will be overwritten.

B. The archived redo log files are deleted automatically.C. The archived redo log files should be moved to some other location.D. The archived redo log files are still maintained because the file names are unique.



QUESTION 64An online tablespace, TEST_TBS, is full and you realize that no server-managed tablespace threshold alertswere generated for the TEST_TBS tablespace. What could be the reason, if the TEST_TBS tablespace doesnot include autoextensible data files?

A. TEST_TBS is a small file tablespace.B. TEST_TBS is a bigfile tablespace (BFT).C. TEST_TBS is the default temporary tablespace.D. TEST_TBS is a dictionary-managed tablespace.


QUESTION 65Which two initialization parameters would you set to enable Automatic Shared Memory Management? (Choosetwo.)

A. set SHARED_POOL_SIZE to zero

B. set STATISTICS_LEVEL to BASIC

C. set SGA_TARGET to a non-zero value

D. set DB_CACHE_SIZE to a non-zero value

E. set STATISTICS_LEVEL to TYPICAL or ALL

Correct Answer: ACSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 66On which two database objects can the VERSIONS clause of the Flashback Versions Query be used? (Choosetwo.)

A. fixed tablesB. heap tablesC. external tablesD. temporary tablesE. Index-Organized Tables (IOTs)F. views

Correct Answer: BESection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 67You have three temporary tablespace groups named G1, G2, and G3 in your database. You are creating a newtemporary tablespace as follows:CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE TEMP1 TEMPFILE '/u1/dat a/temp1.dbf' SIZE 10MTABLESPACE GROUP '';

Which statement regarding the above command is correct?

A. It will create the tablespace TEMP1 in group G1.B. It will create the tablespace TEMP1 in group G3.C. It will not add the tablespace TEMP1 to any group.D. It will create the tablespace TEMP1 in the default group.



QUESTION 68The EMP table exists in your schema. You want to execute the following query:SELECT ename, salFROM empAS OF TIMESTAMP (SYSTIMESTAMP - INTERVAL '6' MINUTE )WHERE ename = 'ALLEN';What are the minimum requirements for the statement to execute successfully? (Choose all that apply)

A. ARCHIVELOG mode must be enabled

B. Row Movement must be enabled for the tableC. FLASHBACK must be set to ON for the database

D. The UNDO_MANAGEMENT parameter must be set to AUTO

E. The UNDO_RETENTION parameter must be set appropriately

Correct Answer: DESection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 69You executed the following SQL statement to shrink the EMPLOYEES table segment stored in the EXAMPLEtablespace:ALTER TABLE employees SHRINK SPACE CASCADE;

Which statement is correct in this scenario?

A. The EMPLOYEES table will be changed to read-only mode during the shrink operation.B. The indexes created on the EMPLOYEES table will need to be rebuilt after the shrink operation is over.

C. The shrink behavior will be cascaded to all dependent segments of the table that support a shrink operation.D. Data manipulation language (DML) operations will not be possible on the EMPLOYEES table during the

COMPACTION phase of the shrink operation.



QUESTION 70The Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM) analysis runs every 60 minutes on your database. Yourdatabase is facing a series of interrelated problems over a period of two hours. You need to ensure that theADDM analysis is run over a time span of two hours in future. What would you do?

A. Create two custom ADDM tasks.B. Modify the AWR snapshot time interval to two hours.C. Create a new scheduler window for a time period of two hours.D. Modify the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) snapshot retention period to two hours.


QUESTION 71You have 100 segments in the USERS tablespace. You realize that the USERS tablespace is running low onspace.You can use Segment Advisor to _____.

A. identify the segments that you should shrinkB. modify the storage parameters for the tablespaceC. automatically shrink the segments with unused spaceD. check the alerts generated for the tablespace that is running low on space


QUESTION 72You are using Recovery Manager (RMAN) to perform backups. In which three situations would you perform acompressed backup? (Choose three.)

A. You are backing up to tape and your tape device performs its own compression.B. You are making image copies, and you have not enabled tablespace compression.C. You are using disk-based backups and disk space in your Flash Recovery Area, or other disk-based backup

destinations are limited.D. You are performing your backups to some device over a network where reduced network bandwidth is more

important than CPU usage.E. You are using some archival backup media, such as CD or DVD, where reducing backup sizes saves

media costs and archival storage.

Correct Answer: CDE

Section: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 73Immediately after adding a new disk to or removing an existing disk from an ASM instance, you find that theperformance of the database goes down initially until the time the addition or removal process is completed,and then gradually becomes normal.Which two activities would you perform to maintain a consistent performance of the database while adding orremoving disks? (Choose two.)

A. Define the POWER option while adding or removing the disks.

B. Increase the number of ARB processes by setting up a higher value for ASM_POWER_LIMIT.

C. Increase the number of DBWR processes by setting up a higher value for DB_WRITER_PROCESSES.

D. Increase the number of slave database writer processes by setting up a higher value for DBWR_IO_SLAVES.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:ARBn (ASM Rebalance Process): Rebalances data extents within an ASM disk group, possible processes areARB0-ARB9 and ARBA.

ALTER DISKGROUP..POWER clause, specify a value from 0 to 11, where 0 stops the rebalance operation and11 permits Oracle ASM to execute the rebalance as fast as possible. The value you specify in the POWERclause defaults to the value of the ASM_POWER_LIMIT initialization parameter. If you omit the POWER clause,then Oracle ASM executes both automatic and specified rebalance operations at the power determined by thevalue of the ASM_POWER_LIMIT initialization parameter.

Note:Beginning with Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.2), if the COMPATIBLE.ASM disk group attribute is setto 11.2.0.2 or higher, then you can specify a value from 0 to 1024 in the POWER clause.

QUESTION 74View the Exhibit.As shown in the diagram, in-memory statistics are transferred to the disk at regular intervals.Which background process performs this activity?

Exhibit:

A. CKPT

B. SMON

C. MMON

D. DBWR

Correct Answer: CSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 75Identify three key features of ASM. (Choose three.)

A. file stripingB. allocation unit mirroringC. automatic disk rebalancingD. automatic file size incrementE. automatic undo management

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

QUESTION 76You have three production databases, HRDB, FINDB, and ORGDB, that use the same ASM instance. At theend of the day, while all three production database instances are running, you execute the following commandon the ASM instance :SQL> shutdown immediate;

What is the result of executing this command?

A. The ASM instance is shut down, but the other instances are still running.

B. It results in an error because other database instances are connected to it.C. All the instances, including the ASM instance, are shut down in the IMMEDIATE mode.D. HRDB, FINDB, and ORGDB instances are shut down in the ABORT mode and the ASM instance is shut

down in the IMMEDIATE mode.

Correct Answer: BSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 77You enable block change tracking. You issue the following command:BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 0 DATABASE;

The next day, you issue the following command:BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 1 CUMULATIVE DATABASE;

Which statement about the use of the change tracking file is true?

A. RMAN reads the block change tracking file only when it performs the incremental level 0 backup.B. RMAN reads the block change tracking file when it performs both incremental backups.C. RMAN reads the block change tracking file only when it performs the incremental level 1 backup.D. RMAN does not read the block change tracking file when it performs either incremental backup.



QUESTION 78You executed the following command:RMAN> RECOVER COPY OF DATAFILE '/u01/app/oracle/ora data/orcl/users01.dbf';

Which statement regarding the above command is correct?

A. The '/u01/app/oracle/oradata/orcl/users01.dbf' data file is recovered from the image copy.B. The '/u01/app/oracle/oradata/orcl/users01.dbf' data file is recovered from the last incremental backup.C. Image copies of the '/u01/app/oracle/oradata/orcl/users01.dbf' data file are updated with all changes up to

incremental backup SCN.D. Image copies of the '/u01/app/oracle/oradata/orcl/users01.dbf' data file are recovered using the above

command if data file recovery fails.

Correct Answer: CSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 79When running the tablespace point-in-time commandrecover tablespace usersuntil time '10/06/2008:22:42:00'

auxiliary destination 'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

you receive the following error:RMAN-00571: ======================================= ==================== RMAN-00569: =============== ERROR MESSAGE STACK FOL LOWS =============== RMAN-00571: ======================================= ==================== RMAN-03002: failure of recover command at 10/08/200 8 16:00:30 RMAN-20202: Tablespace not found in the recovery ca talog RMAN-06019: could not translate tablespace name "US ERS"

What is the likely cause of the error?

A. The database is in ARCHIVELOG mode.B. There is not a current backup of the database available.C. The USERS tablespace has dependent objects in other tablespaces and can not be a part of a TSPITR

alone.D. The USERS tablespace is not eligible for TSPITR because it has invalid objects.E. The recover tablespace command is incorrect and generates the error.

Correct Answer: BSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 80Which of the following restrictions are NOT true with respect to tablespace point-in-time recovery? (Choose allthat apply.)

A. The target database must be in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

B. No backup is required of the database before you perform a TSPITR.C. You must have all archived redo logs generated since the last backup up to the point to which you want to

restore the transport set.D. If you rename a tablespace, you can not perform a TSPITR to any point in time before that rename

operation occurred.E. If you have tables in tablespace_1 that have associated constraints in tablespace_2, then you must

transport both tablespaces.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 81If you are going to run a TSPITR recovery, which view will help you to determine which objects will be lostduring the TSPITR?

A. TS_OBJECTS_TO_BE_DROPPEDB. TS_PTTR_OBJECT_DROPPEDC. TS_PITR_OBJECTS_TO_BE_DROPPED

D. TS_OBJECTS_DROPPEDE. TS_DROPPED_OBJECTS

Correct Answer: CSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 82Youre performing tablespace point-in-time recovery on a tablespace called USERS. If an object in thattablespace has a foreign key constraint owned by another object in the INDEX_TBS, which statement is true?

A. You cannot perform the TSPITR with the constraints enabled.B. You must perform the TSPITR recovery of both tablespaces for it to be successful.C. You can perform TSPITR only on the USERS tablespace.D. RMAN will determine if the INDEX_TBS tablespace must also be duplicated and will duplicate it

automatically.E. The TSPITR will only be successful if the constraint is enabled.

Correct Answer: BSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation

QUESTION 83When issuing the duplicate database command, you use the parameter DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT. For whatpurpose do you use this parameter?

A. To indicate the location of the auxiliary-instance online redo logs.B. To indicate the location of the target database datafiles.C. To indicate the location of the auxiliary-instance control file and online redo logs.D. To indicate the location of the auxiliary-instance database datafiles.E. This is not a valid parameter when duplicating a database.

Correct Answer: DSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 84Which of the following identifies and creates an index to minimize the DB time for a particular SQL statement?

A. The SGA Tuning AdvisorB. The SQL Access AdvisorC. The SQL Tuning AdvisorD. The Memory Advisor


Explanation/Reference:Explanation:

The SQL Access Advisor allows the DBA to gather global recommendations for a workload. The SQL Tuningadvisor is more granular, tuning a single statement.

The main functions of the SQL Access advisor is to recommend missing indexes and materialized views, but acomprehensive task analysis will also create SQL Profiles that can be used within the SQL Tuning advisor.The DBA defines the SQL used in the SQL Access Advisor task, and can choose current SQL, a user-definedset of SQL, a historical workload, or a hypothetical workload. A hypothetical workload is very useful because the DBA need-only specify the tables that participate in thequeries, and the SQL Access Advisor gathers the appropriate SQL statements to create the workload.

The SQL Tuning Advisor (STA) is primarily designed to replace the manual tuning of SQL statements andspeed up the overall SQL tuning process. The SQL Tuning Advisor studies poorly executing SQL statementsand evaluates resource consumption in terms of CPU, I/O, and temporary space. The SQL Tuning Advisor (STA) works with the Automatic Tuning Optimizer (ATO) to analyze historical SQLworkload using data from the AWR, and it generates recommendations for new indexes and materialized viewsthat will reduce the disk I/O associated with troublesome SQL statements.

http://www.dba-oracle.com/oracle10g_tuning/t_sql_tuning_advisor.htm

QUESTION 85Why should you back up a duplicated tablespace after a TSPITR is complete?

A. The tablespace cannot be duplicated or restored to any point in time after the duplication.B. The tablespace cannot be duplicated or restored to the point in time before the duplication.C. The entire database cannot be restored after a TSPITR, so a backup is required.D. You cannot bring the tablespace online until its been backed up.E. There is no requirement to do so, as RMAN will back up the tablespace after the TSPITR.


QUESTION 86In what state are the datafiles of a tablespace after a TSPITR has been successfully completed?

A. The datafiles have an ONLINE status.B. The datafiles have an OFFLINE status.C. The datafiles have an ONLINE status and are in hot backup mode prepared for an online backup.D. The datafiles have an OFFLINE status and are in hot backup mode for an online backup.E. The datafiles are in STANDBY mode.


QUESTION 87Which command do you use to generate a report of database incarnations?

A. list incarnation of databaseB. report incarnation of databaseC. list database incarnationD. database incarnation listE. report database incarnation

Correct Answer: ASection: Configuring for Recoverability

Explanation

Explanation/Reference:LIST INCARNATION OF DATABASE prod3;

QUESTION 88Which of the following Oracle features utilize the undo tablespace? (Choose all that apply)

A. Flashback QueryB. Flashback DropC. Flashback TableD. Flashback DatabaseE. Transaction ProcessingF. Recycle Bin

Correct Answer: ACESection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

QUESTION 89Which of the following statements are true regarding the Recycle Bin? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The Recycle Bin is a physical storage area for dropped objects.B. The Recycle Bin is a logical container for dropped objects.C. The Recycle Bin stores the results of a Flashback Drop operation.D. The objects in the Recycle Bin are stored in the tablespace in which they were created.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

QUESTION 90Over the course of a day, a department performed multiple DML statements (inserts, updates, deletes) onmultiple rows of data in multiple tables. The manager would like a report showing the time, table name, andDML type for all changes that were made. Which Flashback technology would be the best choice to producethe list?

A. Flashback DropB. Flashback QueryC. Flashback Transaction QueryD. Flashback Versions QueryE. Flashback Table

Correct Answer: CSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

QUESTION 91A user named Arren is executing this query:select table_name, operation, undo_sqlfromflashback_transaction_query t,

(select versions_xid as xidfrom employees versions between scn minvalueand maxvaluewhere employee_id = 123) ewhere t.xid = e.xid;When the query runs, he receives an ORA-01031: insufficient privileges error. Since the userowns the employees table, you know that it is not the problem. Which of the following SQL statements will correct this problem?

A. GRANT SELECT ANY TRANSACTION TO ARREN;

B. GRANT SELECT ON FLASHBACK_TRANSACTION_QUERY TO ARREN;

C. GRANT SELECT_ANY_TRANSACTION TO ARREN;

D. GRANT FLASHBACK TO ARREN;

E. GRANT SELECT ANY VIEW TO ARREN;

Correct Answer: ASection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 92AUM (Automatic UNDO Management) has been retaining about 15 minutes worth of undo. You want to double the retention period, but not at the expense of new transactions failing. You decide to alter the system to set the parameter UNDO_RETENTION=18000. However, AUM still retains only about 15 minutes worth of undo.

What is the problem? (Choose the best answer.)

A. You need to alter the undo tablespace to add the RETENTION GUARANTEE setting.

B. You need to increase the size of the undo tablespace.C. The undo tablespace is not set to auto-extend.D. You need to alter the Recycle Bin to add the RETENTION GUARANTEE setting.



QUESTION 93In order to perform Flashback Transaction Query operations, which of these steps are required? (Choose allthat apply.)

A. Ensure that database is running with version 10.1 compatibility.B. Enable Flashback Logging.C. Enable Supplemental Logging.D. Ensure that the database is running with version 10.0 compatibility.E. Ensure that the database is in ARCHIVELOG mode

Correct Answer: CDSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 94Users notify you that their application is failing every time they try to add new records. Because of poorapplication design, the actual ORA error message is unavailable. What might be the problem? (Choose the best answers.)

A. The application user has exceeded their undo quota.B. The FLASHBACK GUARANTEE option is set on the undo tablespace.

C. The table is currently being queried by a Flashback Transaction Query operation.D. The table is currently being queried by a Flashback Versions Query operation.E. The RETENTION GUARANTEE option is set on the undo tablespace.



QUESTION 95Which of the following statements best describes Flashback Versions Query?

A. Flashback Versions Query is used to make changes to multiple versions of data that existed between twopoints in time.

B. Flashback Versions Query is used to view all version changes on rows that existed between the time thequery was executed and a point in time in the past.

C. Flashback Versions Query is used to view version changes and the SQL to undo those changes on rowsthat existed between two points in time.

D. Flashback Versions Query is used to view all version changes on rows that existed between two points intime.


QUESTION 96Which pseudocolumn could you use to identify a unique row in a Flashback Versions Query?

A. XID

B. VERSIONS_PK

C. VERSIONS_XID

D. VERSIONS_UNIQUE



QUESTION 97Which of the following can be used in conjunction with a Flashback Versions Query to filter the results?(Choose all that apply.)

A. A range of SCN valuesB. A list of SCN valuesC. A starting and ending timestampD. Minimum and maximum sequence valuesE. A list of sequence values

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

QUESTION 98At the request of a user, you issue the following command to restore a dropped table: SQL> flashback table "BIN$F2JFfMq8Q5unbC0ceE9eJg==$ 0" to before drop;

Later, the user notifies you that the data in the table seems to be very old and out of date.What might be the problem?

A. Because a proper range of SCNs was not specified, the wrong data was restored.B. A proper range of timestamps was not specified, so the wrong data was restored.C. A previous Flashback Drop operation had been performed, resulting in multiple versions of the table being

stored in the Recycle Bin.D. Either option A or B could be correct. Not enough information was provided to determine which.E. None of the above.



QUESTION 99Which of the following statements is true regarding the VERSIONS BETWEEN clause?

A. The VERSIONS BETWEEN clause may be used in DML statements.

B. The VERSIONS BETWEEN clause may be used in DDL statements.

C. The VERSIONS BETWEEN clause may not be used to query past DDL changes to tables.

D. The VERSIONS BETWEEN clause may not be used to query past DML statements to tables.



QUESTION 100Which of the following statements is true regarding implementing a Flashback Table recovery?

A. An SCN is never used to perform a Flashback Table recovery.B. If a significant number of changes have been made to the table, row movement must be enabled.C. The tablespace must be offline before performing a Flashback Table recovery.

D. Flashback Table recovery is completely dependent on the availability of undo data in the undo tablespace.


E02

QUESTION 1In your database, the RESULT_CACHE_MODE parameter has been set to MANUAL in the initialization parameterfile. You issued the following command:SQL>SELECT /*+ RESULT_CACHE */ sale_category, sum(s ale_amt) FROM salesGROUP BY sale_category;Where would the result of this query be stored?

A. database buffer cacheB. shared poolC. PGAD. large pool

Correct Answer: BSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 2You need to perform an online table redefinition of an existing SALES table to partition it into two tablespacesTBS1 and TBS2. The SALES table has a materialized view, materialized log, indexes, referential integrityconstraint, and triggers with the PRECEDES clause existing on it.

What action is required for dependent objects when you perform online table redefinition?

A. The dependent materialized view should have a complete refresh performed after the online tableredefinition process.

B. Triggers with the PRECEDES clause should be disabled before the online table redefinition process.C. Referential integrity constraints must be manually enabled after the online table redefinition process.D. The materialized log should be dropped before the online table redefinition process.


Explanation/Reference:When performing the online table redefinition, you will:Copy dependent objects (such as triggers, indexes, materialized view logs, grants, and constraints)and statistics from the table being redefined to th e interim table, using one of the following two methods.Method 1 is the preferred method because it is more automatic, but there may be times that you would chooseto use method 2. Method 1 also enables you to copy table statistics to the interim table.

Results of the Redefinition Process (link)

The following are the end results of the redefinition process:

The original table is redefined with the columns, indexes, constraints, grants, triggers, and statistics of theinterim table.

Dependent objects that were registered, either explicitly using REGISTER_DEPENDENT_OBJECT or implicitlyusing COPY_TABLE_DEPENDENTS, are renamed automatically so that dependent object names on theredefined table are the same as before redefinition.

Note:If no registration is done or no automatic copying is done, then you must manually rename the dependentobjects.The referential constraints involving the interim table now involve the redefined table and areenabled.

Any indexes, triggers, materialized view logs, grants, and constraints defined on the original table (prior toredefinition) are transferred to the interim table and are dropped when the user drops the interim table. Anyreferential constraints involving the original table before the redefinition now involve the interim table and aredisabled.

Some PL/SQL objects, views, synonyms, and other table-dependent objects may become invalidated. Onlythose objects that depend on elements of the table that were changed are invalidated. For example, if a PL/SQL procedure queries only columns of the redefined table that were unchanged by the redefinition, theprocedure remains valid. See "Managing Object Dependencies" for more information about schema objectdependencies.

Restrictions for Online Redefinition of Tables (link)

After redefining a table that has a materialized view log, the subsequent refresh of any dependentmaterialized view must be a complete refresh.

QUESTION 3You want to take the backup of the USERS tablespace. It has a single data file of 900 MB. You have tape drivesof 300 MB each. The SBT channel is configured for the RMAN. To accomplish the backup, you issued thefollowing RMAN command:RMAN> BACKUP SECTION SIZE 300M TABLESPACE users;

Which two statements are true regarding the execution of the above command? (Choose two.)

A. The RMAN parallelizes the backup although the parallelism is not set for a channel.B. The backup piece size will be limited to 300 MB.C. The operation is accomplished using the default channel available.D. Three channels for the tape drive must be configured by setting the parallelism to three.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation

Explanation/Reference:SECTION SIZE sizeSpec Specifies the size of each backup section produced during a data filebackup.By setting this parameter, RMAN can create a multisection backup. In a multisection backup, RMAN creates abackup piece that contains one file section, which is a contiguous range of blocks in a file. All sections of amultisection backup are the same size. You can create a multisection backup for a data file, but not a data filecopy.File sections enable RMAN to create multiple steps for the backup of a single large data file. RMANchannels can process each step independently and in parallel, with each channel producing one section ofa multisection backup set.If you specify a section size that is larger than the size of the file, then RMAN does not use multisection backupfor the file. If you specify a small section size that would produce more than 256 sections, then RMANincreases the section size to a value that results in exactly 256 sections.Depending on where you specify this parameter in the RMAN syntax, you can specify different section sizes fordifferent files in the same backup job.Note: You cannot use SECTION SIZE with MAXPIECESIZE or with INCREMENTAL LEVEL 1.

QUESTION 4You installed Oracle Database 11g at fresh. Which statements are true regarding the default audit settings inthis database? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The audit trail is stored in an operating system file.B. Auditing is disabled for all privileges.C. The audit trail is stored in the database.D. Auditing is enabled for all privileges.E. Auditing is enabled for certain privileges related to database security.

Correct Answer: CESection: Managing ResourcesExplanation


QUESTION 5Which dependent object will get invalidated even if it is not affected by the table redefinition?

A. packagesB. triggersC. synonymsD. views


Explanation/Reference:Results of the Redefinition Process

The following are the end results of the redefinition process:

The original table is redefined with the columns, indexes, constraints, grants, triggers, and statistics of theinterim table.

Dependent objects that were registered, either explicitly using REGISTER_DEPENDENT_OBJECT orimplicitly using COPY_TABLE_DEPENDENTS, are renamed automatically so that dependent object nameson the redefined table are the same as before redefinition.

Note:If no registration is done or no automatic copying is done, then you must manually rename the dependentobjects.The referential constraints involving the interim table now involve the redefined table and are enabled.

Any indexes, triggers, materialized view logs, grants, and constraints defined on the original table (prior toredefinition) are transferred to the interim table and are dropped when the user drops the interim table. Anyreferential constraints involving the original table before the redefinition now involve the interim table and aredisabled.

Some PL/SQL objects, views, synonyms, and other table-dependent objects may become invalidated. Onlythose objects that depend on elements of the table that were changed are invalidated. For example, ifa PL/SQL procedure queries only columns of the redefined table that were unchanged by the redefinition,the procedure remains valid. See "Managing Object Dependencies" for more information about schemaobject dependencies.

QUESTION 6You perform a backup using the following BACKUP command:RMAN> BACKUP AS COMPRESSED BACKUPSET DATABASE;

Which statement is true of this command?

A. A different procedure is required to restore a database from compressed backupsB. The AS COMPRESSED clause of the BACKUP command provided by RMAN is used to create compressed

backup sets and image copies.C. Using this command to create backups minimizes the bandwidth consumedD. Using this command to create backups improves the performance of the backup process

Correct Answer: CSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 7You have enabled backup optimization in RMAN. You issue the following RMAN command to configure aredundancy-based retention policy:CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 3;

Which statement is true?

A. The command fails because you cannot configure a redundancy-based retention policy when backupoptimization is enabled

B. Backup optimization is performed, but RMAN considers the redundancy-based retention policy when itdetermines which datafiles should be backed up

C. Backup optimization is permanently disabledD. Backup optimization is temporarily disabled because a redundancy-based retention policy is specified

Correct Answer: BSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 8Which statements about the MEMORY_TARGET initialization parameter are true? (Choose all that apply.)

A. MEMORY_TARGET can be increased up to the value of MEMORY_MAX_TARGET, if MEMORY_MAX_TARGET isset to a value greater than zero

B. MEMORY_MAX_TARGET defaults to a value of zero if MEMORY_TARGET is not set

C. MEMORY_TARGET represents the total amount of memory that can be allocated to SGA and PGA memorystructures.

D. MEMORY_TARGET is static and cannot be modified without shutting down the instance

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 9You are performing incomplete recovery using RMAN. You execute the following RUN block:RUN{

SET UNTIL SCN 1107600;RESTORE DATABASE;RECOVER DATABASE;

}Which statement is true about the result?

A. RMAN restores all datafiles from the most recent backup available since the failure and applies the redologs necessary to recover the database to SCN 1107600

B. RMAN restores all datafiles needed to restore the database through SCN 1107599 and applies the redo logsnecessary to recover the database through SCN 1107599.

C. RMAN restores all datafiles and control files from the most recent backupD. The RUN block fails because you did not specify an UNTIL clause in your RECOVER DATABASE command

Correct Answer: BSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 10You are managing an ASM instance. You previously issued the following statements:ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 DROP DISK disk2;ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 DROP DISK disk3;ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 DROP DISK disk5;

You want to cancel the disk drops that are pending for the DG1 disk group. Which statement should you issue?

A. ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 UNDROP disk2, disk3, disk5;

B. ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 UNDROP;

C. ALTER DISKGROUP dg1 UNDROP DISKS;

D. You cannot cancel the pending disk drops.



undrop_disk_clause

Use this clause to cancel the drop of disks from the disk group. You can cancel the pending drop of all thedisks in one or more disk groups (by specifying diskgroup_name) or of all the disks in all disk groups (byspecifying ALL).

This clause is not relevant for disks that have already been completely dropped from the disk group or for diskgroups that have been completely dropped. This clause results in a long-running operation. You can see thestatus of the operation by querying the V$ASM_OPERATION dynamic performance view.

QUESTION 11A database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode and regular backups are performed. A user receives the following

error message:

Which is the recommended sequence of operations you need to perform for the query successfully?

A. Drop the affected tablespace, re-create the tablespace, restore the datafiles, and the tablespace.B. Take the affected datafile offline (if not already offline), restore the damaged image of the datafile, and then

bring it online.C. Restart the database in MOUNT mode, restore the damaged datafile, recover the datafile and then open the

database with resetlogs.D. Put the database in RESTRICTED mode, restore all the datafiles in the affected datafile and recover the

tablespace, and then put the database in normal operational mode.


Explanation/Reference:It supposed to none of answer is correct.

QUESTION 12Observe the structure of the table employees: The table contains 8475 records.

DESC employees

Name Null? Type------------------ -------------- ----------------- -----emp_no NOT NULL VARCHAR(5) PRIMAR Y KEYemp_fname NOT NULL VARCHAR(15)emp_lname NOT NULL VARCHAR(15)emp_dob NOT NULL DATEemp_dtofjoin NOT NULL DATEemp_salary NOT NULL NUMBER(5,2)

One of the employees wants to know the names of all employees of the company. For this, he fires thefollowing query:SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEES ORDER BY emp_fname;

Since the operation performed on executing the query cannot fit into memory, it requires disk space tocomplete the operation. Which of the following types of segments will Oracle allocate to complete the operation and to provide therequired result?

A. Rollback segmentB. Temporary segmentC. Data segmentD. Index segment



QUESTION 13What is the effect of increasing the value of the ASM_POWER_LIMIT parameter?

A. The number of DBWR processes increasesB. The number of ASMB processes increasesC. The number of DBWR_TO_SLAVES increases

D. The rebalancing operation in an ASM instance completes more quickly, but can result in higher I/Ooverhead



QUESTION 14The DB_BLOCK_CHECKING initialization parameter is set to OFF. Which block checking would be performed?

A. The Oracle database will perform block checking for the index blocks onlyB. The Oracle database will not perform block checking for any of the data blocksC. The Oracle database will perform block checking for the default permanent tablespace onlyD. The Oracle database will perform block checking for the data blocks in all user tablespacesE. The Oracle database will perform block checking for the data blocks in the SYSTEM tablespace only

Correct Answer: ESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 15You create two resource plans, one for data warehouse loading jobs at night and the other for application jobsat day time. You want the resource plans to activate automatically so that the resource allocation is optimum asdesired by the activity.How would you achieve this?

A. Implement job classesB. Implement Scheduler windowsC. Implement the mapping rule for the consumer groupsD. Set the SWITCH_TIME resource plan directive for both the resource plans

Correct Answer: BSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation


QUESTION 16Which package provides API's for the SQL Tuning Advisor?

A. DBMS_MONITOR

B. DBMS_STATS

C. DBMS_SQLTUNE

D. DBMS_ADVISOR



QUESTION 17Which two statements are true about the duplexing of the backups taken by RMAN? (Choose two.)

A. It's only supported for the backups performed on the tapeB. It is not supported for backup operations that produce image copiesC. Duplex backups need a parallelism for the device to be equal to number of copiesD. Duplex backups can be performed to either disk or tape, but cannot be performed on tape and disk

simultaneously

Correct Answer: BDSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

QUESTION 18You are using a recovery catalog to maintain Recovery Manager (RMAN) backup information for yourproduction database. You have registered your production database and are performing regular backups.Because of a new requirement you have added a few new tablespaces to your production database and youwant them to be included in backups. Identify two options for completing this task. (Choose two.)

A. Reregistering the target database in recovery catalogB. Transporting the new tablespaces to the recovery catalog databaseC. Syncronizing the recovery catalog with the target database control fileD. Performing a fresh backup of the target database to include the new data files in the catalog database

Correct Answer: CDSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 19View the Exhibit to examine the output produced by the following query at three different times since thedatabase instance started and has undergone workloads of different capacities:SQL> SELECT substr(component, 0, 10) COMP, current_ size CS, user_specified_sizeUSFROM v$memory_dynamic_componentsWHERE current_size!=0;

What do you infer from this?

Exhibit:

A. All sessions are connected to the database instance in dedicated mode, and no RMAN or parallel queryoperations have been performed.

B. The database instance is running with manual shared memory management.C. The database instance is running with manual PGA management.D. The database instance has the MEMORY_TARGET value set to a nonzero value.

Correct Answer: DSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 20View the Exhibit to examine the details for an incident.Which statement is true regarding the status of the incident?

Exhibit:

A. The incident has been newly created and is in the process of collecting diagnostic information.B. The incident is now in the Done state and the ADR can select the incident to be purged.C. The DBA is working on the incident and prefers that the incident be kept in the ADR.D. The data collection for the incident is complete and the incident can be packaged and sent to Oracle

Support.



QUESTION 21View the Exhibit 1.In the CUSTOMERS_OBE table, when the value of CUST_STATE_PROVINCE is "CA", the value of COUNTRY_IDis "US."View the Exhibit exhibit2 to examine the commands and query plans. The optimizer can sense 8 rows instead

of 29 rows, which is the actual number of rows in the table.

What can you do to make the optimizer detect the actual selectivity?

desc-customers_obe (exhibit):

sql-select-customers_obe (exhibit):

A. Change the STALE_PERCENT value for the CUSTOMERS_OBE table.

B. Set the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter to TYPICAL.

C. Create extended statistics for the CUST_STATE_PROVINCE and CUSTOMERS_OBE columns.

D. Set the OPTIMIZER_USE_PENDING_STATISTICS parameter to FALSE.


Explanation/Reference:Real example refer to here.

Determining Single Column StatisticsA good example of correlated or related columns are the country_id and cust_state_province columns in theCUSTOMERS_OBE table. When the value of cust_state_province is 'CA' , the value of country_id is 'US'.There is a skew in the data in these two columns, which means the majority of rows in the table have the values'CA' and 'US'. Both the relationship between the columns and the skew in the data make it difficult for theoptimizer to calculate the selectivity or cardinality of these columns correctly when they are used together in aquery. Extended statistics should help in this situation.

QUESTION 22View the Exhibit and examine the output.You executed the following command to enable Flashback Data Archive on the EXCHANGE_RATE table:ALTER TABLE exchange_rate FLASHBACK ARCHIVE;

What is the outcome of this command?

Exhibit:

A. The Flashback Archive is created on the same tablespace where the tables are stored.B. The Flashback Archive is created on the SYSAUX tablespace.

C. The command generates an error because no Flashback Archive name is specified and there is no defaultFlashback Archive.

D. The table uses the default Flashback Archive.

Correct Answer: CSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 23View the Exhibits exhibit1 and exhibit2.Both the processes use PROG_1 as the job template that is already available. The time taken by the jobs arerecorded in the TEST_LOG table. While comparing the time taken to create the jobs, the process in exhibit1takes less time than the process in exhibit2.What is the reason for this?

lightweight-job-1 (exhibit):

lightweight-job-2 (exhibit):

A. It updates several tables in the SYSTEM tablespace instead of creating new tables.

B. It creates jobs temporarily in memory only.C. It creates less metadata for the jobs.D. It writes the job metadata to disk in compressed format.

Correct Answer: CSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The difference between two blocks of code is the "JOB_STYLE". The lightweight job creates less metadata forthe jobs.

QUESTION 24View the Exhibit to examine a portion of the output from the VALIDATE DATABASE command. Which statement is true about the block corruption detected by the command?

Exhibit:

A. No action is taken except the output in the Exhibit.B. The ADVISE FAILURE command is automatically called to display the repair script.

C. The failure is logged into the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR).

D. The corruption is repaired by the command implicitly.


Explanation/Reference:Detection of Block Corruption (link)

Oracle Database supports different techniques for detecting, repairing, and monitoring block corruption. Thetechnique depends on whether the corruption is interblock corruption or intrablock corruption. In intrablockcorruption, the corruption occurs within the block itself. This corruption can be either physical or logical. In aninterblock corruption, the corruption occurs between blocks and can only be logical.

For example, the V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view records intrablock corruptions, while theAutomatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) tracks all types of corruptions. Table 16-1 summarizes how thedatabase treats different types of block corruption.

QUESTION 25View the Exhibit-1 to observe the maintenance window property. View the Exhibit-2 to examine the output of thequery.Which two statements describe the conclusions? (Choose two.)

EM-window (exhibit):

sql-dba_autotask_client (exhibit):

A. RESOURCE_PERCENTAGE should be increased.

B. The repeat time for the window should be decreased.C. RESOURCE_PERCENTAGE should be decreased.

D. The window duration should be increased.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation


QUESTION 26ASM supports all but which of the following file types? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Database filesB. SPFILEsC. Redo-log filesD. Archived log filesE. RMAN backup setsF. Password filesG. init.ora files

Correct Answer: FGSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:What Types of Files Does Oracle ASM Support?

QUESTION 27After executing the command ALTER DISKGROUP diskgroup2 DROP DISK dg2a;

you issue the following command from the ASM instance:SELECT group_number, COUNT(*) FROM v$asm_operation;

What is the implication if the query against V$ASM_OPERATION returns zero rows?

A. The drop disk operation is still proceeding and you cannot yet run the undrop disks operation.B. The drop disk operation is complete and you can run the undrop disks command if needed.C. The drop disk operation is complete and you cannot run the undrop disks command.D. The query will fail since there is not a V$ASM_OPERATION view available in an ASM instance.

E. None of the above is true.


Explanation/Reference:Once the DROP DISK operation is completed, you CANNOT run the UNDROP DISKS command any more.

QUESTION 28What is the net effect of the following command?alter diskgroup dgroup1 drop disk abc;

A. The disk ABC will be dropped from the disk group. Since you did not issue a rebalance command, the dataon that disk will be lost.

B. The command will raise an error indicating that you need to rebalance the disk group to remove the datafrom that disk prior to dropping the disk.

C. The disk group will be automatically rebalanced during the drop operation. Once the rebalancing iscomplete, the disk will be dropped.

D. This command will fail because you cannot drop a specific disk in an ASM disk group.E. The disk drop command will be suspended for a predetermined amount of time, waiting for you to also issue

an alter diskgroup rebalance command. Once you have issued the rebalance command, ASM will proceedto rebalance the disk group and then drop the disk.



QUESTION 29Which of the following is not a configurable attribute for an individual disk group?

A. AU_SIZEB. COMPATIBLE.RDBMSC. COMPATIBLE.ASMD. DISK_REPAIR_TIMEE. DG_DROP_TIME

Correct Answer: ESection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:DG_DROP_TIME is an invalid DG attribute.

Disk Group AttributesThe DISK_REPAIR_TIME disk group attribute specifies how long a disk remains offline before ASM drops thedisk.The COMPATIBLE.ASM attribute determines the minimum software version for an ASM instance that uses thedisk group.The COMPATIBLE.RDBMS attribute determines the minimum COMPATIBLE database initialization parametersetting for any database instance that uses the disk group.The AU_SIZE attribute determines the allocation unit size of the disk group. The values can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,32, and 64 MB.

QUESTION 30

What Oracle process runs when the database is in ARCHIVELOG mode but not when it is in NOARCHIVELOGmode?

A. MMON

B. LGWR

C. ARCH

D. ARWR

E. COPY



QUESTION 31You are peer reviewing a fellow DBAs backup plan for his NOARCHIVELOG mode database, as shown here:1. Put the tablespaces in backup mode.2. Back up the datafiles for all tablespaces.3. Take the tablespaces out of backup mode.4. Back up all archived redo logs.

Your colleague asks for you to comment on his plan. Which response would be correct?

A. The plan will work as is.B. The plan needs to be modified to allow for an archive-log switch after step 3.C. The plan needs to be modified so that a backup of the archived redo logs occurs before step 1.D. The plan needs to be adjusted to shut down the database after step 1 and to restart the database after step

2.E. The plan cannot work as presented.

Correct Answer: BSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Without command ALTER SYSTEM SWITCH LOGFILE, the backup of archive redo logs will be useless.

QUESTION 32Which of the following statements is true when the database is in ARCHIVELOG mode and tablespaces are inhot backup mode?

A. Archive log generation is suspended until the tablespaces are taken out of hot backup mode.B. Datafiles are not written to during hot backups.C. Changes to the database are cached during the backup and not written to the datafiles to ensure that the

datafiles are consistent when recovered.D. The datafile headers are not updated during the backup.E. The way data is written to the online redo logs is unchanged during the backup.



QUESTION 33When you create a backup control file, where is the resulting file written to?

A. The database user dump destination directoryB. The database diagnostic destination directoryC. To $ORACLE_HOME/rdbms

D. To $ORACLE_HOME/admin

E. To the directory and filename you specify in the command



QUESTION 34If a log file becomes corrupted, it may cause the database to stale. How would you correct such a situation?

A. Recover the online redo log from backup.B. Delete and re-create the log file.C. Use the ALTER DATABASE CLEAR LOGFILE command to clear the log file.

D. Shut down the database and restart it.E. Shut down the database and then mount it. Clear the log file with the ALTER DATABASE CLEAR LOGFILE

command and then restart the database with ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS.


Explanation/Reference:If you don't use the ALTER DATABASE CLEAR LOGFILE command to clear log online, after the databaserestarted, the log file will be INVALID.

So the simple way is to clear the log file directly.

QUESTION 35You have lost datafiles 1 and 3 from your database, and the database has crashed. In what order should youperform the following steps to recover your database?

1. Take the datafiles that were lost offline.2. startup mount the database3. Issue the alter database open command.4. Restore the datafiles that were lost5. Recover the datafiles with the recover datafile command.6. Bring the datafiles back online.7. Recover the database with the recover database command.

A. 2, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6B. 2, 4, 5, 3C. 4, 7, 3D. 2, 4, 7, 3E. 2, 7, 3



QUESTION 36Which command is used to open the database after an incomplete recovery?

A. alter database openB. alter database open repairlogC. alter database open resetlogs

D. alter database open resetlogE. alter database resetlogs open



QUESTION 37Your database has a backup that was taken yesterday (Tuesday) between 13:00 and 15:00 hours. This is theonly backup you have. You have lost all the archived redo logs generated since the previous Monday, but youhave archived redo logs available from the previous Sunday and earlier. You now need to restore your backupdue to database loss.

To which point can you restore your database?

A. 13:00 on Tuesday.B. 15:00 on Tuesday.C. Up until the last available archived redo log on Sunday.D. To any point; all the redo should still be available in the online redo logs.E. The database is not recoverable.



QUESTION 38Which of the following files cannot be backed up by RMAN? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Database datafilesB. Control filesC. Online redo logsD. Database pfilesE. Archived redo logs

Correct Answer: CD

Section: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 39Which of the following RMAN structures can data from a datafile span?

A. RMAN backup-set pieces spanning backup setsB. RMAN backup-set pieces within a given backup setC. RMAN backupsD. RMAN channelsE. None of the above

Correct Answer: BSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 40Which RMAN backup command is used to create the block-change tracking file?

A. alter database create block change tracking fileB. alter database enable block change fileC. alter database enable block change tracking using file '/ora01/opt/block_change_tracking.fil'D. alter system enable block change tracking using file '/ora01/opt/block_ change_tracking.fil'E. alter system block change tracking on



QUESTION 41A shoot-out has erupted between your MS development teams using .NET and your Linux development teamsusing Java. Knowing that your database is in danger, which command would you use to back up your NOARCHIVELOG mode database using RMAN with compression?

A. backup database allB. backup compressed databaseC. backup as compressed backupset database;D. backup as compressed backup database plus archivelog all;E. backup as compressed backupset database plus compress archivelog all;


Explanation/Reference:SQL> archive log listDatabase log mode No Archive ModeAutomatic archival Disabled

Archive destination USE_DB_RECOVERY_FILE _DESTOldest online log sequence 8Current log sequence 10

SQL> ![oracle@node2 ~]$ rman target /

Recovery Manager: Release 11.2.0.4.0 - Production o n Sun Feb 23 11:45:09 2014

Copyright (c) 1982, 2011, Oracle and/or its affilia tes. All rights reserved.

connected to target database: TEST0221 (DBID=388347 5966)

RMAN> backup as compressed backupset database;

Starting backup at 23-FEB-14using target database control file instead of recov ery catalogallocated channel: ORA_DISK_1channel ORA_DISK_1: SID=33 device type=DISKchannel ORA_DISK_1: starting compressed full datafi le backup setchannel ORA_DISK_1: specifying datafile(s) in backu p setRMAN-03009: failure of backup command on ORA_DISK_1 channel at 02/23/201411:46:01ORA-19602: cannot backup or copy active file in NOA RCHIVELOG modecontinuing other job steps, job failed will not be re-runchannel ORA_DISK_1: starting compressed full datafi le backup setchannel ORA_DISK_1: specifying datafile(s) in backu p setincluding current control file in backup setincluding current SPFILE in backup setchannel ORA_DISK_1: starting piece 1 at 23-FEB-14channel ORA_DISK_1: finished piece 1 at 23-FEB-14piece handle=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_area/TES T0221/backupset/2014_02_23/o1_mf_ncsnf_TAG20140223T114559_9jlvqv10_.bkp tag=TA G20140223T114559 comment=NONEchannel ORA_DISK_1: backup set complete, elapsed ti me: 00:00:04RMAN-00571: ======================================= ====================RMAN-00569: =============== ERROR MESSAGE STACK FOL LOWS ===============RMAN-00571: ======================================= ====================

RMAN-03009: failure of backup command on ORA_DISK_1 channel at02/23/2014 11:46:01ORA-19602: cannot backup or copy active file in NOA RCHIVELOG mode

RMAN>

QUESTION 42What is the purpose of the RMAN recovery catalog? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Make backups fasterB. Store RMAN metadataC. Store RMAN scriptsD. Provide the ability to do centralized backup reporting.E. Make recovery faster

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:A recovery catalog is a database schema used by RMAN to store metadata about one or more Oracle

databases. Typically, you store the catalog in a dedicated database. A recovery catalog provides the followingbenefits:

A recovery catalog creates redundancy for the RMAN repository stored in the control file of each targetdatabase. The recovery catalog serves as a secondary metadata repository. If the target control file and allbackups are lost, then the RMAN metadata still exists in the recovery catalog.

A recovery catalog centralizes metadata for all your target databases. Storing the metadata in a singleplace makes reporting and administration tasks easier to perform.

A recovery catalog can store metadata history much longer than the control file. This capability is useful ifyou must do a recovery that goes further back in time than the history in the control file. The addedcomplexity of managing a recovery catalog database can be offset by the convenience of having theextended backup history available.

Some RMAN features function only when you use a recovery catalog. For example, you can store RMANscripts in a recovery catalog. The chief advantage of a stored script is that it is available to any RMAN clientthat can connect to the target database and recovery catalog. Command files are only available if the RMANclient has access to the file system on which they are stored.

A recovery catalog is required when you use RMAN in a Data Guard environment. By storing backup metadatafor all primary and standby databases, the catalog enables you to offload backup tasks to one standbydatabase while enabling you to restore backups on other databases in the environment.

QUESTION 43RMAN provides more granular catalog security through which feature?

A. Virtual private databaseB. Virtual private catalogC. RMAN virtual databaseD. RMAN secure catalogE. Oracle Database Vault

Correct Answer: BSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:About Virtual Private Catalogs

By default, all of the users of an RMAN recovery catalog have full privileges to insert, update, and delete anymetadata in the catalog. For example, if the administrators of two unrelated databases share the samerecovery catalog, each administrator could, whether inadvertently or maliciously, destroy catalog data for theother's database. In many enterprises, this situation is tolerated because the same people manage manydifferent databases and also manage the recovery catalog. But in other enterprises where clear separation ofduty exists between administrators of various databases, and between the DBA and the administrator of therecovery catalog, you may desire to restrict each database administrator to modify only backup metadatabelonging to those databases that they are responsible for, while still keeping the benefits of a single, centrally-managed, RMAN recovery catalog. This goal can be achieved by implementing virtual private catalogs.

QUESTION 44You can back up the RMAN recovery catalog with RMAN.

A. TrueB. False

Correct Answer: ASection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)

Explanation

Explanation/Reference:When backing up the recovery catalog database, you can use RMAN to make the backups.

Refer to here.

QUESTION 45What RMAN command must you use before you can back up a database using the recovery catalog?

A. create catalogB. install databaseC. catalog databaseD. merge Catalog with databaseE. register database

Correct Answer: ESection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

QUESTION 46You have control-file autobackups enabled. When starting your database from SQL*Plus, you receive thefollowing error message:SQL> startup ORA-01078: failure in processing system parameters LRM-00109: could not open parameter file 'C:\ORACLE \PRODUCT\11.1.0\DB_1\DATABASE\INITORCL.ORA'

Using RMAN, how would you respond to this error?

A. Issue the startup nomount command and then issue the restore parameter file command from the RMANprompt.

B. Issue the startup nomount command and then issue the restore spfile command from the RMAN prompt.C. Issue the startup nomount command and then issue the restore spfile from autobackup command from the

RMAN prompt.D. Issue the startup nomount command and then issue the restore spfile from backup command from the

RMAN prompt.E. Issue the restore spfile from autobackup command from the RMAN prompt.

Correct Answer: CSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 47While working on a data problem, Curt, Bill, Ben, Mike, and Matt introduced a vast amount of corrupted datainto the database. Pablo has discovered this problem and he needs you to recover the database to the point intime prior to the introduction of the corruption. The logical corruption was introduced at 6:30 p.m. on September6, 2008.

Which of the following would be the correct commands to use to restore the database to a point in time beforethe corruption?

A. restore database until time '06-SEP-2008 06:30:00') ; recover database until

time '06-SEP-2008 06:30:00'); alter database open;

B. restore database until time '06-SEP-2008 06:30:00') ; recover database untiltime '06-SEP-2008 06:30:00'); alter database open r esetlogs;

C. restore database until time '06-SEP-2008 18:29:55') ; recover database untiltime '06-SEP-2008 18:29:55'); alter database open r esetlogs;

D. restore database until time '06-SEP-2008 18:29:55') ; alter database openresetlogs;

E. restore database until time '06-SEP-2008 18:29:55') ; recover database; alterdatabase open resetlogs;



QUESTION 48What is the purpose of the until change option of the restore command?

A. It allows you to select the SCN that you want to restore to.B. It allows you to select the log sequence number you want to restore to.C. It allows you to select the timestamp you want to restore to.D. It allows you to manually stop the restore at any time as online redo logs are applied.E. None of the above.

Correct Answer: ASection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The keyword of CHANGE means to point to the system change number (SCN).

QUESTION 49What is the purpose of the recover command? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Recover database datafiles from physical disk backup sets.B. Recover required incremental backups from physical disk backup sets.C. Recover required archived redo logs from physical disk backup sets.D. Apply incremental backups to recover the database.E. Apply archived redo logs to recover the database.

Correct Answer: BCDESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

QUESTION 50What is an obsolete backup set?

A. A backup set that is missing one or more backup set piecesB. A backup that has exceeded the retention criteria and is no longer neededC. A backup set that does not include archived redo logsD. A backup set that can not be recovered due to corruption

E. A backup set superceded by a datafile copy


QUESTION 51What is the purpose of the list expired backup command?

A. Lists all backups impacted by a resetlogs commandB. Lists all backups that are subject to retention criteriaC. Lists all backups that are missing associated physical backup set piecesD. Lists the status of datafile backup failures due to the use of the duration commandE. Lists backups that cannot be used by the restore command because they have been marked as disabled


QUESTION 52What is the purpose of the catalog command?

A. To review RMAN control file and recovery catalog metadata and ensure that its correctB. To delete RMAN backup-related metadata from the recovery catalogC. To create metadata in the control file and the recovery catalog related to backup set piecesD. To create a report that lists database backupsE. To rebuild the recovery catalog


Explanation/Reference:Use the CATALOG command to do the following:

Add backup pieces and image copies on disk to the RMAN repositoryRecord a data file copy as a level 0 incremental backup in the RMAN repository, which enables you to use itas part of an incremental backup strategy

QUESTION 53Which of the following commands will fail?

A. report schema;B. report need backup;C. report need backup days 3;D. report user;E. report obsolete;


QUESTION 54What are the two different types of database duplication? (Choose two.)

A. ActiveB. PassiveC. OnlineD. Backup-basedE. Failure driven

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 55When you are performing a tablespace point-in-time recovery, which tablespaces will always be restored to theauxiliary instance? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The SYSTEM tablespace.

B. The UNDO tablespace.

C. All tablespaces with tables.D. All tablespaces with indexes.E. No tablespaces are automatically restored.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 56Which operation requires that you create an auxiliary instance manually before executing the operation?(Choose all that apply.)

A. Backup-based database duplication.B. Active database duplication.C. Tablespace point-in-time recovery.D. No operation requires the creation of an auxiliary instance.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 57Examine the following PL/SQL block:SQL> SET SERVEROUTPUT ON;SQL> SET LONG 10000;SQL> DECLARE report clob;BEGIN report := DBMS_SPM.EVOLVE_SQL_PLAN_BASELINE(); DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE(report);END;/

Which statement describes the effect of the execution of the above PL/SQL block?

A. The plan baselines are verified with the SQL profiles.B. All fixed plan baselines are converted into nonfixed plan baselines.C. All the nonaccepted SQL profiles are accepted into the plan baseline.D. The nonaccepted plans in the SQL Management Base are verified with the existing plan baselines.



QUESTION 58In which two aspects does hot patching differ from conventional patching? (Choose two.)

A. It consumes more memory compared with conventional patching.B. It can be installed and uninstalled via OPatch unlike conventional patching.C. It takes more time to install or uninstall compared with conventional patching.D. It does not require down time to apply or remove unlike conventional patching.E. It is not persistent across instance startup and shutdown unlike conventional patching.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 59Which statement about the enabling of table compression in Oracle Database 11g is true?

A. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for direct loads only.B. Compression can be enabled only at the table level for both direct loads and conventional DML.C. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for conventional DML only.D. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for both direct loads and

conventional DML.

Correct Answer: DSection: Space ManagementExplanation

QUESTION 60You are tuning RMAN to optimize performance. You want tape I/O to be asynchronous when you perform tapebackups.

Which action should you take?

A. Set the BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES parameter to FALSE.

B. Set the BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES parameter to TRUE.

C. Use compression when performing tape backups.D. Configure multiple SBT channels.

Correct Answer: BSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMAN

Explanation


QUESTION 61You specify a nonzero value for the MEMORY_TARGET initialization parameter, but do not set thePGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET or the SGA_TARGET parameters. You restart your database instance.Which statement about the result is true?

A. The database instance starts, and Oracle sets the default value of SGA_TARGET to the same value asSGA_MAX_SIZE.

B. The database instance starts, and Oracle automatically tunes memory and allocates 60 percent to the SGAand 40 percent to the PGA.

C. The database instance starts, but Automatic Memory Management is disabled.D. The database instance will not start because you did not specify the PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET or

SGA_TARGET parameter.



QUESTION 62Which statements are true regarding the Query Result Cache? (Choose all that apply.)

A. It can be set at the system, session, or table level.B. It is used only across statements in the same session.C. It can store the results from normal as well as flashback queries.D. It can store the results of queries based on normal, temporary, and dictionary tables.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Managing MemoryExplanation

QUESTION 63You want to analyze a SQL Tuning Set (STS) using SQL Performance Analyzer in a test database. Which two statements are true regarding the activities performed during the test execution of SQLs in a SQLTuning Set? (Choose two.)

A. Every SQL statement in the STS is considered only once for execution.B. The SQL statements in the STS are executed concurrently to produce the execution plan and execution

statistics.C. The execution plan and execution statistics are computed for each SQL statement in the STS.D. The effects of DDL and DML are considered to produce the execution plan and execution statistics.



QUESTION 64You want to enable resumable space allocation at the instance level.Which two actions would enable resumable space allocation at the instance level? (Choose two.)

A. issuing the ALTER SYSTEM ENABLE RESUMABLE; statement

B. issuing the ALTER SESSION ENABLE RESUMABLE; statement

C. modifying the RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT initialization parameter to a nonzero value

D. issuing the ALTER SYSTEM SET RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT=<nonzero value>; statement

Correct Answer: CDSection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 65You executed the following commands:SQL> ALTER SESSION SET OPTIMIZER_USE_PENDING_STATISTICS = false; SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_STATS.SET_TABLE_PREFS('SH', 'CUST OMERS', 'PUBLISH','false'); SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_STATS.GATHER_TABLE_STATS('SH', 'C USTOMERS');

Which statement is correct regarding the above statistics collection on the SH.CUSTOMERS table in the abovesession?

A. The statistics are stored in the pending statistics table in the data dictionary.B. The statistics are treated as the current statistics by the optimizer for all sessions.C. The statistics are treated as the current statistics by the optimizer for the current sessions only.D. The statistics are temporary and used by the optimizer for all sessions until this session terminates.



QUESTION 66The Database Resource Manager is automatically enabled in the maintenance window that runs the AutomatedMaintenance Task. What is the reason for this?

A. to prevent the creation of an excessive number of scheduler job classesB. to allow the Automated Maintenance Tasks to use system resources without any restrictionC. to allow resource sharing only among the Automated Maintenance Tasks in the maintenance windowD. to prevent the Automated Maintenance Tasks from consuming excessive amounts of system resources

Correct Answer: DSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Oracle Database Resource Manager (the Resource Manager) is an infrastructure that provides granular controlof database resources allocated to users, applications, and services. The Resource Manager solves manyresource allocation problems that an operating system does not manage well, including:

Excessive overhead

Inefficient schedulingInappropriate allocation of resourcesInability to manage database-specific resources

The Resource Manager helps overcome these problems by giving the database more control over allocation ofhardware resources and enabling you to prioritize work within the database. You can classify sessions intogroups based on session attributes, and then allocate resources to these groups to optimize hardwareutilization.

QUESTION 67You want to disable resumable space allocation for all sessions. Which value should be assigned to the RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT parameter to disable resumable space allocation for all sessions?

A. 0B. 10C. 100D. NULL



QUESTION 68Note the following parameters settings in your database:SGA_MAX_SIZE = 1024MSGA_TARGET = 700MDB_8K_CACHE_SIZE = 124MLOG_BUFFER = 200M

You issued the following command to increase the value of DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE:SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE=140M;What would happen?

A. It will fail because DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE parameter cannot be changed dynamically

B. It will be successful only if the memory is available from the auto tuned componentsC. It will fail because an increase in DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE cannot be accommodated within SGA_TARGET

D. It will fail because an increase in the DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE cannot be accommodated withinSGA_MAX_SIZE


Explanation/Reference:This is an actually mathematic question.

QUESTION 69View the Exhibit to examine the error during the database startup. You open an RMAN session for thedatabase instance. To repair the failure, you executed the following as the first command in the RMAN session:RMAN> REPAIR FAILURE;

Which statement describes the consequence of the command?

Exhibit:

A. The command performs the recovery and closes the failures.B. The command only displays the advice and the RMAN script required for repair.C. The command produces an error because the ADVISE FAILURE command has not been executed before

the REPAIR FAILURE command.

D. The command executes the RMAN script to repair the failure and removes the entry from the AutomaticDiagnostic Repository (ADR).



QUESTION 70You issued the following command on the temporary tablespace LMTEMP in your database:SQL>ALTER TABLESPACE lmtemp SHRINK SPACE KEEP 20M;

Which requirement must be fulfilled for this command to succeed?

A. The tablespace must be locally managed.B. The tablespace must have only one temp file.C. The tablespace must be made nondefault and offline.D. The tablespace can remain as the default but must have no active sort operations.



QUESTION 71Which two statements regarding the Flashback Table feature are correct? (Choose two.)

A. Flashback Table can be performed on system tables.B. Flashback Table operation does not shrink the segments.C. Flashback Table uses log mining to extract SQL_REDO and SQL_UNDO statements.

D. Flashback Table operation acquires exclusive data manipulation language (DML) locks.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Semantics

During an Oracle Flashback Table operation, Oracle Database acquires exclusive DML locks on all thetables specified in the Flashback list. These locks prevent any operations on the tables while they are revertingto their earlier state.

Restrictions on Flashing Back Tables

This statement is subject to the following restrictions:

Flashback Table operations are not valid for the following type objects: tables that are part of a cluster,materialized views, Advanced Queuing (AQ) tables, static data dictionary tables, system tables, remotetables, object tables, nested tables, or individual table partitions or subpartitions.

The following DDL operations change the structure of a table, so that you cannot subsequently use the TOSCN or TO TIMESTAMP clause to flash the table back to a time preceding the operation: upgrading,moving, or truncating a table; adding a constraint to a table, adding a table to a cluster; modifying ordropping a column; changing a column encryption key; adding, dropping, merging, splitting, coalescing, ortruncating a partition or subpartition (with the exception of adding a range partition).

QUESTION 72Which three elements can a job chain process involve? (Choose three)

A. an eventB. a scheduleC. a programD. another chainE. a lightweight job

Correct Answer: BDESection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Don't really understand the answer so far.

Defining Chain Steps

After creating a chain object, you define one or more chain steps. Each step can point to one of the following:

A Scheduler program object (program)Another chain (a nested chain)An event schedule, inline event, or file watcher

QUESTION 73Your organization decided to upgrade the existing Oracle 10g database to Oracle 11g database in amultiprocessor environment. At the end of the upgrade, you observe that the DBA executes the following script:SQL> @utlrp.sqlWhat is the significance of executing this script?

A. It performs parallel recompilation of only the stored PL/SQL code.B. It performs sequential recompilation of only the stored PL/SQL code.C. It performs parallel recompilation of any stored PL/SQL as well as Java code.D. It performs sequential recompilation of any stored PL/SQL as well as Java code.


Explanation/Reference:Recompile invalid objects with utlrp.sql

QUESTION 74Your database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode. You are performing a user-managed backup of the DATA1tablespace. You place the DATA1 tablespace in backup mode by issuing the following statement:ALTER TABLESPACE data1 BEGIN BACKUP;

While you are performing the backup, an error occurs that causes the instance to terminate abnormally.

Which statement about the DATA1 tablespace is true?

A. The DATA1 tablespace is automatically taken out of backup mode when the instance aborts.B. If you restart the database, the DATA1 tablespace will be automatically taken out of backup mode when the

database is opened.C. If you restart the database, the DATA1 tablespace will be automatically taken out of backup mode when the

database is mounted.D. If you restart the database, the database will not be opened.


Explanation/Reference:After database instance failure, the BEGIN BACKUP option would not obtain the tablespace online, it will beOFFLINE mode. so that the instance cannot load the database file online.

QUESTION 75You executed the following PL/SQL block successfully:VARIABLE tname VARCHAR2(20)BEGIN

dbms_addm.insert_finding_directive (NULL, DIR_NAME=>'Detail CPU Usage', FINDING_NAME=>'CPU Usage', MIN_ACTIVE_SESSIONS=>0,MIN_PERC_IMPACT=>90);

:tname := 'database ADDM task4';dbms_addm.analyze_db(:tname, 150, 162);

END; /Then you executed the following command:SQL> SELECT dbms_addm.get_report(:tname) FROM DUAL;

The above command produces Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM) analysis ____.

A. with the CPU Usage finding if it is less than 90B. without the CPU Usage finding if it is less than 90C. with the CPU Usage finding for snapshots below 90

D. with the CPU Usage finding for snapshots not between 150 and 162



QUESTION 76Which statements describe the capabilities of the DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN package? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. It can be used to allow the access privilege settings for users but not roles.B. It can be used to allow the access privilege settings for users as well as roles.C. It can be used to control the time interval for which the access privilege is available to a user.D. It can be used to selectively restrict the access for each user in a database to different host computers.E. It can be used to selectively restrict a user's access to different applications in a specific host computer.

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation


QUESTION 77To generate recommendations to improve the performance of a set of SQL queries in an application, youexecute the following blocks of code:BEGIN

dbms_advisor.create_task(dbms_advisor.sqlaccess_adv isor,'TASK1'); END;/BEGIN

dbms_advisor.set_task_parameter('TASK1','ANALYSIS_S COPE','ALL');dbms_advisor.set_task_parameter('TASK1','MODE','COM PREHENSIVE');

END;/BEGIN

dbms_advisor.execute_task('TASK1');dbms_output.put_line(dbms_advisor.get_task_script(' TASK1'));

END;/The blocks of code execute successfully; however, you do not get the required outcome.What could be the reason?

A. A template needs to be associated with the task.B. A workload needs to be associated with the task.C. The partial or complete workload scope needs to be associated with the task.D. The type of structures (indexes, materialized views, or partitions) to be recommended need to be specified

for the task.



QUESTION 78You executed the following commands in a database session:

SQL> SELECT object_name, original_name FROM user_re cyclebin;

OBJECT_NAME ORIGINAL_NAME------------------------------ -----------------BIN$QJwAldMynlLgQJYK+xUptw==$0 MYSPACE

SQL> CREATE TABLE myspace AS SELECT * FROM myregion ;create table myspace as select * from myregion *ERROR at line 1:ORA-01536: space quota exceeded for tablespace 'USE RS'

Which statement is true about the contents of the recycle bin in this situation?

A. They remain unaffected.B. They are moved to flashback logs.C. They are moved to the undo tablespace.D. They are moved to a temporary tablespace.E. The objects in the recycle bin that are in the default tablespace for the session user are cleaned up.

Correct Answer: ESection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 79You have just performed a FLASHBACK TABLE operation using the following command:flashback table employees to scn 123456;

The employees table has triggers associated with it. Which of the following statements is true regarding thestate of the triggers during the Flashback Table operation?

A. All the triggers are disabled.B. All the triggers are enabled by default.C. Enabled triggers remain enabled and disabled triggers remain disabled.D. Triggers are deleted when a Flashback Table operation is performed.

Correct Answer: ASection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 80Which method could be utilized to identify both DML operations and the SQL statements needed to undo thoseoperations for a specific schema owner? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Query DBA_TRANSACTION_QUERY for TABLE_NAME, OPERATION, and UNDO_SQL. Limit rows bySTART_SCN and TABLE_OWNER.

B. Query FLASHBACK_TRANSACTION_QUERY for TABLE_NAME, OPERATION, and UNDO_SQL. Limit rows bySTART_SCN and TABLE_OWNER.

C. Query FLASHBACK_TRANSACTION_QUERY for TABLE_NAME, OPERATION, and UNDO_SQL. Limit rows bySTART_TIMESTAMP and TABLE_OWNER.

D. Query DBA_TRANSACTION_QUERY for TABLE_NAME, OPERATION, and UNDO_SQL. Limit rows bySTART_TIMESTAMP and TABLE_OWNER.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 81Flashback Database relies on which technologies to recover to a point in time?

A. Flashback Data ArchiveB. Flashback logs in the flash recovery areaC. FlashbUndo tablespaceD. RMAN command lineE. None of the above

Correct Answer: BSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

QUESTION 82The _______ writes the Flashback Database logs in the flash recovery area.

A. FLSH

B. FLDB

C. RVWR

D. RVRW

E. FBDA


Explanation/Reference:RVWR (Recovery Writer Process), Writes flashback data to the flashback logs in the fast recovery areaRVWR writes flashback data from the flashback buffer in the SGA to the flashback logs. RVWR also createsflashback logs and performs some tasks for flashback log automatic management.Existed in Database instance, Flashback Database--------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------FBDA (Flashback Data Archiver Process), Archives historical rows for tracked tables into flashback dataarchives and manages archive space, organization, and retentionWhen a transaction that modifies a tracked table commits, FBDA stores the pre-image of the rows in thearchive. FDBA maintains metadata on the current rows and tracks how much data has been archived.FBDA is also responsible for automatically managing the flashback data archive for space, organization(partitioning tablespaces), and retention. FBDA also keeps track of how far the archiving of tracked transactionshas progressed.See Also: Oracle Database Advanced Application Developer's GuideExisted in Database and ASM instances

QUESTION 83Which of these are valid Flashback Database recovery point parameters? (Choose all that apply.)

A. SCNB. TimestampC. Named recovery pointD. Transaction IDE. Session ID

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

QUESTION 84When setting up the Flashback Data Archive, which of these key parameters are required? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. Tablespace nameB. Storage quotaC. RetentionD. Table nameE. Create a default archive

Correct Answer: ACSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

QUESTION 85To clean up old records that are in a Flashback Data Archive and are past the retention period, what must theDBA do?

A. TRUNCATE the archive table.B. DROP the Flashback Data Archive.C. Nothing; expired rows are automatically removed.D. Nothing; expired rows are moved to an archive table.E. Delete entries from the archive where the metadata date retained is greater than the retention period.


QUESTION 86Which of the following initialization parameters have been deprecated in Oracle 11g because of the introductionof the Automatic Workload Repository? (Choose all that apply.)

A. BACKGROUND_DUMP_DEST

B. FOREGROUND_DUMP_DEST

C. CORE_DUMP_DEST

D. USER_DUMP_DEST

E. DIAGNOSTIC_DEST

F. All of the above

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 87Which of the following statements is true regarding the initialization parameter DIAGNOSTIC_DEST?

A. The default value is the value of the environment variable $ORACLE_HOME; if $ORACLE_HOME isn't set, thenthe default is set to $ORACLE_BASE.

B. The default value is the value of the environment variable $ORACLE_BASE; if $ORACLE_BASE isn't set, thenit is set to $ORACLE_HOME.

C. DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is always equal to $ORACLE_HOME.

D. DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is always equal to $ORACLE_BASE.


Explanation/Reference:The answer is not exact correct.If the ORACLE_BASE is not set, the default location is $ORACLE_HOME/log

QUESTION 88Which of these formats represents the correct hierarchy for the ADR?

A. <diagnostic_dest>/rdbms/diag/<dbname>/<instname>

B. <diagnostic_dest>/diag/rdbms/<instname>/<dbname>

C. <diagnostic_dest>/diag/rdbms/<dbname>/<instname>

D. None of the above


Explanation/Reference:The location of each ADR home is given by the following path, which starts at the ADR base directory:

diag/product_type/product_id/instance_id

As an example, product_type: rdbmsproduct_id: DB_UNIQUE_NAMEinstance_id: SID

For example, for a database with a SID and database unique name both equal to orclbi, the ADR home wouldbe in the following location:

ADR_base/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/

Similarly, the ADR home path for the Oracle ASM instance in a single-instance environment would be:

ADR_base/diag/asm/+asm/+asm/

QUESTION 89Which of the following are NOT fundamental tasks of the Support Workbench? (Choose all that apply.)

A. View long-running SQL workloadsB. View problem detailsC. Gather additional diagnostic informationD. Create a Service RequestE. Clean up incident data after upload to Oracle Support

Correct Answer: AESection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The Enterprise Manager Support Workbench (Support Workbench) is a facility that enables you to investigate,report, and in some cases, repair problems (critical errors), all with an easy-to-use graphical interface. TheSupport Workbench provides a self-service means for you to gather first-failure diagnostic data, obtain asupport request number, and upload diagnostic data to Oracle Support with a minimum of effort and in a veryshort time, thereby reducing time-to-resolution for problems. The Support Workbench also recommends andprovides easy access to Oracle advisors that help you repair SQL-related problems, data corruption problems,and more.

QUESTION 90Which of the following tasks does the tool Incident Packaging Service (IPS) perform?

A. Cleans up the ADR by deleting files not associated with an incident uploaded to Oracle Support.B. Identifies all files associated with a critical error and adds them to a zip file to be sent to Oracle Support.C. Automatically opens a Service Request with Oracle Support for each critical error and sends all relevant

files.D. Displays a high-level view of critical errors on the database home page.


Explanation/Reference:Incident packaging service (IPS) and incident packages

The IPS enables you to automatically and easily gather the diagnostic data—traces, dumps, health checkreports, and more—pertaining to a critical error and package the data into a zip file for transmission to OracleSupport. Because all diagnostic data relating to a critical error are tagged with that error's incident number, youdo not have to search through trace files and other files to determine the files that are required for analysis; theincident packaging service identifies the required files automatically and adds them to the zip file.Before creating the zip file, the IPS first collects diagnostic data into an intermediate logical structure called anincident package (package). Packages are stored in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository. If you choose to, youcan access this intermediate logical structure, view and modify its contents, add or remove additional diagnosticdata at any time, and when you are ready, create the zip file from the package. After these steps arecompleted, the zip file is ready to be uploaded to Oracle Support.

QUESTION 91Choose the correct order to package and upload data for an incident to Oracle Support.

A. Schedule, create new package, view manifest, view contentsB. Create new package, view manifest, view contents, schedule

C. Schedule, create new package, view contents, view manifestD. Create new package, view contents, view manifest, scheduleE. None of the above.



QUESTION 92Which of the following is NOT an advantage of block media recovery (BMR)?

A. Reduced MTTR.B. Datafiles remain offline while corrupt blocks are repaired.C. Datafiles remain online while corrupt blocks are repaired.D. A and C


Explanation/Reference:Overview of Block Media Recovery (link)

Purpose of Block Media Recovery

You can use block media recovery to recover one or more corrupt data blocks within a data file. Block mediarecovery provides the following advantages over data file media recovery:

Lowers the mean time to recover (MTTR) because only blocks needing recovery are restored andrecoveredEnables affected data files to remain online during recovery

Without block media recovery, if even a single block is corrupt, then you must take the data file offline andrestore a backup of the data file. You must apply all redo generated for the data file after the backup wascreated. The entire file is unavailable until media recovery completes. With block media recovery, only theblocks actually being recovered are unavailable during the recovery.

Block media recovery is most useful for physical corruption problems that involve a small, well-known numberof blocks. Block-level data loss usually results from intermittent, random I/O errors that do not causewidespread data loss, and memory corruptions that are written to disk. Block media recovery is not intended forcases where the extent of data loss or corruption is unknown and the entire data file requires recovery. In suchcases, data file media recovery is the best solution.

QUESTION 93Which of the following methods can be used to detect block corruption?

A. ANALYZE operations

B. dbvC. SQL queries that access the potentially corrupt blockD. RMANE. All of the above



QUESTION 94Which of the following are correct about block media recovery? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Physical and logical block corruption is recorded automatically in V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION.

B. Logical corruptions are repairable by BMR.C. Physical corruptions are repairable by BMR.D. RMAN can use any backup for a BMR restore.E. ARCHIVELOG mode is not required if you have both a full and incremental backup for restore.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


Basic Concepts of Block Media Recovery

Whenever block corruption has been automatically detected, you can perform block media recovery manuallywith the RECOVER ... BLOCK command. By default, RMAN first searches for good blocks in the real-timequery physical standby database, then flashback logs and then blocks in full or level 0 incrementalbackups.

Identification of Corrupt Blocks

The V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view displays blocks marked corrupt by database componentssuch as RMAN, ANALYZE, dbv, and SQL queries. The following types of corruption result in the addition ofrows to this view:

Physical corruption (sometimes called media corruption)The database does not recognize the block: the checksum is invalid, the block contains all zeros, or theblock header is corrupt.Physical corruption checking is enabled by default. You can turn off checksum checking by specifying the NOCHECKSUM option of the BACKUP command, but other physical consistency checks, such as checks ofthe block headers and footers, cannot be disabled.

Logical corruptionThe block has a valid checksum, the header and footer match, and so on, but the contents are logicallyinconsistent. Block media recovery may not be able to repair all logical block corruptions. In thesecases, alternate recovery methods, such as tablespace point-in-time recovery, or dropping and re-creatingthe affected objects, may repair the corruption.Logical corruption checking is disabled by default. You can turn it on by specifying the CHECK LOGICALoption of the BACKUP, RESTORE, RECOVER, and VALIDATE commands.

The database can detect some corruptions by validating relationships between blocks and segments, butcannot detect them by a check of an individual block. The V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view does notrecord at this level of granularity.

Prerequisites for Block Media Recovery (link)

The following prerequisites apply to the RECOVER ... BLOCK command:

The target database must run in ARCHIVELOG mode and be open or mounted with a current controlfile.If the target database is a standby database, then it must be in a consistent state, recovery cannot be insession, and the backup must be older than the corrupted file.The backups of the data files containing the corrupt blocks must be full or level 0 backups and not proxycopies.If only proxy copy backups exist, then you can restore them to a nondefault location on disk, in which caseRMAN considers them data file copies and searches them for blocks during block media recovery.RMAN can use only archived redo logs for the recovery.RMAN cannot use level 1 incremental backups. Block media recovery cannot survive a missing orinaccessible archived redo log, although it can sometimes survive missing redo records.Flashback Database must be enabled on the target database for RMAN to search the flashback logs forgood copies of corrupt blocks.If flashback logging is enabled and contains older, uncorrupted versions of the corrupt blocks, then RMANcan use these blocks, possibly speeding up the recovery.The target database must be associated with a real-time query physical standby database for RMAN tosearch the database for good copies of corrupt blocks.

QUESTION 95While querying the EMPLOYEES table, you receive an ORA-01578 message indicating block corruption inFile# 1201 and Block# 1968. You analyze the table and the corruption is verified.

Which RMAN command do you use to perform BMR and repair the corrupt block?

A. RECOVER FILE=1201 BLOCK=1968;

B. RECOVER CORRUPTION LIST;

C. RECOVER DATAFILE 1201 BLOCK 1968;

D. RECOVER BLOCK CORRUPTION LIST;

E. None of the above

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 96To view the results of the most recent Automatic SQL Tuning Advisor task, which sequence should you follow?

A. EM Database home page, Software and Support, SQL Advisors, Automatic SQL Tuning AdvisorB. EM Database home page, Software and Support, Advisor Central, SQL Advisors, Automatic SQL Tuning

AdvisorC. EM Database home page, Software and Support, Support Workbench, Advisor Central, SQL Advisors,

Automatic SQL Tuning AdvisorD. Either B or CE. All of the above


QUESTION 97When creating a SQL tuning set, which of the following steps allows the DBA to reduce the size of the SQL setby selecting specific operators and values?

A. Filter versionsB. Filter loadsC. Filter tasksD. Filter options


QUESTION 98To view the results of a manual SQL Tuning Advisor task, which steps should the DBA take?

A. From the Advisor Central home page, select the tuning task from the Advisor Tasks section.B. From Advisor Central, choose SQL Advisors, SQL Tuning Advisors, Manual Tuning Task Results.C. From Advisor Central, choose SQL Advisors, Manual SQL Tuning Advisors, Tuning Task Results.D. Either B or C.



QUESTION 99Which of these appropriately describes the results of a manual SQL Tuning Advisor task?

A. A list of SQL statements and recommendations for tuningB. A list of SQL statements that have been tuned by the Advisor, with before and after metricsC. Graphs showing the actual performance improvement made by the Advisor after it implemented the

recommended changesD. All of the above


QUESTION 100Which of the following is a potential performance tuning recommendation from the SQL Access Advisor?

A. Create new indexes.B. Modify existing indexes.C. Implement partitioning on a nonpartitioned table.D. Create materialized views.

E. All of the above

Correct Answer: ESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:18.1 Overview of SQL Access Advisor

Materialized views, partitions, and indexes are essential when tuning a database to achieve optimumperformance for complex, data-intensive queries. SQL Access Advisor helps you achieve your performancegoals by recommending the proper set of materialized views, materialized view logs, partitions, andindexes for a given workload. Understanding and using these structures is essential when optimizing SQL asthey can result in significant performance improvements in data retrieval. The advantages, however, do notcome without a cost. Creation and maintenance of these objects can be time consuming, and spacerequirements can be significant. In particular, partitioning of an unpartitioned base table is a complex operationthat must be planned carefully.

E03

QUESTION 1The Oracle Database 11g database is running in the ARCHIVELOG mode. The archived redo log files are storedon three locations. The Flash Recovery Area is one of the locations. The details are given below:LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 = 'LOCATION = /disk1/archive'LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_2 = 'SERVICE = stdb1'DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST = '/u01/oradata'

Examine the following RMAN command issued to set the deletion policy for archived log files:RMAN> CONFIGURE ARCHIVELOG DELETION POLICY TO BACKED UP 2 TIMES TO sbt;

Which statement is true regarding what this command accomplishes?

A. All archived redo log files backed up at least twice to tape are deleted.B. All archived redo log files backed up at least once to tape are eligible for deletion.C. All archived redo log files backed up at least twice to tape are deleted from the flash recovery area.D. All archived redo log files in local archiving destinations and the flash recovery area backed up at least twice

to tape are eligible for deletion.

Correct Answer: DSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation


QUESTION 2Evaluate the following command:SQL> CREATE TABLE design_data (id NUMBER,doc CLOB)LOB(doc) STORE AS SECUREFILE(DEDUPLICATE);

Which statement is true regarding the above command?

A. The LOB values are automatically compressed.B. The LOB values are cached by default in the buffer cache.C. The LOB values are automatically stored in encrypted mode.D. All LOB data that is identical in two or more rows in a LOB column share the same data blocks.


Explanation/Reference:DEDUPLICATE or KEEP_DUPLICATES ( Link )

The option DEDUPLICATE enables you to specify that LOB data which is identical in two or more rows in aLOB column should share the same data blocks. The database combines LOBs with identical content into asingle copy, reducing storage and simplifying storage management. The opposite of this option is KEEP_DUPLICATES.

QUESTION 3You are maintaining the SALES database. You have added a new disk to a disk group. Automatic StorageManagement performs the rebalancing activity. You want to speed up the rebalancing activity.

Which parameter should you specify to control the speed of the rebalancing activity?

A. ASM_POWER_LIMIT

B. ASM_DISKSTRING

C. ASM_DISKGROUPS

D. INSTANCE_TYPE



QUESTION 4You are managing the APPPROD database as a DBA which is not using the Oracle-managed files. You plan toduplicate this database in the same system with the name DUPDB.You want to create the same directorystructure for duplicate database files as of the target database.You executed the following RMAN commands:RMAN> CONNECT TARGET sys/sys@APPPRODRMAN> CONNECT AUXILIARY sys/sys@DUPDBRMAN> DUPLICATE TARGET DATABASETO dupdbFROM ACTIVE DATABASEPASSWORD FILESPILENOFILENAMECHECK;

What are the implications of this command?

A. It creates database files for the duplicate database under the Oracle base with a different directory for theduplicate database.

B. It overwrites data files of the target database because a different location for data files is not mentioned forthe duplicate database.

C. It creates database files for the duplicate database under the same Oracle home as that of the targetdatabase with the same directory structure.

D. It creates database files for the duplicate database under the same Oracle home as that of the target butwith a different directory for the duplicate database.

Correct Answer: BSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 5What are the recommendations for Oracle Database 11g installation to make it Optimal Flexible Architecture(OFA)-compliant? (Choose all that apply.)

A. ORACLE_BASE should be set explicitly.

B. An Oracle base should have only one Oracle home created in it.C. Flash recovery area and data file location should be on separate disks.D. Flash recovery area and data file location should be created under Oracle base in a non-Automatic Storage

Management (ASM) setup.

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 6ENCRYPT_TS is an encrypted tablespace that contains tables with data.

Which statement is true regarding the effect of queries and data manipulation language (DML) statements onthe encrypted data in the tables?

A. The data is decrypted during SORT and JOIN operations.B. The data remains encrypted when it is read into memory.C. The data remains encrypted when it is stored in the redo logs.D. The data remains encrypted in the UNDO tablespace provided that the UNDO tablespace was created with

the encryption option enabled.



QUESTION 7You decided to use Direct NFS configuration in a non-RAC Oracle installation and created the oranfstab file in /etc. Which two statements are true regarding this oranfstab file? (Choose two.)

A. Its entries are specific to a single database.B. It contains file systems that have been mounted by Direct NFS.C. It is globally available to all Oracle 11g databases on the machine.D. It contains file systems that have been mounted by the kernel NFS system.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Space ManagementExplanation

QUESTION 8Observe the following warning in an RMAN session of your database instance:WARNING: new failures were found since last LIST FA ILURE command

Which statement describes the scenario that must have produced this warning?

A. The CHANGE FAILURE command has detected new failures recorded in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository(ADR).

B. The VALIDATE DATABASE command has detected new failures recorded in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository (ADR).

C. The ADVISE FAILURE command has detected new failures recorded in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository (ADR) since the last LIST FAILURE .

D. The RECOVER command has detected new failures recorded in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR)since the last LIST FAILURE command was executed.



QUESTION 9Which tuning tool recommends how to optimize materialized views so that these views can take advantage ofthe general query rewrite feature?

A. Segment AdvisorB. SQL Access AdvisorC. Undo AdvisorD. SQL Tuning Advisor


QUESTION 10Which statement about using RMAN stored scripts is true?

A. To create and execute an RMAN stored script, you must use a recovery catalog.B. When executing a stored script and a command fails, the remainder of the script is executed, and a

message is written to the alert log file.C. RMAN stored scripts can always be executed against any target database that is registered in the recovery

catalog.D. When you execute a stored script, it always executes using the persistent channel settings previously set

with the CONFIGURE command.


Explanation/Reference:About Stored Scripts

You can use a stored script as an alternative to a command file for managing frequently used sequences ofRMAN commands. The script is stored in the recovery catalog rather than on the file system.

Stored scripts can be local or global. A local script is associated with the target database to which RMAN isconnected when the script is created, and can only be executed when you are connected to that targetdatabase. A global stored script can be run against any database registered in the recovery catalog, if theRMAN client is connected to the recovery catalog and a target database.

The commands allowable within the brackets of the CREATE SCRIPT command are the same commandssupported within a RUN block. Any command that is legal within a RUN command is permitted in the storedscript. The following commands are not legal within stored scripts: RUN, @, and @@.

When specifying a script name, RMAN permits but generally does not require that you use quotes around thename of a stored script. If the name begins with a digit or is an RMAN reserved word, however, then you mustput quotes around the name to use it as a stored script name. Consider avoiding stored script names that beginwith nonalphabetic characters or that are the same as RMAN reserved words.

QUESTION 11You perform the following activities during the database upgrade from Oracle Database 10g to OracleDatabase 11g:

Capture plans for a SQL workload into a SQL Tuning Set (STS) before upgrade.Load these plans from the STS into the SQL plan baseline immediately after the upgrade.

What is the reason for performing these activities?

A. to minimize plan regression due to the use of a new optimizer versionB. to completely avoid the use of new plans generated by a new optimizer versionC. to prevent plan capturing when the SQL statement is executed after the database upgradeD. to keep the plan in the plan history so that it can be used when the older version of the optimizer is used


Explanation/Reference:15.1.1 Purpose of SQL Plan Baselines (Link)

Common scenarios where SQL plan management can improve or preserve SQL performance include:A database upgrade that installs a new optimizer version usually results in plan changes for a smallpercentage of SQL statements. Most of these plan changes result in either no performance change orimprovement. However, some plan changes may cause performance regressions. SQL plan baselinessignificantly minimize potential regressions resulting from an upgrade.Ongoing system and data changes can impact plans for some SQL statements, potentially causingperformance regressions. SQL plan baselines help minimize performance regressions and stabilize SQLperformance.Deployment of new application modules means introducing new SQL statements into the database. Theapplication software may use appropriate SQL execution plans developed in a standard test configurationfor the new statements. If the system configuration is significantly different from the test configuration, thenthe database can evolve SQL plan baselines over time to produce better performance.

QUESTION 12View the Exhibit for some of the parameter settings. You start a session and issue the following command:SQL>CREATE INDEX emp_ename ON emp(ename)TABLESPACE users INVISIBLE;

What is the outcome of the above command?

Exhibit:

A. The index is not used by the optimizer but is maintained during DML operations.B. The index is not used by the optimizer and is not maintained during DML operations.C. The index is used by the optimizer only if a hint is specified in the query statement and is maintained during

DML operations.D. The index is used by the optimizer only if a hint is specified in the query statement but is not maintained

during DML operations.

Correct Answer: ASection: Managing Database Performance

Explanation


QUESTION 13While tuning a SQL statement, the SQL Tuning Advisor finds an existing SQL profile for the statement that hasstale statistics available.What would the optimizer do in this situation?

A. It updates the existing SQL profiles with current statistics.B. It makes the statistics information available to GATHER_STATS_JOB.

C. It initiates the statistics collection process by running GATHER_STATS_JOB.

D. It logs a warning message in the alert log so that the DBA can perform statistics collection manually.



QUESTION 14In your database, the LDAP_DIRECTORY_SYSAUTH initialization parameter has been set to YES and the userswho need to access the database as DBAs have been granted SYSDBA enterprise role in Oracle InternetDirectory (OID). SSL and the password file have been configured. A user SCOTT with the SYSDBA privilege triesto connect to the database instance from a remote machine using the command:$ SQLPLUS scott/tiger@DB01 AS SYSDBA

which DB01 is the net service name.

Which authentication method would be used first?

A. authentication by password fileB. authentication by using certificates over SSLC. authentication by using the Oracle Internet DirectoryD. authentication by using the local OS of the database server



QUESTION 15The following databases are registered in the base recovery catalog: PROD1, PROD2, and PROD3. Thedatabase user CATOWNER owns the base recovery catalog. You want a new user VPC1 to have access to onlythe PROD1 database and create a virtual private catalog.

Given below are some of the commands required to achieve this:1.SQL> GRANT recovery_catalog_owner TO vpc1;2.RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG vpc1/password@catdb;3.RMAN> GRANT CATALOG FOR DATABASE prod1 TO vpc1;4.RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG catowner/password@catdb;5.RMAN> CREATE VIRTUAL CATALOG;

What is the correct sequence in which the commands have to be executed?

A. 1, 4, 5, 2, 3B. 1, 4, 3, 2, 5C. 4, 5, 2, 3, 1D. 2, 3, 4, 5, 1E. 1, 4, 2, 3, 5


Explanation/Reference:Refer to hereThe basic steps for creating a virtual private catalog are as follows:

1. Create the database user who will own the virtual private catalog (if this user does not exist) and grant thisuser access privileges.

1.1 Start SQL*Plus and connect to the recovery catalog database with administrator privileges.

1.2 If the user that will own the virtual private catalog does not exist, then create the user. SQL> CREATE USER vpc1 IDENTIFIED BY password DE FAULT TABLESPACE vpcusersQUOTA UNLIMITED ON vpcusers;1.3 Grant the RECOVERY_CATALOG_OWNER role to the database user that will own the virtual privatecatalog, and then exit SQL*Plus. SQL> GRANT recovery_catalog_owner TO vpc1;1.4 Start RMAN and connect to the recovery catalog database as the base recovery catalog owner(not the virtual private catalog owner). RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG catowner@catdb;1.5 Grant desired privileges to the virtual private catalog owner. RMAN> GRANT CATALOG FOR DATABASE prod1 TO vpc1;

You can also use a DBID rather than a database name. The virtual private catalog user does not haveaccess to the metadata for any other databases registered in the recovery catalog.You can also grant the user the ability to register new target databases in the recovery catalog. Forexample:RMAN> GRANT REGISTER DATABASE TO vpc1;

2. Create the virtual private catalog.2.1 Start RMAN and connect to the recovery catalog database as the virtual private catalog owner(not the base recovery catalog owner). RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG vpc1@catdb;2.2 Create the virtual private catalog. RMAN> CREATE VIRTUAL CATALOG;

If you intend to use a 10.2 or earlier release of RMAN with this virtual private catalog, then execute thefollowing PL/SQL procedure (where base_catalog_owner is the database user who owns the baserecovery catalog): SQL> EXECUTE base_catalog_owner.DBMS_RCVCAT.CRE ATE_VIRTUAL_CATALOG;

QUESTION 16Which command is used to configure RMAN to perform a compressed backup for every backup executed?

A. BACKUP AS COMPRESSED BACKUPSET DATABASE

B. BACKUP AS COMPRESSED COPY OF DATABASE

C. CONFIGURE DEVICE TYPE DISK BACKUP TYPE TO COMPRESSED BACKUPSET

D. CONFIGURE DEVICE TYPE DISK BACKUP TYPE COMPRESS

E. BACKUP DATABASE COMPRESS

Correct Answer: C

Section: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation


QUESTION 17You issue the following command:RMAN>CONFIGURE BACKUP OPTIMIZATION ON;

What is the result of this command on your backups?

A. An incremental backup strategy will be used automatically.B. Read-only datafiles will not be backed up as long as backups of those files already exist and those backups

meet established retention criteria.C. RMAN will configure itself for maximum performance at the cost of CPU.D. RMAN will configure itself for minimal OS/CPU impact at the cost of time to back up the database.E. RMAN will automatically compress backups.

Correct Answer: BSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation


QUESTION 18What is the purpose of the RMAN recovery catalog? (Choose all that apply.)

A. It must be used because all RMAN-related backup and recovery metadata information is contained in it.B. It provides a convenient, optional, repository of backup- and recovery-related metadata.C. It provides the ability to store RMAN scripts for global use by any database that has access to the

repository.D. It provides a means of storing all RMAN backup sets physically in an Oracle database server.E. It provides the ability to store backup records for more than a year.

Correct Answer: BCESection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:A recovery catalog is a database schema used by RMAN to store metadata about one or more Oracledatabases. Typically, you store the catalog in a dedicated database. A recovery catalog provides the followingbenefits:

A recovery catalog creates redundancy for the RMAN repository stored in the control file of each targetdatabase. The recovery catalog serves as a secondary metadata repository. If the target control file and allbackups are lost, then the RMAN metadata still exists in the recovery catalog.

A recovery catalog centralizes metadata for all your target databases. Storing the metadata in a singleplace makes reporting and administration tasks easier to perform.

A recovery catalog can store metadata history much longer than the control file. This capability is usefulif you must do a recovery that goes further back in time than the history in the control file. The addedcomplexity of managing a recovery catalog database can be offset by the convenience of having theextended backup history available.

Some RMAN features function only when you use a recovery catalog. For example, you can store RMANscripts in a recovery catalog. The chief advantage of a stored script is that it is available to any RMAN clientthat can connect to the target database and recovery catalog. Command files are only available if the RMANclient has access to the file system on which they are stored.

A recovery catalog is required when you use RMAN in a Data Guard environment. By storing backup metadatafor all primary and standby databases, the catalog enables you to offload backup tasks to one standbydatabase while enabling you to restore backups on other databases in the environment.

QUESTION 19What privileges must be granted to allow an account to create the recovery catalog? (Choose all that apply.)

A. RECOVERY_CATALOG_OWNER

B. DBAC. RESOURCE

D. SELECT ANY DICTIONARY

E. CONNECT

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 20Which command do you use to create a recovery-catalog schema?

A. create recovery catalogB. create catalogC. build catalogD. catalog createE. mount catalog


Explanation/Reference:Use the CREATE CATALOG command to create a recovery catalog.

The recovery catalog can be a base recovery catalog or a virtual private catalog.

A base recovery catalog is a database schema that contains RMAN metadata for a set of target databases.A virtual private catalog is a set of synonyms and views that enable user access to a subset of a baserecovery catalog.

QUESTION 21If you back up a database without connecting to the recovery catalog, which operations will cause the recoverycatalog to be updated? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The next time you back up the database when you are also connected to the recovery catalog and thetarget database

B. The next time you are connected to the target database and the recovery catalog database and issue theresync command

C. The next time you connect RMAN to just the recovery catalogD. The next time you connect to the recovery catalog and the target database with RMANE. Connecting to the recovery catalog and issuing the resync all databases command

Correct Answer: ABSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:Deciding When to Resynchronize the Recovery Catalog

RMAN automatically resynchronizes the recovery catalog when RMAN is connected to a target database and recovery catalogand you have executed RMAN commands.

Thus, you should not need to manually run the RESYNC CATALOG command very often.

QUESTION 22You have created a script in the recovery catalog called backup_database .Which of the following commands would successfully execute that script?

A. run { open script backup_database; run script backup_database}

B. run { engage script backup_database;}

C. run { run script backup_database;}

D. Run { execute script backup_database;}

E. The name backup_database is an invalid name for an RMAN script. Trying to run it from RMAN would resultin an error.


Explanation/Reference:Use the EXECUTE SCRIPT command to run a stored script. If GLOBAL is specified, then a global script withthis name must exist in the recovery catalog; otherwise, RMAN returns error RMAN-06004. If GLOBAL is notspecified, then RMAN searches for a local stored script defined for the current target database. If no local scriptwith this name is found, then RMAN searches for a global script by the same name and executes it if one isfound.

RUN { EXECUTE GLOBAL SCRIPT global_full_backup;}

RUN{ EXECUTE SCRIPT global_full_backup;

}

QUESTION 23In what order would you execute the following steps to create a recovery catalog?

a. Issue the create catalog command.b. Create the recovery-catalog database.c. Create the recovery-catalog user.d. Grant the recovery_catalog_owner privilege to the recovery-catalog user.e. Issue the register database command from the target database.

A. a, b, c, d, eB. b, a, d, c, eC. b, c, d, a, eD. b, c, d, e, aE. b, d, c, a, e

Correct Answer: CSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 24How would you grant the RVPC user access to specific RMAN database records in the RMAN virtual privatecatalog?

A. Issue the grant command from the SYS user (or equivalent) of the target database.B. Issue the grant command from the SYS user (or equivalent) of the recovery-catalog database.C. Issue the grant command from the recovery catalog-owning schema user account in the recovery catalog.D. Issue the grant command from RMAN when connected to the recovery catalog-owning schema.E. Issue the grant command from RMAN when connected to the target database.



QUESTION 25The following databases are registered in the base recovery catalog: PROD1, PROD2, and PROD3. Thedatabase user CATOWNER owns the base recovery catalog. You want a new user VPC1 to have access to onlythe PROD1 database and create a virtual private catalog.The RVPC user can do which of the following? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Register databases if granted the register database privilegeB. See all databases in the recovery-catalog schemaC. See all database-related metadata in the recovery catalog if they are granted access to that databaseD. Unregister databases from the RVPC catalog that were not granted to the RVPC catalog owner with the

grant commandE. Not be connected to with the RMAN command-line catalog parameter for backup or recovery purposes

Correct Answer: AC

Section: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 26Given the scriptcreate script db_backup_datafile_script{backup datafile and 1, and2 plus archivelog delete input;}

What is the result of running this command?Run {execute script db_backup_datafile_script using 2;}

A. The script will fail since you instructed RMAN to back up only one datafile rather than two.B. The script will successfully back up datafile 3 without error.C. The script will fail since it uses a substitution variable which is not supported.D. The execute script command will prompt for the value of and2 since it's not included in the command.E. The script will fail because you cannot use the plus archivelog command when backing up database

datafiles.



QUESTION 27Which is the correct way to connect to both the target database and the recovery catalog from the RMANcommand line? Assume that the target database is called ORCL and that the recovery catalog database iscalled RCAT. Also assume that the recovery-catalog owner is called RCAT_OWN. Assume the environment isconfigured for the ORCL database. (Choose all that apply.)

A. rman target=/ catalog=/@rcatB. rman target=/ catalog=rcat_own/rcat_ownC. rman target=/ catalog=rcat_own/rcat_own@RCATD. rman target=sys/robert@orcl catalog=rcat_own/rcat_own@RCATE. You cannot connect to the target database and the recovery catalog at the same time.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

QUESTION 28What command would you issue to enable automated backups of control files?

A. alter database controlfile autobackup onB. alter system controlfile autobackup onC. configure controlfile autobackup onD. enable controlfile autobackup

Correct Answer: CSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation

QUESTION 29Given the following RMAN commands, choose the option that reflects the order required to restore yourcurrently operational ARCHIVELOG mode database.a: restore database;b: recover database;c: shutdown immediated: startupe: restore archivelog all;f: alter database open

A. a, b, c, d, e, fB. c, b, a, d, e, fC. c, b, a, d, fD. c, a, b, dE. c, a, e, b, d, f

Correct Answer: ESection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 30Which commands are used for RMAN database recovery? (Choose all that apply.)

A. restoreB. repairC. copyD. recoverE. replace

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

QUESTION 31Given a complete loss of your database, in what order would you need to perform the following RMANoperations to restore it?a. restore controlfileb. restore databasec. restore spfiled. recover databasee. alter database openf. alter database open resetlogs

A. b, a, c, d, eB. a, c, b, d, fC. c, a, b, d, eD. c, a, b, d, fE. e, a, b, d, c

Correct Answer: D

Section: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 32If you lost your entire database, including the database spfile, control files, online redo logs, and databasedatafiles, what kind of recovery would be required with RMAN?

A. Complete database recovery.B. Incomplete database recovery.C. Approximate database recovery.D. Archived database recovery.E. The database could not be recovered with RMAN.


QUESTION 33Which command will restore all datafiles to the date 9/30/2008 at 18:00 hours?

A. restore datafiles until time '09/28/2008:21:03:11';B. restore database files until time '09/28/2008:18:00:00';C. restore database until time '09/28/2008:18:00:00';D. recover database until time '09/28/2008:18:00:00';E. recover database until timestamp '09/28/2008:18:00:00';


QUESTION 34What is the end result of these commands if they are successful? RMAN> show retention policy;

RMAN configuration parameters for database with db_ unique_name ORCL are: CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 1; # defau lt

RMAN> backup database tag=gold_copy plus archivelog tag=gold_copy delete input; RMAN> backup database tag=silver_copy plus archivel og tag=silver_copy deleteinput;

A. Attempting to restore silver_copy will fail.B. Attempting to restore gold_copy will fail.C. Both backups will be available for restore without question.D. Attempting to restore gold_copy may or may not succeed.E. You will not be able to restore either gold_copy or silver_copy.

Correct Answer: DSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 35You are using RMAN to backup your ARCHIVELOG mode database. You have enabled control-fileautobackups. Which files are not backed up during the RMAN backup?

A. Database DatafilesB. Database Control FilesC. Online redo logsD. Archived redo logsE. The database SPFILEF. None of the above, all these files are backed up.



QUESTION 36True or false: RMAN offers the equivalent of the SQL command alter database backup controlfile to trace.

A. TrueB. False


QUESTION 37You need to restore your database back to 9/30/2008 at 18:00. In what order would you run the followingcommands to compete this task?

a. restore controlfile until time '09/30/2008:18:00 :00';b. restore database until time '09/30/2008:18:00:00 ';c. restore spfile until time '09/30/2008:18:00:00';d. recover database until time '09/30/2008:18:00:00 ';e. alter database open resetlogs;f. alter database open;

A. b, d, eB. b, d, fC. c, a, b, d, eD. c, a, b, d, fE. a, b, d, e

Correct Answer: ASection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 38What is the correct order of the following commands if you wanted to restore datafile 4, which was accidentallyremoved from the file system?a: sql 'alter database datafile 4 online';b: restore datafile 4;c: recover datafile 4;d: sql 'alter database datafile 4 offline';e: startupf: shutdown

A. a, c, b, dB. d, b, c, aC. f, d, b, c, a, eD. c, a, b, d, fE. a, b, d, e



QUESTION 39Your database is up and running and one of your three control files is accidentally erased. You start RMAN andrun the following command:RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP;

Which of the following statements is true? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The command restores only the missing control file.B. The command restores all the control files.C. The command fails because the database is running.D. This is the correct way to address this problem.E. This is not the correct way to address this problem.

Correct Answer: CESection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:During the database running, the control files are locked by the database instance, you must shutdown thedatabase and startup at NOMOUNT status to restore a missing control file.And you have to open database with RESETLOGS option, due to control file change.

QUESTION 40Which of the following are valid until command options when attempting point-in-time recovery in RMAN?(Choose all that apply.)

A. until timeB. until changeC. until sequenceD. until SCNE. until commit

Correct Answer: ACD

Section: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

QUESTION 41Which of the following does the recover command not do?

A. Restore archived redo logs.B. Apply archived redo logs.C. Restore incremental backups.D. Apply incremental backups.E. Restore datafile images.

Correct Answer: ASection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

QUESTION 42You have a database with the following tablespaces: SYSTEM, SYSAUX, UNDO, USERS, TEMP. You wantto"roll back" the data in the USERS tablespace to the way it looked yesterday.

Which tablespaces do you need to perform a point-in-time restore operation on in order to complete this task?(Choose all that apply.)

A. SYSTEMB. SYSAUXC. UNDOD. USERSE. TEMPF. This restore is not possible.

Correct Answer: ABCDSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 43You have backed up your database using image copies. You have lost the SYSTEM tablespace and need torestart your database as quickly as possible. What is the correct solution?

A. Restore the SYSTEM tablespace from the last backup set and then recover the database.B. Restore the SYSTEM tablespace image copy using the restore command and then restore the database.C. Use the switch datafile command to instantly switch to the datafile copy, recover the tablespace, and open

the database.D. The database is not recoverable in this situation with image copies.E. Manually copy the datafile image copy to the correct location and then manually restore the database from

SQL*Plus.


QUESTION 44If you find errors in the view V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION with a status of MEDIA_CORRUPT, whatRMAN command would you run to correct the problem?

A. recover lost blocks;B. recover corrupt blocks;C. recover media corrupt blocks from list;D. recover corrupt blocks from list;E. recover corruption list;



QUESTION 45What will be the end result of this set of RMAN commands? shutdown abortstartup mountrestore datafile 4 until time '09/30/2008:15:00:00' ;recover datafile 4 until time '09/29/2008:15:00:00' ;alter database open resetlogs;

A. Datafile 4 will be recovered until 9/30/2008 at 15:00 and the database will open.B. The restore command will fail.C. The recover command will fail.D. The alter database open resetlogs command will fail.E. All these commands will fail because they must be in the confines of a run block.


Explanation/Reference:Pay attention on the difference between two timestamps.

QUESTION 46Which of the following represents the correct way to perform an online recovery of datafile 4, which is assignedto a tablespace called USERS?

A. shutdown restore datafile 4; recover datafile 4; alter database open;B. Sql alter database datafile 4 offline; restore datafile 4; recover datafile 4; alter database open;C. Sql alter database datafile 4 offline; restore datafile 4; Sql alter database datafile 4 online;D. Sql alter database datafile 4 offline; restore database datafile 4; recover database datafile 4; Sql alter

database datafile 4 online;E. Sql alter database datafile 4 offline; restore datafile 4; recover datafile 4; Sql alter database datafile 4 online;

Correct Answer: ESection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

QUESTION 47David managed to accidentally delete the datafiles for database called DSL. He called Heber and Heber tried tohelp but he managed to delete the control files of the database. Heber called Bill and Bill saved the day. Theyare using a recovery catalog for this database.

What steps did Bill perform to recover the database and in what order?

a. Restored the control file with the RMAN restore controlfile command. b. Mounted the DSL instance with the alter database mount command. c. Restored the datafiles for the DSL database with the RMAN restore command. d. Opened the DSL database with the alter database open resetlogs command. e. Recovered the datafiles for the DSL database with the RMAN recover command. f. Started the DSL instance. g. Connected to the recovery catalog with RMAN.

A. a, b, c, d, e, f, gB. b, c, d, g, f, e, aC. g, f, a, b, c, e, dD. c, a, d, b, f, e, gE. g, f, a, b, e, c, d


Explanation/Reference:About Recovery with a Backup Control File

If all copies of the current control file are lost or damaged, then you must restore and mount a backup controlfile. You must then run the RECOVER command, even if no data files have been restored, and open thedatabase with the RESETLOGS option. If some copies of the current control file are usable, however, then youcan follow the procedure in "Responding to the Loss of a Subset of the Current Control Files" and avoid therecovery and RESETLOGS operation.

When RMAN is connected to a recovery catalog, the recovery procedure with a backup control file is identicalto recovery with a current control file. The RMAN metadata missing from the backup control file is availablefrom the recovery catalog. The only exception is if the database name is not unique in the catalog, in whichcase you must use SET DBID command before restoring the control file.

1. Start RMAN and connect to a target database.2. Start the target instance without mounting the database. RMAN>STARTUP NOMOUNT;3. Restore the control file

RMAN> SET DBID 320066378; # (Optional) If the datab ase name is not unique, youneed to specify the DBIDRMAN> RUN{ SET CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP FORMAT FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO'autobackup_format'; RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP;}

4. Start the target instance with mounting the database. RMAN>STARTUP MOUNT;5. Restore the data files; RMAN>RESTORE DATABASE;6. Recover the database; RMAN>RECOVER DATABASE;7. Open the database with RESETLOGS option; RMAN> ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

QUESTION 48Which command would you use to determine what database backups are currently available for restore?

A. list database backup;B. report database backup;C. list backup of database;D. list summary backup;E. report backup of database;


QUESTION 49What command would you use to ensure that backup records in the control file are pointing to actual physicalfiles on the backup media?

A. crosscheckB. list backupC. confirmD. resyncE. backup validate


Explanation/Reference:crosscheck

A check to determine whether files on disk or in the media management catalog correspond to the datain the RMAN repository. Because the media manager can mark tapes as expired or unusable, and becausefiles can be deleted from disk or otherwise become corrupted, the RMAN repository can contain outdatedinformation about backups. Run the CROSSCHECK command to perform a crosscheck.--------------------------------------Explanation:The "control file" in the question is acting as the RMAN repository if the RMAN use control file store metadata.

QUESTION 50You have backed up your database twice without connecting to the recovery catalog. What command do youissue to transfer the control-file metadata to the recovery catalog?

A. synch catalogB. resync catalogC. replicate catalogD. update catalogE. restore catalog


Explanation/Reference:Manually Resynchronizing the Recovery Catalog

Use RESYNC CATALOG to force a full resynchronization of the recovery catalog with a target database controlfile. You can specify a database unique name with RESYNC FROM DB_UNIQUE_NAME or ALL, depending on

whether you want to resynchronize a specific database or all databases in the Data Guard environment.Typically, you would perform this operation after you have run the CONFIGURE command for a standbydatabase, but have not yet connected to this standby database.

1. Start RMAN and connect to a target database and recovery catalog.2. Mount or open the target database: RMAN> STARTUP MOUNT;3. Resynchronize the recovery catalog. RMAN> RESYNC CATALOG;

QUESTION 51You want to make sure that your database backup does not exceed 10 hours in length. What command wouldyou issue that would meet this condition?

A. backup database plus archivelog;

B. backup database plus archivelog until time 10:00;

C. backup database plus archivelog timeout 10:00;

D. backup database plus archivelog duration 10:00;

E. backup database plus archivelog timeout 10:00;

Correct Answer: DSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 52You have lost all your RMAN backup set pieces due to a disk failure. Unfortunately, you have an automatedcross-check script that also does a delete expired backupset command. You have restored all the backup setpieces from tape. What command would you use to get those backup set pieces registered in the recoverycatalog and the control file of the database again?

A. register databaseB. recover catalogC. load backupsetD. synch metadataE. catalog start with

Correct Answer: ESection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


Use the CATALOG command to do the following:

Add backup pieces and image copies on disk to the RMAN repositoryRecord a data file copy as a level 0 incremental backup in the RMAN repository, which enables you to use itas part of an incremental backup strategy

START WITH 'string_pattern'Catalogs all valid backup sets, data file and control file copies, and archived redo log files whose name startwith string_pattern . The string pattern can be an ASM disk group, Oracle-managed files directory, or partof a file name (see Example 2-32).RMAN reports any files in the disk location that it cannot catalog. RMAN must be connected to a mountedtarget database.If the string pattern specifies a file name, then it matches the left part of the file name pattern. For example, /tmp/arc matches everything in directory /tmp/arc_dest and /tmp/archive/january as well as file /tmp/arc.cpy.Note: You cannot use wildcard characters in the string pattern, only a strict prefix.

QUESTION 53You run the following commands:RMAN> list expired backup;RMAN> delete expired backup;

What will happen to the backup set pieces associated with the backups that appear in the list expired backupcommand?

A. They will be renamed.B. Nothing will happen to them. The backup set pieces do not exist.C. They will be deleted immediately since they are not in the flash recovery area.D. You will need to manually remove the physical files listed in the output of the commands.E. They will become hidden files and removed 10 days later.



QUESTION 54Why would you run the delete obsolete command? (Choose all that apply.)

A. To remove missing backup set pieces physically from diskB. To remove metadata related to backup set pieces in the control file and the recovery catalog

C. To mark as deleted records in the control file and the recovery catalog associated with obsolete backup setsD. To delete backup set pieces associated with backups that are no longer needed due to retention criteriaE. To remove old versions of RMAN backups


Explanation/Reference:Deleting Expired RMAN Backups and Copies

If you run CROSSCHECK, and if RMAN cannot locate the files, then it updates their records in the RMANrepository to EXPIRED status. You can then use the DELETE EXPIRED command to remove records ofexpired backups and copies from the RMAN repository .

The DELETE EXPIRED command issues warnings if any files marked as EXPIRED actually exist. In rare cases,the repository can mark a file as EXPIRED even though it exists. For example, a directory containing a file iscorrupted at the time of the crosscheck, but is later repaired, or the media manager was not configured properlyand reported some backups as not existing when they really existed.

To delete expired repository records:

If you have not performed a crosscheck recently, then issue a CROSSCHECK command. For example, issue:CROSSCHECK BACKUP;

Delete the expired backups. For example, issue:DELETE EXPIRED BACKUP;

Deleting Obsolete RMAN Backups Based on Retention Policies

The RMAN DELETE command supports an OBSOLETE option, which deletes backups that are no longerneeded to satisfy specified recoverability requirements. You can delete files that are obsolete according tothe configured default retention policy , or another retention policy that you specify as an option to theDELETE OBSOLETE command . As with other forms of the DELETE command, the files deleted are removedfrom backup media, deleted from the recovery catalo g, and marked as DELETED in the control file.

If you specify the DELETE OBSOLETE command with no arguments, then RMAN deletes all obsolete backupsdefined by the configured retention policy. For example:DELETE OBSOLETE;

QUESTION 55What does it mean if a backup is expired?

A. The backup set has exceeded the retention criteria set in RMAN and is eligible for removal.B. The backup set has one or more invalid blocks in it and is not usable for recovery.C. The backup set contains one or more tablespaces no longer in the database.D. The backup set contains one or more missing backup set pieces.E. The backup set is from a previous version of RMAN and was not upgraded.


QUESTION 56If a backup set is expired, what can you do to correct the problem?

A. Change the retention criteria.B. Make the lost backup set pieces available to RMAN again.C. Run the crosscheck command to correct the location for the backup set piece contained in the metadata.D. Nothing. The backup set piece is lost forever.E. Call Oracle support, their assistance is required.


QUESTION 57How long will this backup be allowed to run?Backup as compressed backupset duration 2:00 minimi ze load database;

A. 2 minutesB. 2 hoursC. 2 daysD. The command will generate an error.E. This backup is not constrained by any time limitation.



QUESTION 58What is the impact of the following backup if it exceeds the duration allowance?

backup as compressed backupset duration 2:00 partia l minimize load database ;

A. The entire backup will fail. It will not be usable for recovery.B. The entire backup will fail, but any datafile successfully backed up will be usable for recovery.C. If this backup fails, subsequent backups will prioritize datafiles not backed up.D. If this backup fails, an error will be raised and any other commands will not be executed.E. If this backup fails, no error will be raised and any other commands will be executed.



QUESTION 59In what view are you likely to see the following output?

SID SERIAL# EVENT SECONDS _IN_WAIT---- -------- ---------------------------- -------- -------- 121 269 RMAN backup & recovery I/O 2 129 415 SQL*Net message from client 63 130 270 SQL*Net message from client 0

A. V$SESSION_EVENTB. V$SESSIONC. V$WAITSD. V$WAITSTATE. V$SYSSTAT



QUESTION 60What view might you use to try to determine how long a particular backup will take?

A. V$SESSION_EVENTB. V$SESSIONC. V$WAITSD. V$WAITSTATE. V$SESSION_LONGOPS

Correct Answer: ESection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 61What is the impact of the results of the output of the following command? RMAN> report unrecoverable database;

Report of files that need backup due to unrecoverab le operationsFile Type of Backup Required Name---- ----------------------- ---------------------- ------------- 4 full or incremental C:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORCL \USERS01.DBF

A. There are no backup sets with any backups of the users01.dbf datafile.B. The users01.dbf datafile has had unrecoverable operations occur in it. It will need to be backed up or some

data loss is possible during a recovery.C. The users01.dbf datafile is corrupted.D. The users01.dbf datafile backup exceeds the retention criteria.E. The last backup of the users01.dbf datafile failed and must be rerun.



QUESTION 62What does the output on this report indicate?RMAN> report need backup;

RMAN retention policy will be applied to the comman d

RMAN retention policy is set to redundancy 1Report of files with less than 1 redundant backups

File #bkps Name---- ----- -------------------------------------5 0 C:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORCL\MY_DATA_01.DBF

A. The my_data_01.dbf datafile is corrupted and needs to be restored.B. The my_data_01.dbf datafile has not yet been backed up. This report does not imply that the data in the

datafile can not be recovered.C. The my_data_01.dbf datafile has not yet been backed up. This report implies that the data in the datafile

can not be recovered.D. The my_data_01.dbf datafile no longer meets the retention criteria for backups.E. Datafile 5 is missing.



QUESTION 63What does the minimize load database parameter mean when backing up a database?

A. RMAN will attempt to make the backup run as fast as possible without any IO limitations.B. RMAN will automatically restrict the number of channels in use to one.C. RMAN will spread the backup IO over the total duration stated in the backup command.D. RMAN will skip any datafile that currently is involved in an IO operation. RMAN will retry backing up the

datafile later and an error will be raised at the end of the backup if the datafile cannot be backed up.E. Datafiles will be backed up; those having the lowest current number of IO operations will be backed up first.


QUESTION 64What is the result of this command? RMAN> Report need backup days 3;

A. Lists all datafiles created in the last three days that are not backed up.B. Lists all datafiles not recoverable based on the current retention criteria.C. Lists all datafiles not backed up in the last three days. The datafile is not recoverable.D. Lists all datafiles that need to be backed up due to unrecoverable operations.E. Lists all datafiles not backed up in the last three days. It does not imply that the datafile is not recoverable.

Correct Answer: ESection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 65Why would you execute the report obsolete command?

A. To list all backups that were no longer available for restore operationsB. To list all backups that had aged beyond the RMAN retention criteriaC. To list all backup set pieces listed in control-file or recovery-catalog metadata that are not on the backup

mediaD. To list all datafiles that are no longer part of the database and thus do not need to be backed upE. To list all archived redo logs that are no longer needed for any database recovery


Explanation/Reference:You can report backup sets, backup pieces, and data file copies that are obsolete that is, not needed tomeet a specified retention policy by specifying the OBSOLETE keyword.

QUESTION 66What information does the report schema command not provide? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Size of the datafilesB. Size of the tempfilesC. Date of last backup for datafiles and tempfilesD. Filenames for each datafileE. Checkpoint SCN associated with the last RMAN backup

Correct Answer: CESection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 67If a backup is expired, which of the following is true?

A. It can never be used for a restore/recover operation.B. Oracle will remove the backup set pieces from the flash recovery area.C. The backup has been used at least once to restore and recover the database.D. The backup is no longer valid because of a resetlogs operation.E. The physical backup set pieces are missing from the media.


QUESTION 68True or false: tablespace point-in-time recovery is possible only with RMAN.

A. TrueB. False


QUESTION 69Which command is used to begin a tablespace point-in-time recovery?

A. Restore tablespaceB. Recover tablespaceC. Tablespace recoverD. Recover to timeE. recover datafile


QUESTION 70When you are performing active database duplication, a backup of what kind is required?

A. A current RMAN backup-set backup is required.B. No backup is required.C. An RMAN image backup is required.D. A manual backup is required.E. A "duplicate" preparatory backup is required.



QUESTION 71Which of the following commands will perform an active database duplication of the ORCL database to theORCL2 database?

A. set oracle_sid=orclrman target=sys/robert auxname=sys/Robert@orcl2create duplicate target database to neworcl from ac tive databasenofilenamecheck spfileset control_files 'c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\contro l01.ctl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\control02.ctl'set db_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl 'set log_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl ';

B. Set oracle_sid=orclrman target=sys/robert auxname=sys/Robert@orcl2duplicate target database nofilenamecheck spfileset control_files 'c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\contro l01.ctl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\control02.ctl'set db_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl 'set log_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl ';

C. Set oracle_sid=orclrman target=sys/robert auxname=sys/Robert@orcl2duplicate target database to neworcl nofilenamechec k spfileset control_files 'c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\contro l01.ctl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\control02.ctl'set db_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl 'set log_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl ';

D. Set oracle_sid=orclrman target=sys/robert auxname=sys/Robertduplicate target database to neworcl from active da tabase nofilenamecheckspfileset control_files 'c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\contro l01.ctl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\control02.ctl'set db_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl 'set log_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl ';

E. Set oracle_sid=orclrman target=sys/robert auxname=sys/Robert@orcl2duplicate target database to neworcl from active da tabase nofilenamecheckspfileset control_files 'c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\contro l01.ctl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl\control02.ctl'set db_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl 'set log_file_name_convert'c:\oracle\oradata\orcl','c:\oracle\oradata\neworcl ';

Correct Answer: ESection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 72How many database instances are used during a database-duplication process?

A. OneB. TwoC. ThreeD. FourE. Five


QUESTION 73What command is used to reset a database to a previous incarnation?

A. reset incarnation

B. incarnation resetC. reset database to incarnationD. reset database incarnationE. reset databse incarnation number


QUESTION 74What view would you use to determine if a given tablespace is fully self-contained for the execution of atablespace point-in-time recovery?

A. TS_CHECKB. TPITR_CHECKC. TS_PITR_CHECKD. CHECK_TSPITRE. PITR_TS_CHECK


QUESTION 75When performing a full database disaster recovery with RMAN, in what order would you execute these steps?

a. Restore the control file from autobackups.b. Run the RMAN restore and recover command.c. Restore the database spfile from autobackups.d. Make the RMAN backup set pieces available.e. Open the database with the alter database open resetlogs command.f. Open the database with the alter database open command.

A. a, b, c, d, e, fB. c, d, a, b, fC. d, c, a, b, fD. d, b, d, c, eE. d, c, a, b, e

Correct Answer: ESection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 76When performing a database duplication, which duplicate database parameter would you set to ensure that theonline redo logs are created in the correct location?

A. log_file_name_convertB. convert_log_file_nameC. file_name_convert_log

D. redo_log_file_name_convertE. logfile_convert_directory

Correct Answer: ASection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 77Which command would correctly start a TSPITR of the USERS tablespace?

A. recover tablespace users until time '10/06/2008:22: 42:00' auxiliary 'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

B. recover tablespace users time '10/06/2008:22:42:00' auxiliary destination 'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

C. recover tablespace users to point-in-time '10/06/20 08:22:42:00' auxiliarydestination 'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

D. recover tablespace users except time '10/06/2008:22 :42:00' auxiliarydestination 'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

E. recover tablespace users until time '10/06/2008:22: 42:00' auxiliary destination'c:\oracle\auxiliary';

Correct Answer: ESection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation


QUESTION 78True or false: you can perform an active database duplication when the database is in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

A. TrueB. False



QUESTION 79Which statement most accurately describes the implementation of a SQL Access Advisor recommendation?

A. SQL Access Advisor recommendations are automatically implemented.B. Individual SQL Access Advisor recommendations can be scheduled for implementation.C. All SQL Access Advisor recommendations for a specific task must be implemented at the same time.D. SQL Access Advisor recommendations are automatically scheduled for implementation during the

maintenance window.E. None of the above.


Explanation/Reference:Implementing the SQL Access Advisor Recommendations (link)

A SQL Access Advisor recommendation can range from a simple suggestion to a complex solution thatrequires partitioning a set of existing base tables and implementing a set of database objects such as indexes,materialized views, and materialized view logs. You can select the recommendations for implementationand schedule when the job should be executed.

QUESTION 80Which of the following represents the correct sequence of events for Database Replay?

A. Capture, analyze, preprocess, replayB. Capture, preprocess, analyze, replayC. Capture, preprocess, replay, analyzeD. Analyze, capture, preprocess, replayE. None of the above



QUESTION 81Which of these recommendations should be followed before capturing a workload? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Make sure your replay database has the same structure as the capture database, except without data.B. Make sure the replay and capture databases are similar in data content.C. Perform a clean shutdown and restart of the capture database before beginning a workload capture.D. Start the capture database in UNRESTRICTED mode, then start the capture.

E. Define inclusion and exclusion filters.



QUESTION 82Which is true concerning Database Replay in an Oracle Real Application Cluster (RAC) database?

A. Workload capture is per instance.B. You only need to restart one instance to begin workload capture.C. Specifically in RAC, you shut down all instances, restart them individually, and begin workload capture with

the last instance started.D. RAC does not support workload capture, but it does support workload replay.E. None of the above.

Correct Answer: ESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

QUESTION 83Performance divergence indicated in the Workload Replay report is most likely due to what?

A. DML and SQL statement results that do not match between the capture and replay systemsB. When errors that occur in the capture system don't occur in the replay systemC. Top SQL statementsD. Infrastructure or system-configuration differencesE. Time-of-day differences between capture and replay systems



QUESTION 84Which of the following Oracle features is enabled by setting a nonzero value for the MEMORY_TARGETinitialization parameter?

A. Automatic PGA Memory ManagementB. Automatic SGA Memory ManagementC. Automatic Shared Memory ManagementD. Automatic Memory ManagementE. Manual SGA Memory ManagementF. None of the above



QUESTION 85By setting the value of MEMORY_TARGET to zero and setting the value of SGA_TARGET to a nonzero value, youwill enable which of the following memory-management options?

A. Automatic PGA Memory Management

B. Automatic SGA Memory ManagementC. Automatic Shared Memory ManagementD. Automatic Memory ManagementE. Manual SGA Memory ManagementF. None of the above



QUESTION 86For Oracle 11g, Oracle strongly recommends that you configure your database to use which of the followingmemory management features?

A. Automatic PGA Memory ManagementB. Automatic SGA Memory ManagementC. Automatic Shared Memory ManagementD. Automatic Memory ManagementE. Manual SGA Memory ManagementF. None of the above



QUESTION 87To manually configure the SGA components using Oracle Enterprise Manager Memory Advisor, you can setvalues for which of the following initialization parameters? (Choose all that apply.)

A. DB_CACHE_SIZE

B. SHARED_POOL_SIZE

C. LARGE_POOL_SIZE

D. JAVA_POOL_SIZE

E. SGA_MAX_SIZE

F. SORT_AREA_SIZE

Correct Answer: ABCDSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 88When manually configuring the SGA, which of the following parameter changes requires an instance restart totake effect?

A. DB_CACHE_SIZE

B. SHARED_POOL_SIZE

C. LARGE_POOL_SIZE

D. JAVA_POOL_SIZE

E. SGA_MAX_SIZE

F. SORT_AREA_SIZE

Correct Answer: ESection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 89Using Oracle Enterprise Manager to set SGA pool values manually, for which of the following pools does OracleEM offer advice to set the value appropriately? (Choose all that apply.)

A. DB_CACHE_SIZE

B. SHARED_POOL_SIZE

C. LARGE_POOL_SIZE

D. JAVA_POOL_SIZE

E. SGA_MAX_SIZE

F. SORT_AREA_SIZE

Correct Answer: ABSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 90In Oracle 11g, by default which one of the following conditions implicitly enables Automatic PGA MemoryManagement?

A. Setting a nonzero value for SGA_TARGET

B. Configuring Automatic Shared Memory ManagementC. Configuring Automatic Memory ManagementD. Setting a nonzero value for SGA_MAX_SIZE and PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET




QUESTION 91Automatic PGA Memory Management eliminates the need to manually configure which of the followinginitialization parameters? (Choose all that apply.)

A. SORT_AREA_SIZE

B. HASH_AREA_SIZE

C. BITMAP_MERGE_AREA_SIZE

D. CREATE_BITMAP_AREA_SIZE

E. PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET

Correct Answer: ABCDSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 92When tuning Automatic PGA Memory Management, which of the following views will provide the informationspecified?

A. The V$PGA_TARGET_ADVICE view shows the predicted cache hit-ratio improvement if you increasePGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET.

B. The V$PGA_TARGET_ADVICE view shows how the V$SQL_WORKAREA histogram will change if you changethe value of PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET.

C. The V$PGA_TARGET_ADVICE_HISTOGRAM view shows how the V$SQL_WORKAREA_HISTOGRAM willchange if you switch between Manual and Automatic PGA Memory Management.

D. The V$PGA_TARGET_ADVICE view shows how performance will improve for the different work areas if youswitch from Manual to Automatic PGA Memory Management.



QUESTION 93To enable resumable space allocation for the instance, which of the following initialization parameters shouldyou set to a nonzero value?

A. RESUMABLE_SPACE_TIME

B. RESUMABLE_SPACE

C. RESUMABLE_TIME

D. RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT

E. TIME_RESUMABLE



QUESTION 94Which of the following describes how a distributed resumable transaction behaves?

A. The resumable setting on the initiating session determines the resumable conditions for the entiredistributed transaction.

B. The resumable setting for the initiating instance determines the resumable conditions for the entiredistributed transaction.

C. The resumable setting on the initiating session controls only that part of the transaction that occurs withinthe local instance; remote resumable settings determine the behavior of the distributed parts of thetransaction.

D. None of the above.

Correct Answer: CSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

QUESTION 95Which of these components correctly identify the unique value of the NAME column in the DBA_RESUMABLEview?

A. Username, instance number, session IDB. Instance number, username, session IDC. Instance number, session ID, usernameD. Username, session ID, instance numberE. None of the above



QUESTION 96Which of the following are included in a transportable tablespace set? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The datafiles that make up a self-contained group of tablespaces required for copyB. The system tablespaceC. An export of the tablespace metadataD. The spfileE. All of the above

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 97The following query will provide what information about transportable tablespaces for the current database?(Choose all that apply.)SELECT d.platform_name "Source", t.platform_name "C ompatible Targets",endian_formatFROM v$transportable_platform t, v$database dWHERE t.endian_format = (select endian_format from v$transportable_platform t, v$databa se d where d.platform_name = platform_name);

A. The list of target platforms having the same endian format as the source databaseB. The list of target platforms requiring endian conversionC. The list of target platforms that will not require endian conversion

D. The list of all target platforms that can receive transportable tablespaces from the source databaseE. None of the above



QUESTION 98When exporting metadata for the transportable tablespaces, what is the correct next step after confirmingendian format?

A. Export the tablespaces using data pump.B. Determine if the transportable set is self-contained.C. Convert the datafiles using RMAN.D. Copy the datafiles from source to destination.


QUESTION 99The environmental variable ORACLE_BASE is set. You want to check the diagnostic files created as part of theAutomatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR). View the Exhibit and note the various parameters set in your database.What will be the location of the ADR base?

Exhibit:

A. It is set to ORACLE_BASE.

B. It is set to ORACLE_HOME/log.

C. It is set to /u01/app/oracle/admin/orcl/adump.D. It is set to /u01/app/oracle/flash_recovery_area.



The original answer was C. but it is not correct.

The ADR root directory is known as ADR base. Its location is set by the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST initializationparameter. If this parameter is omitted or left null, the database sets DIAGNOSTIC_DEST upon startup asfollows:

If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to the directory designatedby ORACLE_BASE.

If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is not set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to ORACLE_HOME/log.

QUESTION 100Identify the scenarios in which the RMAN CROSSCHECR command is useful. (Choose all that apply.)

A. To check that the obsolete backups are deleted from the repository records and from the disk.B. To update the RMAN repository if you delete archived redo logs with operating system commands.C. To update outdated information about backups that disappeared from disk or tape or became corrupted and

inaccessible.D. To synchronize the actual files on disk or in the media management catalog with the RMAN repository for

which the backup was not taken using RMAN.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answer was opposite.

Crosscheck are useful because they can do the following: (Link)

Update outdated information about backups that disappeared from disk or tape or became corruptedUpdate the repository if you delete archived redo logs or other files with operating system commands

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Use the CROSSCHECK command to synchronize the physical reality of backups and copies with their logicalrecords in the RMAN repository.

The CROSSCHECK command checks only objects marked AVAILABLE or EXPIRED in the repository byexamining the files on disk for DISK channels or by querying the media manager for sbt channels.

Meaning of Crosscheck Status:

EXPIREDObject is not found either in file system (for DISK) or in the media manager (for sbt). A backup set is EXPIREDif any backup piece in the set is EXPIRED.The CROSSCHECK command does not delete the repository records of the files that it does not find, butupdates their repository records to EXPIRED. You can run DELETE EXPIRED to remove the repositoryrecords for expired files and any existing physical files whose status is EXPIRED.If backups are EXPIRED, then you can re-execute the crosscheck later and determine whether expiredbackups are available. This precaution is especially useful when you use RMAN with a media manager. Forexample, if some backup pieces or copies were erroneously marked as EXPIRED because the PARMS channelsettings were incorrect, then after ensuring that the files really do exist in the media manager, run the CROSSCHECK BACKUP command again to restore those files to AVAILABLE status.

AVAILABLEObject is available for use by RMAN. For a backup set to be AVAILABLE, all backup pieces in the set must

have the status AVAILABLE.

E04

QUESTION 1Which are the correct steps, in order, to deal with the loss of an online redo log if the database has not yetcrashed?

a: Issue a checkpoint.b: Shut down the database.c: Issue an alter database open command to open the database.d: Startup mount the database.e: Issue an alter database clear logfile command.f: Recover all database datafiles.

A. a, b, c, dB. b, d, e, cC. a, b, d, e, cD. b, f, d, f, cE. b, d, a, c



QUESTION 2Which of the following are prerequisite steps to transport a database? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Query the V$TRANSPORTABLE_PLATFORMS view in the source database to determine if the intendeddestination is listed.

B. Verify that there are no restrictions or limitations that the source or destination database may encounter.C. Verify that the source and destination have the same Oracle version, critical updates, patch-set version, and

patch- set exceptions.D. Determine if you will perform the conversion on the source or destination platform.E. None of the above.

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 3Which of the following supplied functions is used to identify external tables, directories, and BFILES?

A. DBMS_TDB.CHECK_DIRECTORIES

B. DBMS_TDB.CHECK_EXTERNAL

C. DBMS_TDB.CHECK_BFILE

D. DBMS_TDB.CHECK_EXT



QUESTION 4Which of the following is a prerequisite for running DBMS_TDB.CHECK_DB to a successful completion?

A. The database must be in read-write mode.B. The database must have no external files.C. The database must open in read-only mode.D. The database must be mounted but not opened.



QUESTION 5Which of the following options describes Segment Shrink?

A. Reclaims space above and below the high-water mark without using additional spaceB. Moves rows to a new physical location, resetting the high-water mark, but uses additional space during the

operationC. Deallocates space above the high-water mark that is currently not in useD. None of the above


QUESTION 6For which of the following can you use Segment Shrink? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Heap tablesB. Tables with function-based indexesC. IndexesD. Partitions and subpartitionsE. None of the above

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Space ManagementExplanation

QUESTION 7When shrinking a table segment, you choose to shrink all the indexes for that table using the SHRINK SPACEcommand. Which clause should you use?

A. INCLUDING DEPENDENCIES

B. INCLUDING DEPENDENCIES CASCADE

C. COMPACT

D. CASCADE




QUESTION 8Which of these represent the main components of Database Resource Manager? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Resource consumer groupsB. Resource plansC. Resource-plan groupsD. Resource-plan directivesE. All of the above

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

QUESTION 9Every resource plan must contain an allocation to which consumer group?

A. LOW_GROUPB. SYS_GROUPC. DEFAULT_GROUPD. BASE_GROUPE. OTHER_GROUPS

Correct Answer: ESection: Managing ResourcesExplanation



QUESTION 10Which DBMS_RESOURCE_MANAGER procedure prioritizes consumer-group mappings?

A. CREATE_MAPPING_PRIORITY

B. SET_MAPPING_PRIORITY

C. SET_MAPPING_ORDER

D. PRIORITIZE_MAPPING_ORDER

E. This functionality is not available through the DBMS_RESOURCE_MANAGER package.



QUESTION 11Within a resource-plan definition, what differentiates a top-level plan from a subplan?

A. A subplan has the PLAN_SUB parameter value set to SUB.

B. A top-level plan has the GROUP_OR_PLAN parameter set to the name of the subplan in the resource-plandefinition.

C. There is no difference in the resource-plan definition.D. A subplan always has the CPU_MTH parameter value set to RATIO.

E. The string TOP_LEVEL is appended to the name of top-level resource plans.



QUESTION 12When setting arguments for a job, which procedure do you use for types that cannot be implicitly converted toand from a VARCHAR2 datatype?

A. SET_JOB_ARGUMENT_VALUEB. SET_JOB_VALUE_ANYDATAC. SET_JOB_ANYDATA_VALUED. SET_SPECIAL_JOB_VALUEE. SET_JOB_ANYTYPE_VALUE

Correct Answer: CSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 13Which DBMS_SCHEDULER procedures can be used to enable a program? (Choose all that apply.)

A. ENABLE

B. ENABLE_PROGRAMC. VALIDATE_PROGRAMD. SET_ATTRIBUTE

E. SET_ENABLED

Correct Answer: ADSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation


ENABLE Procedure, Enables a program, job, chain, window, or window groupSET_ATTRIBUTE Procedure, Changes an attribute of a job, schedule, or other Scheduler object

QUESTION 14Which of the following is not a valid calendaring syntax element?

A. FREQ

B. BYHOUR

C. RUNDATE

D. INTERVAL

E. BYMINUTE

Correct Answer: CSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Calendaring Syntax (link)

Table 129-10 Values for repeat_interval

FREQThis specifies the type of recurrence. It must be specified. The possible predefined frequency values are YEARLY, MONTHLY, WEEKLY, DAILY, HOURLY, MINUTELY , and SECONDLY. Alternatively, specifies anexisting schedule to use as a user-defined frequency.

INTERVALThis specifies a positive integer representing how often the recurrence repeats. The default is 1, which meansevery second for secondly, every day for daily, and so on. The maximum value is 99.

BYMONTHThis specifies which month or months you want the job to execute in. You can use numbers such as 1 forJanuary and 3 for March, as well as three-letter abbreviations such as FEB for February and JUL for July.

BYWEEKNOThis specifies the week of the year as a number. It follows ISO-8601, which defines the week as starting withMonday and ending with Sunday; and the first week of a year as the first week, which is mostly within theGregorian year. The first week is equivalent to the following two variants: the week that contains the firstThursday of the Gregorian year; and the week containing January 4th.The ISO-8601 week numbers are integers from 1 to 52 or 53; parts of week 1 may be in the previous calendaryear; parts of week 52 may be in the following calendar year; and if a year has a week 53, parts of it must be inthe following calendar year.As an example, in the year 1998, the ISO week 1 began on Monday December 29th, 1997; and the last ISOweek (week 53) ended on Sunday January 3rd, 1999. So December 29th, 1997, is in the ISO week 1998-01,and January 1st, 1999, is in the ISO week 1998-53.byweekno is only valid for YEARLY.Examples of invalid specifications are "FREQ=YEARLY; BYWEEKNO=1; BYMONTH=12" and"FREQ=YEARLY;BYWEEKNO=53;BYMONTH=1".

BYYEARDAYThis specifies the day of the year as a number. Valid values are 1 to 366. An example is 69, which is March 10(31 for January, 28 for February, and 10 for March). 69 evaluates to March 10 for non-leap years and March 9in leap years. -2 will always evaluate to December 30th independent of whether it is a leap year.

BYDATEThis specifies a list of dates, where each date is of the form [YYYY]MMDD. A list of consecutive dates can begenerated by using the SPAN modifier, and a date can be adjusted with the OFFSET modifier. An example of a

simple BYDATE clause follows: BYDATE=0115,0315,0615,0915,1215,20060115The following SPAN example is equivalent to BYDATE=0110,0111,0112,0113,0114, which is a span of 5 daysstarting at 1/10: BYDATE=0110+SPAN:5DThe plus sign in front of the SPAN keyword indicates a span starting at the supplied date. The minus signindicates a span ending at the supplied date, and the "^" sign indicates a span of n days or weeks centeredaround the supplied date. If n is an even number, it is adjusted up to the next odd number.Offsets adjust the supplied date by adding or subtracting n days or weeks. BYDATE=0205-OFFSET:2W isequivalent to BYDATE=0205-14D (the OFFSET: keyword is optional), which is also equivalent toBYDATE=0122.

BYMONTHDAYThis specifies the day of the month as a number. Valid values are 1 to 31. An example is 10, which means the10th day of the selected month. You can use the minus sign (-) to count backward from the last day, so, forexample, BYMONTHDAY=-1 means the last day of the month and BYMONTHDAY=-2 means the next to lastday of the month.

BYDAYThis specifies the day of the week from Monday to Sunday in the form MON, TUE, and so on. Using numbers,you can specify the 26th Friday of the year, if using a YEARLY frequency, or the 4th THU of the month, using aMONTHLY frequency. Using the minus sign, you can say the second to last Friday of the month. For example, -1 FRI is the last Friday of the month.

BYHOURThis specifies the hour on which the job is to run. Valid values are 0 to 23. As an example, 10 means 10 a.m.

BYMINUTEThis specifies the minute on which the job is to run. Valid values are 0 to 59. As an example, 45 means 45minutes past the chosen hour.

BYSECONDThis specifies the second on which the job is to run. Valid values are 0 to 59. As an example, 30 means 30seconds past the chosen minute.

BYSETPOSThis selects one or more items, by position, in the list of timestamps that result after the whole calendaringexpression is evaluated. It is useful for requirements such as running a job on the last workday of the month.Rather than attempting to express this with the other BY clauses, you can code the calendaring expression toevaluate to a list of every workday of the month, and then add the BYSETPOS clause to select only the lastitem of that list. Assuming that workdays are Monday through Friday, the syntax would then be: FREQ=MONTHLY; BYDAY=MON,TUE,WED,THU,FRI; BYSETPOS=-1Valid values are 1 through 9999. A negative number selects an item from the end of the list (-1 is the last item, -2 is the next to last item, and so on) and a positive number selects from the front of the list. The BYSETPOSclause is always evaluated last. BYSETPOS is only supported with the MONTHLY and YEARLY frequencies.The BYSETPOS clause is applied to the list of timestamps once per frequency period. For example, when thefrequency is defined as MONTHLY, the Scheduler determines all valid timestamps for the month, orders thatlist, and then applies the BYSETPOS clause. The Scheduler then moves on to the next month and repeats theprocedure. Assuming a start date of Jun 10, 2004, the example evaluates to: Jun 30, Jul 30, Aug 31, Sep 30,Oct 29, and so on.INCLUDEThis includes one or more named schedules in the calendaring expression. That is, the set of timestampsdefined by each included named schedule is added to the results of the calendaring expression. If an identicaltimestamp is contributed by both an included schedule and the calendaring expression, it is included in theresulting set of timestamps only once. The named schedules must have been defined with theCREATE_SCHEDULE procedure.EXCLUDEThis excludes one or more named schedules from the calendaring expression. That is, the set of timestampsdefined by each excluded named schedule is removed from the results of the calendaring expression. Thenamed schedules must have been defined with the CREATE_SCHEDULE procedure.INTERSECTThis specifies an intersection between the calendaring expression results and the set of timestamps defined by

one or more named schedules. Only the timestamps that appear both in the calendaring expression and in oneof the named schedules are included in the resulting set of timestamps.For example, assume that the named schedule last_sat indicates the last Saturday in every month, and that forthe year 2005, the only months where the last day of the month is also a Saturday are April and December.Assume also that the named schedule end_qtr indicates the last day of each quarter in 2005:3/31/2005, 6/30/2005, 9/30/2005, 12/31/2005These calendaring expressions result in the dates that follow:3/31/2005, 4/30/2005, 6/30/2005, 9/30/2005, 12/31/2005FREQ=MONTHLY; BYMONTHDAY=-1; INTERSECT=last_sat,end_qtrIn this example, the terms FREQ=MONTHLY; BYMONTHDAY=-1 indicate the last day of each month.PERIODSThis identifies the number of periods that together form one cycle of a user-defined frequency. It is used in therepeat_interval expression of the schedule that defines the user-defined frequency. It is mandatory when therepeat_interval expression in the main schedule contains a BYPERIOD clause. The following example definesthe quarters of a fiscal year.FREQ=YEARLY;BYDATE=0301,0601,0901,1201;PERIODS=4BYPERIODThis selects periods from a user-defined frequency. For example, if a main schedule names a user-definedfrequency schedule that defines the fiscal quarters shown in the previous example, the clause BYPERIOD=2,4in the main schedule selects the 2nd and 4th fiscal quarters.

QUESTION 15Which Scheduler view(s) can be queried to see which jobs are currently executing? (Choose all that apply.)

A. DBA_SCHEDULER_JOB_RUN_DETAILSB. DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBSC. DBA_SCHEDULER_CURRENT_JOBSD. DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBSE. DBA_SCHEDULER_EXECUTING_JOBS

Correct Answer: BDSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:DBA_SCHEDULER_JOB_RUN_DETAILS displays log run details for all Scheduler jobs in the database.DBA_SCHEDULER_RUNNING_JOBS displays information about all running Scheduler jobs in the database.DBA_SCHEDULER_JOBS displays information about all Scheduler jobs in the database.

DBA_SCHEDULER_CURRENT_JOBS is INVALID.DBA_SCHEDULER_EXECUTING_JOBS is INVALID.

QUESTION 16A schedule defined entirely within the confines of a Scheduler job object is known as a (n) ________________.

A. Fixed scheduleB. Inline scheduleC. Stored scheduleD. Hard-coded scheduleE. None of the above

Correct Answer: BSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:“A schedule defined within a job object is know as an inline schedule, where as an independent schedule object

is referred to as a stored schedule. Inline schedules cannot be reference by any other objects. ”

http://www.datadisk.co.uk/html_docs/oracle/scheduler.htm

QUESTION 17Which DBMS_SCHEDULER procedure(s) can be used to alter an existing job? (Choose all that apply.)

A. SET_ATTRIBUTE_NULLB. ALTER_JOBC. ALTER_JOB_PARAMETERSD. ALTERE. SET_ATTRIBUTE

Correct Answer: AESection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:SET_ATTRIBUTE_NULL Procedure, Changes an attribute of an object to NULLSET_ATTRIBUTE Procedure, Changes an attribute of a job, schedule, or other Scheduler object

There is NO such "ALTER_JOB", "ALTER_JOB_PARAMETERS" and "ALTER" procedure available.

QUESTION 18What is the default value for the ENABLED attribute of a job or program when it is created?

A. TRUEB. FALSEC. There is no default. It must be defined at creation time.D. PENDINGE. NULL



QUESTION 19To set the history retention period for either window logging or job logging individually, which parameters of the SET_SCHEDULER_ATTRIBUTE procedure need to be used? (Choose all that apply.)

A. LOG_HISTORY

B. JOB_LOG_RETENTION

C. WINDOW_LOG_RETENTION

D. WHICH_LOG

E. LOG_NAME

Correct Answer: ASection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answer was A,D. My answer is "A" only.

----------------------------------------------Attributes list of SET_SCHEDULE_ATTRIBUTE:

'default_timezone' : Repeating jobs and windows that use the calendaring syntax retrieve the timezone from this attribute when start_date is not specified. See "Calendaring Syntax" for more information.'email_server ': The SMTP server address that the Scheduler uses to send e-mail notifications for jobstate events. E-mail notifications cannot be sent if this attribute is NULL.'email_sender' : The default e-mail address of the sender of job state e-mail notifications.'email_server_credential' : The schema and name of an existing credential object that SYShas execute object privileges on. Default is NULL. The username and password stored in this credential areused to authenticate with the e-mail server when sending e-mail notifications. This functionality is availablewith Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.2).'email_server_encryption' : This attribute indicates whether or not encryption is enabled forthis email server connection, and if so, at what point encryption starts, and with which protocol. Thisfunctionality is available starting with Oracle Database 11g Release 2 (11.2.0.2). Values are:

NONE: the default, indicating no encryption used SSL_TLS: indicating that either SSL or TLS are used, from the beginning of the connectionSTARTTLS:indicating that the connection starts unencrypted, but the command STARTTLS is sent tothe e-mail server and starts encryption

'event_expiry_time' : The time, in seconds, before a job state event generated by the Schedulerexpires from the Scheduler event queue. If NULL, job state events expire after 24 hours.'log_history' : The number of days that log entries for both the job log and the window log areretained. Default is 30 and the range of valid values is 0 through 1000000.'max_job_slave_processes' : This Scheduler attribute is not used.

The PURGE_LOG Procedure uses "WHICH_LOG" and "LOG_NAME" attributes.Syntax

DBMS_SCHEDULER.PURGE_LOG ( log_history IN PLS_INTEGER DEFAULT 0, which_log IN VARCHAR2 DEFAULT 'JOB_AND_WINDOW_LOG', job_name IN VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL);Parameterslog_historyThis specifies how much history (in days) to keep. The valid range is 0 - 1000000. If set to 0, no history is kept.which_logThis specifies the log type. Valid values are: job_log, window_log, and job_and_window_log.job_nameThis specifies which job-specific entries must be purged from the jog log. This can be a comma-delimited list ofjob names and job classes. Whenever job_name has a value other than NULL, the which_log argumentimplicitly includes the job log.

QUESTION 20Consider the following code snippet:BEGINDBMS_SCHEDULER.SET_ATTRIBUTE (name => 'lne_job1',attribute => 'job_priority',value => 1);END;/If this code were executed, which of the following statements would be true?

A. The priority of the lne_job1 job would be set to 1.B. The lne_job1 job would be executed synchronously.C. The lne_job1 job would run immediately in the users current session.D. The lne_job1 job would retain its current priority.

E. The job will immediately take priority over all running jobs.


Explanation/Reference:job_priorityThis attribute specifies the priority of this job relative to other jobs in the same class as this job. If multiple jobswithin a class are scheduled to be executed at the same time, the job priority determines the order in which jobsfrom that class are picked up for execution by the job coordinator. It can be a value from 1 through 5, with 1being the first to be picked up for job execution.If no job priority is specified when creating a job, the default priority of 3 is assigned to it.

QUESTION 21Which of the following calendaring syntax expressions would evaluate to the last day of every month?

A. FREQ = MONTHLY; BYMONTHDAY = 31

B. FREQ = MONTHLY; BYMONTHDAY = -1

C. FREQ = DAILY; BYDAY = -1

D. FREQ = MONTHLY; BYDAY = 31

E. FREQ = DAILY; BYMONTHDAY = LAST_DAY


Explanation/Reference:FREQThis specifies the type of recurrence. It must be specified. The possible predefined frequency values are YEARLY, MONTHLY, WEEKLY, DAILY, HOURLY, MINUTELY , and SECONDLY. Alternatively, specifies anexisting schedule to use as a user-defined frequency.

BYMONTHDAYThis specifies the day of the month as a number. Valid values are 1 to 31. An example is 10, which means the10th day of the selected month. You can use the minus sign (-) to count backward from the last day, so, forexample, BYMONTHDAY=-1 means the last day of the month and BYMONTHDAY=-2 means the next to last dayof the month.

QUESTION 22Which of the following tasks is not performed by the job coordinator?

A. Update job log when a job completesB. Spawn and remove job slavesC. Write/read job info to/from memory cacheD. Query job tableE. Pass job information to job slaves

Correct Answer: ASection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 23Which of the following objects can be directly referenced by a window object? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Schedule objectB. Program objectC. Job objectD. Resource planE. Resource consumer group

Correct Answer: ADSection: Managing ResourcesExplanation

QUESTION 24Which of the following are valid program types for a lightweight job? (Choose all that apply.)

A. PLSQL_BLOCK

B. EXECUTABLE

C. JAVA_STORED_PROCEDURE

D. STORED_PROCEDURE

E. EXTERNAL

Correct Answer: ADSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:job_typeJob action type ('PLSQL_BLOCK', 'STORED_PROCEDURE', 'EXECUTABLE', o r 'CHAIN')

QUESTION 25Which of the following is not a valid setting for the PROGRAM_TYPE parameter in a program object or theJOB_TYPE parameter in a job object?

A. PLSQL_BLOCK

B. JAVA_STORED_PROCEDURE

C. STORED_PROCEDURE

D. EXECUTABLE

E. None of the above are invalid settings.


Explanation/Reference:job_typeJob action type ('PLSQL_BLOCK', 'STORED_PROCEDURE', 'EXECUTABLE', or 'CHAIN')

QUESTION 26Which of the following Scheduler elements encourage object reuse? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Schedule objectsB. Program argumentsC. Job classesD. Job argumentsE. All of the above

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Don't really get the exact source of answer, just keep it in memory with common sense.

QUESTION 27What is the danger associated with stopping a running job by using the STOP_JOB procedure?

A. The job will need to be reenabled before it will execute again.B. The job may hold locks on objects referenced within it.C. All jobs within the job group will also be stopped.D. The job may leave data in an inconsistent state.E. There is no danger in using the STOP_JOB procedure.

Correct Answer: DSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation


QUESTION 28If a job references a schedule that has been disabled, what will be the result?

A. The job will be automatically disabled.B. The job will never execute.C. The job will attempt to execute but will fail.D. The job will inherit the DEFAULT_SCHEDULE schedule.

E. A schedule object cannot be disabled.

Correct Answer: ESection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation


QUESTION 29When a job exceeds the date specified in its END_DATE attribute, which of the following will happen? (Chooseall that apply.)

A. The job will be dropped automatically if the value of the AUTO_DROP attribute is TRUE.

B. The job will only be disabled if the value of the AUTO_DROP attribute is FALSE.

C. The STATE attribute of the job will be set to COMPLETED if the value of the AUTO_DROP attribute is FALSE.

D. All objects referenced by the job will be dropped if the value of the AUTO_DROP attribute is TRUE and thevalue of the CASCADE attribute is TRUE.

E. The STATE column of the job table will be set to COMPLETED for the job.

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:auto_drop, If TRUE (the default), indicates that the job should be dropped once completed.

end_date, This attribute specifies the date and time after which the job expires and is no longer run. After theend_date, if auto_drop is TRUE, the job is dropped. If auto_drop is FALSE, the job is disabled and theSTATE of the job is set to COMPLETED.If no value for end_date is specified, the job repeats forever unless max_runs or max_failures is set, in whichcase the job stops when either value is reached.The value for end_date must be after the value for start_date. If it is not, an error is generated when the job isenabled.

QUESTION 30Which of the following is true about job chains?

A. They consist of one or more Scheduler programs.B. They are used to implement dependency scheduling.C. They are used to implement time-based scheduling.D. They are used to implement event-based scheduling.E. None of the above.


Explanation/Reference:Creating and Managing Job ChainsA job chain ("chain") is a named series of tasks that are linked together for a combined objective. Chains arethe means by which you can implement dependency based scheduling, in which jobs are started depending onthe outcomes of one or more previous jobs.

QUESTION 31If two windows overlap, which window attribute will determine whether one should be chosen over the other?

A. WINDOW_PRIORITY

B. PRIORITY

C. PRIORITY_LEVEL

D. WINDOW_PRIORITY_LEVEL

E. OVERLAP_RULE



QUESTION 32Globalization support is implemented through the text- and character-processing functions provided by whichOracle feature?

A. RSTLNE

B. NLSRTL

C. LISTENER

D. NLSSORT

E. Linguistic sorts

Correct Answer: BSection: GlobalizationExplanation

Explanation/Reference:NLSRTL: NLS Runtime Type Library.

QUESTION 33What elements of globalization can be explicitly defined using the NLS_LANG environment variable? (Choose allthat apply.)

A. NLS_LANGUAGE

B. NLS_SORT

C. NLS_CALENDAR

D. NLS_CHARACTERSET

E. NLS_TERRITORY

Correct Answer: ADESection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 34Given two different character sets (A and B), which of the following must be true for A to be considered a strictsuperset of B? (Choose all that apply.)

A. A must contain all of the characters defined in B.B. A must be Unicode.C. The encoded values in A must match the encoded values in B for all characters defined in B.D. A must be a multi-byte character set.E. The encoded values in A must match the encoded values in B for all numeric and alphabetic characters in

B.

Correct Answer: ACSection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 35The NLS_SORT parameter sets the default sort method for which of the following operations?(Choose all thatapply.)

A. WHERE clause

B. ORDER BY clause

C. BETWEEN clause

D. NLSSORT function

E. NLS_SORT function

Correct Answer: ADSection: Globalization

Explanation


QUESTION 36Which view shows all valid values for the NLS_LANGUAGE, NLS_SORT, NLS_TERRITORY, andNLS_CHARACTERSET parameters?

A. V$VALID_NLS_VALUES

B. NLS_VALID_VALUES

C. NLS_VALUE_OPTIONS

D. V$NLS_VALUE_OPTIONS

E. V$NLS_VALID_VALUES

Correct Answer: ESection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 37Which of the following datatypes store time-zone information in the database?

A. TIMESTAMP

B. DATE

C. TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE

D. TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL TIME ZONE

E. DATETIME

Correct Answer: CSection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 38Which of the following are valid settings for the NLS_COMP parameter? (Choose all that apply.)

A. ASCII

B. ANSI

C. BINARY

D. MONOLINGUAL

E. MULTILINGUAL

Correct Answer: BCSection: GlobalizationExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Parameter type StringSyntax NLS_COMP = { BINARY | LINGUISTIC | ANSI }Default value BINARY

Modifiable ALTER SESSIONBasic No

NLS_COMP specifies the collation behavior of the database session.

Values :

BINARYNormally, comparisons in the WHERE clause and in PL/SQL blocks is binary unless you specify the NLSSORTfunction.

LINGUISTICComparisons for all SQL operations in the WHERE clause and in PL/SQL blocks should use the linguistic sortspecified in the NLS_SORT parameter. To improve the performance, you can also define a linguistic index onthe column for which you want linguistic comparisons.

ANSIA setting of ANSI is for backwards compatibility; in general, you should set NLS_COMP to LINGUISTIC

QUESTION 39NLS parameters can be set using the five methods listed. Put the methods in order from highest to lowestaccording to Oracles order of precedence:a: Default settingb: Client environment variablec: Explicit ALTER SESSION statementd: Inside SQL functione: Server initialization parameter

A. b, d, e, a, cB. e, a, b, c, dC. d, c, b, e, aD. a, b, d, c, eE. d, c, b, a, e



QUESTION 40What can you determine about the following linguistic sorts based only on their names?1. GERMAN2. FRENCH_M

A. 1 is a monolingual sort.B. 2 is a monolingual sort.C. 1 is case insensitive.D. Both 1 and 2 are case insensitive.E. Case sensitivity is unknown.

Correct Answer: ASection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 41In a database with the database character set of US7ASCII and a national character set of UTF-8 , whichdatatypes would be capable of storing Unicode data by default?

A. VARCHAR2

B. CHAR

C. NVARCHAR2

D. CLOB

E. LONG



QUESTION 42Automatic data conversion will occur if which of the following happens?

A. The client and server have different NLS_LANGUAGE settings.

B. The client and server character sets are not the same, and the database character set is not a strictsuperset of the client character set.

C. The client and server are in different time zones.D. The client requests automatic data conversion.E. The AUTO_CONVERT initialization parameter is set to TRUE.



QUESTION 43Which of the following NLS_SORT parameter values would result in case-insensitive and accent-insensitivebinary sorts?

A. NLS_SORT = BINARY

B. NLS_SORT = BINARY_AI

C. NLS_SORT = BINARY_CI

D. NLS_SORT = BINARY_AI_CI

E. Binary sorts are case insensitive and accent insensitive by default.



QUESTION 44Which NLS parameter can be used to change the default Oracle sort method from binary to linguistic for theSQL SELECT statement?

A. NLS_LANG

B. NLS_COMP

C. NLS_SORT

D. None of the above

Correct Answer: DSection: GlobalizationExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Neither NLS_SORT nor NLS_COMP cannot change sorting from BINARY to LINGUISTIC. Because theNLS_SORT depends on NLS_COMP, if they are different, the sorting method will always be BINARY.

--------------------------------------------------- --------------(Refer to NLS_SORT) The exact operators and query clauses that obey the NLS_SORT parameter depend onthe value of the NLS_COMP parameter. If an operator or clause does not obey the NLS_SORT value , asdetermined by NLS_COMP, the collation used is BINARY.The BINARY comparison is faster and uses less resources than any linguistic comparison but for text in anatural language, it does not provide ordering expected by users.The value of NLS_SORT affects execution plans of queries. Because a standard index cannot be used as asource of values sorted in a linguistic order, an explicit sort operation must usually be performed instead of anindex range scan. A functional index on the NLSSORT function may be defined to provide values sorted in alinguistic order and reintroduce the index range scan to the execution plan.

NLS_COMP specifies the collation behavior of the database session.

QUESTION 45Which of the following would be affected by setting NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS=CHAR?

A. All objects in the databaseB. Tables owned by SYS and SYSTEM

C. Data dictionary tablesD. NCHAR columns

E. CHAR columns

Correct Answer: ESection: GlobalizationExplanation


QUESTION 46Which is not a valid locale definition file type?

A. LanguageB. Linguistic sortC. CalendarD. TerritoryE. Character set


QUESTION 47How many different calendars does Oracle 11g support?

A. 22B. 7C. 6D. 15E. 2


QUESTION 48Which NLS parameter directly governs linguistic searches?

A. NLS_SEARCH_L

B. NLS_SORT

C. NLS_SEARCH

D. NLS_SORT_L




QUESTION 49Case-insensitive sorts are always accent insensitive by default.

A. TrueB. False

Correct Answer: BSection: Globalization

Explanation

QUESTION 50What is the name of the file that identifies the set of available locale definitions?

A. locale.defB. lxdef.oraC. lx1boot.nlbD. lx1boot.oraE. lang.def


QUESTION 51Which of the following is not a valid linguistic sort element?

A. Accent expansionB. Canonical equivalenceC. Reverse secondary sortingD. Ignorable charactersE. Character rearrangement

Correct Answer: ASection: GlobalizationExplanation

QUESTION 52Identify the two direct sources from where SQL plans can be loaded into the SQL plan baselines. (Choose two.)

A. Cursor cacheB. Stored outlineC. SQL Tuning SetD. Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) snapshots


Explanation/Reference:The AWR snapshots needs to be loaded to STS at first, then load to SQL plan.

--------------------------------------------------------------- (Link)You can perform manual plan loading by:

Loading Plans from SQL Tuning Sets and AWR Snapshots

To load plans from a SQL tuning set, use the LOAD_PLANS_FROM_SQLSET function of the DBMS_SPMpackage. The following example loads the plans stored in the SQL tuning set named tset1:DECLARE my_plans PLS_INTEGER;

BEGIN my_plans := DBMS_SPM.LOAD_PLANS_FROM_SQLSET( sqls et_name => 'tset1');END;/To load plans from Automatic Workload Repository (AWR), load the plans stored in AWR snapshots into a SQLtuning set before using the LOAD_PLANS_FROM_SQLSET function as described in this section.

Loading Plans from the Shared SQL Area

To load plans from the shared SQL area, use the LOAD_PLANS_FROM_CURSOR_CACHE function of theDBMS_SPM package. In the following example, Oracle Database loads the plans located in the shared SQL areafor the SQL statement identified by its sql_id:DECLARE my_plans PLS_INTEGER;BEGIN my_plans := DBMS_SPM.LOAD_PLANS_FROM_CURSOR_CACHE( sql_id => '99twu5t2dn5xd');END;/

QUESTION 53Which two statements about workload capture and replay operations are true? (Choose two.)

A. The clients must be created manually on the test machines to perform more realistic testing.B. Restart the database in RESTRICTED mode before beginning workload replay to enable a clean state for

workload replay.C. Restart the database in RESTRICTED mode before beginning workload capture to enable a clean state for

capturing the workload.D. The application state of the capture system must be identical to the application state of the replay system

when the workload replay begins.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

QUESTION 54View the Exhibit1 to examine the series of SQL commands. View the Exhibit2 to examine the plans available inthe SQL plan baseline. The baseline in the first row of the Exhibit is created when OPTIMIZER_MODE was setto FIRST_ROWS. Which statement is true if the SQL query in exhibit1 is executed again when the value ofOPTIMIZER_MODE is set to FIRST_ROWS?

dba-sql-plan-baseline (exhibit):

parameter-optimizer (exhibit):

A. The optimizer uses a new plan because none of the plans in the exhibit2 are fixed plans.B. The optimizer uses the plan in the second row of the exhibit2 because it is an accepted plan.C. The optimizer uses the plan in the first row of the exhibit2 because it is the latest generated plan.D. The optimizer uses the plan in the first row of the exhibit2 because OPTIMIZER_MODE was set to

FIRST_ROW during its creation.


Explanation/Reference:Setting the OPTIMIZER_MODE Initialization Parameter(Link)

The OPTIMIZER_MODE initialization parameter establishes the default behavior for choosing an optimizationapproach for the instance.

OPTIMIZER_MODE Initialization Parameter ValuesALL_ROWS, The optimizer uses a cost-based approach for all SQL statements in the session regardless ofthe presence of statistics and optimizes with a goal of best throughput (minimum resource use to completethe entire statement). This is the default value.FIRST_ROWS_n, The optimizer uses a cost-based approach, regardless of the presence of statistics, andoptimizes with a goal of best response time to return the first n number of rows, where n equals 1, 10, 100,or 1000.FIRST_ROWS, The optimizer uses a mix of cost and heuristics to find a best plan for fast delivery of the firstfew rows.

Note that using heuristics sometimes leads the optimizer to generate a plan with a cost that is significantlylarger than the cost of a plan without applying the heuristic. FIRST_ROWS is available for backward compatibilityand plan stability; use FIRST_ROWS_n instead.

QUESTION 55Which statement is true about a running session that belongs to the online transaction processing (OLTP)group?

BEGIN

DBMS_RESOURCE_MANAGER.CREATE_PLAN_DIRECTIVE ( PLAN => 'PRIUSERS', GROUP_OR_SUBPLAN => 'OLTP', COMMENT => 'OLTP GROUP', MGMG_P1 => 75, SWITCH_GROUP => 'LOW_GROUP', SWITCH_IO-REQS => 10000, SWITCH_IO_MEGABYTES => 2500, SWITCH_FOR_CALL => TRUE);END;/

A. It permanently switches to the low_group consumer group if the session exceeds 10,000 I/O requests or2,500 MB of data transfer.

B. It performs the first 10000 I/O requests or 2,500 MB of data transfer in the LOW-GROUP consumer group,and then switches to the original group.

C. It switches to the LOW_GROUP consumer group if the session exceeds 10000 I/O requests or 2500 MB ofdata transfer and returns to the original group after the operation.

D. It switches to the LOW_GROUP consumer group if the session exceeds 10000 I/O requests or 2500 MB ofdata transfer for queries, but not for data manipulation language (DML) operations.



Example 2The following PL/SQL block creates a resource plan directive for the OLTP group that temporarily switches anysession in that group to the LOW_GROUP consumer group if the session exceeds 10,000 I/O requests orexceeds 2,500 Megabytes of data transferred. The session is returned to its original group after theoffending top call is complete.

BEGIN DBMS_RESOURCE_MANAGER.CREATE_PLAN_DIRECTIVE ( PLAN => 'DAYTIME', GROUP_OR_SUBPLAN => 'OLTP', COMMENT => 'OLTP group', MGMT_P1 => 75, SWITCH_GROUP => 'LOW_GROUP', SWITCH_IO_REQS => 10000, SWITCH_IO_MEGABYTES => 2500, SWITCH_FOR_CALL => TRUE);END;/

QUESTION 56USER_DATA is a nonencrypted tablespace that contains a set of tables with data. You want to convert allexisting data in the USER_DATA tablespace and the new data into the encrypted format. Which methods wouldyou use to achieve this? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Use Data Pump to transfer the existing data to a new encrypted tablespace.B. Use ALTER TABLE MOVE to transfer the existing data to a new encrypted tablespace.

C. Use CREATE TABLE AS SELECT to transfer the existing data to a new encrypted tablespace.

D. Enable row movement for each table to be encrypted and then use ALTER TABLESPACE to encrypt thetablespace.

E. Encrypt the USER_DATA tablespace using the ALTER TABLESPACE statement so that all the data in the

tablespace is automatically encrypted.

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 57Evaluate the following block of code:BEGIN DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN.CREATE_ACL ( acl =>'mycompany-com-permissions.xml', principal => 'ACCT_MGR', is_grant => TRUE, privilege => 'connect'); DBMS_NETWORK_ACL_ADMIN.ASSIGN_ACL ( acl => 'mycompany-com-permissions.xml', host => '*.mycompany.com');END;

What is the outcome of the above code?

A. It produces an error because a fully qualified host name needs to be specified.B. It produces an error because the range of ports associated with the hosts has not been specified.C. It creates an access control list (ACL) with the user ACCT_MGR who gets the CONNECT and RESOLVE

privileges.D. It creates an access control list (ACL) with the user ACCT_MGR who gets the CONNECT privilege but not

the RESOLVE privilege.



QUESTION 58Which steps are mandatory to enable Direct NFS?1. Mount all required file systems using the kernel NFS driver.2. Create an oranfstab file containing the attributes for each NFS server to be accessed using Direct NFS.3. Replace the ODM library libodm11.so_stub with libodm11.so.

A. 2 and 3B. 1 and 3C. 1 and 2D. 1, 2 and 3


QUESTION 59You want to back up your 100-GB database on a remote tape device. You are required to ensure that minimumnetwork bandwidth is consumed while transferring the backups to the tape device. The current consumption of

your CPU is approximately 40 percent.Which type of backup should you perform?

A. standard backup setB. image copyC. compressed backupD. user-managed backup


QUESTION 60You execute the following Recovery Manager (RMAN) commands in the following order:BACKUP VALIDATE DATABASE;RECOVER CORRUPTION LIST;

Which (two tasks are performed by these commands? (Choose two.)

A. Repair the corrupted blocks. If any. In the backup created.B. Populate V$COPY_CORRUPTION with names of files that have corrupted blocks.

C. Back up the database after checking whether array of the files have corrupted blocks.D. Discover any corrupt blocks that are viewable with the V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view.

E. Repair all corrupted blocks that have been logged in the V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION

Correct Answer: DESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answer was BC, the correct is DE.

V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION displays information about database blocks that were corrupted after thelast backup.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------BACKUP...VALIDATEScans the specified files and verifies their contents, testing whether this file can be backed up and whether thedata blocks are corrupt. RMAN creates no output files. This option is equivalent to using the VALIDATE command on the database files specified in the backup. If you do not specify CHECK LOGICAL, then BACKUP..VALIDATE checks for physical corruption only. If youspecify CHECK LOGICAL, then BACKUP VALIDATE checks for both physical and logical corruption. RMAN populates the V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION view with any corruptions that it finds.You can use the SET MAXCORRUPT command to set a limit for the number of corrupt blocks tolerated duringthe backup validation. The default is zero.If you execute BACKUP INCREMENTAL with VALIDATE, then the behavior depends on whether block changetracking is enabled. If change tracking is enabled, then RMAN validates only changed blocks; otherwise, RMANvalidates all blocks in the files included in the backup.Note: You cannot validate backups of backup sets.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following prerequisites apply to RECOVER BLOCK: (link)

The target database must run in ARCHIVELOG mode and be open or mounted with a current control file.RMAN can only recover blocks marked media corrupt. The V$DATABASE_BLOCK_CORRUPTION viewindicates which blocks in a file were marked corrupt since the most recent BACKUP or BACKUP ...

VALIDATE command was run against the file.The backups of the data files containing the corrupt blocks must be full backups and not proxy backups. Ifonly proxy backups exist, then you can restore them to a nondefault location on disk, in which case RMANconsiders them data file copies. You can then use the data file copies for block media recovery.RMAN can use only archived redo log files for recovery. Block media recovery cannot survive a missing orinaccessible log, although it can sometimes survive missing or inaccessible records (see Oracle DatabaseBackup and Recovery User's Guide).For RMAN to be able to search the flashback logs for good copies of corrupt blocks, Flashback Databasemust be enabled on the target database.For RMAN to be able to search a standby database for good copies of corrupt blocks, the target databasemust be associated with a physical standby database in a Data Guard environment. In addition, the physicalstandby database must be open read-only in managed recovery.

QUESTION 61When executing a SQL workload, you choose to generate execution plans only, without collecting executionstatistics.Which two statements describe the implications of this? (Choose two.)

A. It produces less accurate results of the comparison analysis.B. It automatically calls the SQL Tuning Advisor for recommendations.C. It shortens the time of execution and reduces the impact on system resources.D. Only the changes in the execution plan, and not performance regression, are detected.


QUESTION 62You are managing an Oracle Database 11g database with the ASM storage. The database is having big filetablespaces. You want files to open faster and less memory to be used in the shared pool to manage the extentmaps.

What configuration would you effect to achieve your objective? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Set the ASM compatibility attribute for the ASM disk group to 11.1.0.B. Set the RDBMS compatibility attribute for the ASM disk group to 11.1.0.C. Set the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter for the ASM instance to 11.1.0.

D. Set the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter for the database instance to 11.1.0.



QUESTION 63View the Exhibit.Examine the following command that is executed for the TRANSPORT table in the SH schema:SQL> SELECT DBMS_STATS.CREATE_EXTENDED_STATS('sh', 'customers_obe', '(country_id,cust_state_province)') FROM dual;

Which statement describes the significance of this command?

Exhibit:

A. It collects statistics into the pending area in the data dictionary.B. It creates a virtual hidden column in the CUSTOMERS_OBE table.

C. It collects statistics with AUTO_SAMPLE_SIZE for ESTIMATE_PERCENT.

D. It creates a histogram to hold skewed information about the data in the columns.


Explanation/Reference:DBMS_STATS.CREATE_EXTENDED_STATS FunctionCreates a virtual column for a user specified column group or an expression in a table

This function creates a column statistics entry in the system for a user specified column group or an expressionin a table. Statistics for this extension will be gathered when user or auto statistics gathering job gathersstatistics for the table. We call statistics for such an extension, "extended statistics". This function returns thename of this newly created entry for the extension.

QUESTION 64Examine the exhibit to view the parameters set in your parameter file. You restart the instance.To what value will the MEMORY_MAX_TARGET parameter be set by default?

Exhibit:

A. 120MB. 320MC. 440MD. 600M



QUESTION 65You installed Oracle Database 11g and are performing a manual upgrade of the Oracle9i database. As a partof the upgrade process, you execute the following script:SQL> @utlu111i.sql

Which statement about the execution of this script is true?

A. It must be executed from the Oracle Database 11g environment.B. It must be executed only after the SYSAUX tablespace has been created.

C. It must be executed from the environment of the database that is being upgraded.D. It must be executed only after AUTOEXTEND is set to ON for all existing tablespaces.

E. It must be executed from both the Oracle Database 11g and Oracle Database 9i environments.


Explanation/Reference:Script Name: utlu111i.SQLUsed to: Pre-Upgrade InformationAnalyzes the database to be upgraded, detailing requirements and issues for the upgrade to Oracle Database11g Release 1 (11.1)

QUESTION 66Which three statements about performance analysis by SQL Performance Analyzer are true? (Choose three.)

A. It detects changes in SQL execution plans.B. It produces results that can be used to create the SQL plan baseline.C. The importance of SQL statements is based on the size of the objects accessed.D. It generates recommendations to run SQL Tuning Advisor to tune regressed SQLs.E. It shows only the overall impact on workload and not the net SQL impact on workload.

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Introduction to SQL Performance Analyzer(link)

SQL Performance Analyzer compares the performance of SQL statements before and after the change andproduces a report identifying any changes in execution plans or performance of the SQL statements.

Fixing Regressed SQL StatementsIf the performance analysis performed by SQL Performance Analyzer reveals regressed SQL statements, thenyou can make changes to remedy the problem. For example, you can fix regressed SQL by running SQLTuning Advisor or using SQL plan baselines. You can then repeat the process of executing the SQL statementsand comparing its performance to the first execution. Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with theoutcome of the analysis

QUESTION 67Which statement about Automatic Memory Management with Oracle 11g is true?

A. You cannot specify MEMORY_TARGET if you explicitly specify SGA_TARGET or PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGETvalues that are greater than zero in your parameter file.

B. Oracle can reallocate memory between the SGA and PGA automatically as needed.C. To use Automatic Memory Management, you must explicitly set both the MEMORY_TARGET and

MEMORY_MAX_TARGET parameters in your parameter file.

D. You can set the MEMORY_TARGET parameter to a maximum value of the current SGA size plus the currentPGA size.



QUESTION 68Which statement is true regarding the VALIDATE DATABASE command?

A. It checks the database for intrablock corruptions only.B. It checks for block corruption in the valid backups of the database.C. It checks the database for both intrablock and interblock corruptions.D. It checks for only those corrupted blocks that are associated with data files.


Explanation/Reference:interblock corruptionA type of block corruption in which the corruption occurs between blocks rather than within the block itself. Thistype of corruption can only be logical corruption.

intrablock corruptionA type of block corruption in which the corruption occurs within the block itself. this type of corruption can beeither a physical corruption or logical corruption.

QUESTION 69Which two statements are true regarding an Automatic Storage Management (ASM) instance? (Choose two.)

A. An ASM instance mounts an ASM control file

B. An ASM instance uses the ASMB process for rebalancing of disks within a disk groupC. Automatic Memory Management is enabled in an ASM instance even when the MEMORY_TARGET

parameter is not set explicitlyD. An RDBMS instance gets connected to an ASM instance using ASMB as a foreground process when the

database instance is started

Correct Answer: CDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 70You are managing the APPPROD database as a DBA. You plan to duplicate this database in the same systemwith the name DUPDB. You issued the following RMAN commands to create a duplicate database:RMAN> CONNECT target sys/sys@APPPRODRMAN> DUPLICATE TARGET DATABASE TO dupdb FROM ACTIVE DATABASE DB_FILE_NAME_CONVERT '/oracle/oradata/prod/', '/scratch/oracle/oradata/dupdb/' SPILE PARAMETER_VALUE_CONVERT '/oracle/oradata/prod /', '/scratch/oracle/oradata/dupdb/'

SET SGA_MAX_SIZE = '300M' SET SGA_TARGET = '250M' SET LOG_FILE_NAME_CONVERT '/oracle/oradata/prod/red o/', '/scratch/oracle/oradata/dupdb/redo/';

Which three are the prerequisites for the successful execution of the above command? (Choose three.)

A. The source database should be open.B. The target database should be in ARCHIVELOG mode if it is open.

C. RMAN should be connected to both the instances as SYSDBA.D. The target database backups should be copied to the source database backup directories.E. The password file must exist for the source database and have the same SYS user password as the target.

Correct Answer: BCESection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 71The database Is configured in ARCHIVELOG mode. The database needs to be up 24 X 7. You want to performuser managed backup for the data files of the HR_DATA tablespace. To accomplish the task, you issued thefollowing command:SQL> ALTER TABLESPACE hr_data BEGIN BACKUP;

Which two statements are true in this scenario? (Choose two.)

A. No transaction on the tablespace is allowed but you can perform queries.B. The tablespace will automatically come out of backup mode when the file copy is complete.C. The checkpoint change number is frozen in headers of the data files until the file is removed from backup

mode.D. The database writes the before image of an entire block to the redo stream before modifying. block tor the

first time.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Making User-Managed Backups of Online Read/Write Tablespaces

You must put a read/write tablespace in backup mode to make user-managed data file backups when thetablespace is online and the database is open. The ALTER TABLESPACE ... BEGIN BACKUP statementplaces a tablespace in backup mode. In backup mode, the database copies whole changed data blocksinto the redo stream. After you take the tablespace out of backup mode with the ALTER TABLESPACE ...END BACKUP or ALTER DATABASE END BACKUP statement, the database advances the data file checkpointSCN to the current database checkpoint SCN.

When restoring a data file backed up in this way, the database asks for the appropriate set of redo log files toapply if recovery is needed. The redo logs contain all changes required to recover the data files and make themconsistent.

QUESTION 72Which statement is true regarding the retention policy for the incidents accumulated in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository (ADR)?

A. The incident metadata is purged when the problem is resolved and the DBA closes the SR.B. The incident files and dumps are not retained in the ADR for the manually created incidents.C. The incident files are retained but the incident metadata is purged when the problem is resolved and the

DBA closes the SRD. The default setting is for one year after which the incident metadata is purged from the ADR and the files

are retained for one month.



QUESTION 73You opened the encryption wallet and then issued the following command:SQL>CREATE TABLESPACE securespaceDATAFILE '/home/user/oradata/secure01.dbf'SIZE 150MENCRYPTION USING '3DES168'DEFAULT STORAGE(ENCRYPT);

Then you closed the wallet. Later, you issued the following command to create the EMPLOYEES table in theSECURESPACE tablespace and you use the NO SALT option for the EMPID column.What is the outcome?

A. It creates the table and encrypts the data in it.B. It generates an error because the wallet is closed.C. It creates the table but does not encrypt the data in it.D. It generates an error because the NO SALT option cannot be used with the ENCRYPT option.



QUESTION 74A database is running In ARCHIVELOG mode. It has two online redo log groups and each group has onemember.A LGWR Input/output (I/O) fells due to permanent media failure that has resulted In the loss of redo log file andthe LWGR terminates causing the instance to crash. The steps to recover from the loss of a current redo loggroup member in the random order are as follow.1) Restore the corrupted redo log group.2) Restore from a whole database backup.3) Perform incomplete recovery.

4) Relocate by renaming the member of the damaged online redo log group to a new location.5) Open the database with the RESETLOGS option.6) Restart the database instance.7) Issue a checkpoint and clear the log.

Identify the option with the correct sequential steps to accomplish the task efficiently.

A. 1, 3, 4, and 5B. 7, 3, 4. and 5C. 2, 3, 4, and 5D. 7, 4, 3. and 5E. Only 6 is required


Explanation/Reference:Recovering After Losing All Members of an Online Re do Log Group

If a media failure damages all members of an online redo log group, then different scenarios can occurdepending on the type of online redo log group affected by the failure and the archiving mode of the database.

If the damaged online redo log group is current and active, then it is needed for crash recovery;otherwise, it is not. Table 30-4 outlines the various recovery scenarios.

QUESTION 75Identity two advantages of using a recovery catalog in-load of the control File of the target database RecoveryManager (RMAN). (Choose two.)

A. You can use RMAN stored scripts.B. Recovery is faster if data is stored in catalog in addition to the control file.C. You can store backup Information of all registered databases in one place.D. Database backups are automatically deleted when they are older than the specified time period.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

QUESTION 76You configured the default backup device type as disk for RMAN backups. In your database, because ofbusiness requirements, you have to take a simultaneous duplicate backup of the data files when the RMAN BACKUP command is used.What must you set using the RMAN CONFIGURE command to achieve this?

A. MAXSETSIZE TO 2;

B. DEVICE TYPE DISK PARALLELISM 2;

C. RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 2;

D. DATAFILE BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO 2;


Explanation/Reference:Duplexing Backup Sets with CONFIGURE BACKUP COPIES (Link)

QUESTION 77Your production database is functional on the SHOST1 host. You are backing up the production database byusing Recovery Manager (RMAN) with the recovery catalog. You want to replicate the production database toanther host, SHOST2, for testing new applications.After you ensured that the backups of the target database are accessible on the new host, what must you do torestore and recover the backup for the test environment?

A. Restoring the control file from the backup by using the NOCATALOG option to restore, and recovering thedata files

B. Restoring the data files by using the NOCATALOG option and using the SET NEWNAME command to changethe location

C. Restoring the server parameter file from the backup by using the recovery catalog to restore, D. Restoring the data files from the backup by using the recovery catalog to recover the files, and using the

SWITCH command to change the location.


Explanation/Reference:Refer to here:To restore the database on a new host:

1. Ensure that the backups of the target database are accessible on the new host.2. Configure the ORACLE_SID on hostb.3. Start RMAN on hostb and connect to the target database without connecting to the recovery catalog.

For example, enter the following command:% rman NOCATALOGRMAN> CONNECT TARGET/

4. Set the DBID and start the database instance without mounting the database.For example, run SET DBID to set the DBID, then run STARTUP NOMOUNT:SET DBID 1340752057;STARTUP NOMOUNT

RMAN fails to find the server parameter file, which has not yet been restored, but starts the instance with a"dummy" file. Sample output follows:startup failed: ORA-01078: failure in processing sy stem parametersLRM-00109: could not open parameter file '/net/host b/oracle/dbs/inittrgta.ora'

trying to start the Oracle instance without paramet er files ...Oracle instance started

5. Restore and edit the server parameter file.Allocate a channel to the media manager, then restore the server parameter file as a client-side parameterfile and use the SET command to indicate the location of the autobackup (in this example, the autobackupis in /tmp):

RUN{ ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt PARMS '...'; SET CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP FORMAT FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO '/tmp/%F'; RESTORE SPFILE TO PFILE '?/oradata/test/inittrgta.ora' FROM AUTOBACKUP; SHUTDOWN ABORT;}

6. Edit the restored initialization parameter file.Change any location-specific parameters, for example, those ending in _DEST, to reflect the new directorystructure. For example, edit the following parameters: - IFILE - LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 - CONTROL_FILES

7. Restart the instance with the edited initialization parameter file.For example, enter the following command:STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT PFILE='?/oradata/test/inittrg ta.ora';

8. Restore the control file from an autobackup and then mount the database.For example, enter the following command:RUN { ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt PARMS '...'; RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP; ALTER DATABASE MOUNT;}RMAN restores the control file to whatever locations you specified in the CONTROL_FILES initializationparameter.

9. Catalog the data file copies that you copied in "Restoring Disk Backups to a New Host", using their new filenames or CATALOG START WITH (if you know all the files are in directories with a common prefix easilyaddressed with a CATALOG START WITH command). For example, run:

CATALOG START WITH '/oracle/oradata/trgt/';If you want to specify files individually, then you can execute a CATALOG command as follows:CATALOG DATAFILECOPY '/oracle/oradata/trgt/system01.dbf', '/oracle/ora data/trgt/undotbs01.dbf', '/oracle/oradata/trgt/cwmlite01.dbf', '/oracle/or adata/trgt/drsys01.dbf', '/oracle/oradata/trgt/example01.dbf', '/oracle/or adata/trgt/indx01.dbf', '/oracle/oradata/trgt/tools01.dbf', '/oracle/orad ata/trgt/users01.dbf';

10. Start a SQL*Plus session on the new database and query the database file names recorded in the controlfile.

Because the control file is from the trgta database, the recorded file names use the original hosta filenames. You can query V$ views to obtain this information. Run the following query in SQL*Plus:COLUMN NAME FORMAT a60SPOOL LOG '/tmp/db_filenames.out'SELECT FILE# AS "File/Grp#", NAME FROM V$DATAFILEUNIONSELECT GROUP#,MEMBER FROM V$LOGFILE;SPOOL OFF

EXIT11. Write the RMAN restore and recovery script. The script must include the following steps:

a. For each data file on the destination host that is restored to a different path than it had on the source host,use a SET NEWNAME command to specify the new path on the destination host. If the file systems on thedestination system are set up to have the same paths as the source host, then do not use SETNEWNAME for those files restored to the same path as on the source host.b. For each online redo log that is to be created at a different location than it had on the source host, use SQL ALTER DATABASE RENAME FILE commands to specify the path name on the destination host. If thefile systems on the destination system are set up to have the same paths as the source host, then do notuse ALTER DATABASE RENAME FILE for those files restored to the same path as on the source host.c. Perform a SET UNTIL operation to limit recovery to the end of the archived redo logs. The recoverystops with an error if no SET UNTIL command is specified.d. Restore and recover the database.e. Run the SWITCH DATAFILE ALL command so that the control file recognizes the new path names asthe official new names of the data files.

Example 20-3 shows the RMAN script reco_test.rman that can perform the restore and recovery operation.Example 20-3 Restoring a Database on a New Host:RUN{ # allocate a channel to the tape device ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt PARMS '...';

# rename the data files and online redo logs SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 1 TO '?/oradata/test/sys tem01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 2 TO '?/oradata/test/und otbs01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 3 TO '?/oradata/test/cwm lite01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 4 TO '?/oradata/test/drs ys01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 5 TO '?/oradata/test/exa mple01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 6 TO '?/oradata/test/ind x01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 7 TO '?/oradata/test/too ls01.dbf'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 8 TO '?/oradata/test/use rs01.dbf'; SQL "ALTER DATABASE RENAME FILE ''/dev3/oracle/db s/redo01.log'' TO ''?/oradata/test/redo01.log'' "; SQL "ALTER DATABASE RENAME FILE ''/dev3/oracle/db s/redo02.log'' TO ''?/oradata/test/redo02.log'' ";

# Do a SET UNTIL to prevent recovery of the onlin e logs SET UNTIL SCN 123456; # restore the database and switch the data file n ames RESTORE DATABASE; SWITCH DATAFILE ALL;

# recover the database RECOVER DATABASE;}EXIT

12. Execute the script created in the previous step.For example, start RMAN to connect to the target database and run the @ command:% rman TARGET / NOCATALOGRMAN> @reco_test.rman

13. Open the restored database with the RESETLOGS option.From the RMAN prompt, open the database with the RESETLOGS option:ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

Caution:When you re-open your database in the next step, do not connect to the recovery catalog. Otherwise, thenew database incarnation created is registered automatically in the recovery catalog, and the file namesof the production database are replaced by the new file names specified in the script.

14. Optionally, delete the test database with all of its files.Note:If you used an ASM disk group, then the DROP DATABASE command is the only way to safely remove the

files of the test database. If you restored to non-ASM storage then you can also use operating systemcommands to remove the database.Use the DROP DATABASE command to delete all files associated with the database automatically. Thefollowing example deletes the database files:STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT PFILE='?/oradata/test/inittrg ta.ora';DROP DATABASE;

Because you did not perform the restore and recovery operation when connected to the recovery catalog,the recovery catalog contains no records for any of the restored files or the procedures performed during thetest. Likewise, the control file of the trgta database is completely unaffected by the test.

QUESTION 78Your database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode. You have been taking backups of all the data files and controlfiles regularly.You are informed that some important tables in the BILLING tablespace have been dropped on February 28,2007 at 10.30 AM and must be recovered.You decide to perform an incomplete recovery using the following command:

SQL> RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME '2007-02-28:10:15: 00';

Identify the files that must be restored to recover the missing tables successfully.

A. Restore the backup of all the data files.B. Restore the backup of all the data files and the control file.C. Restore the backup of only the data files that contain the dropped tables.D. Restore the backup of all the data files belonging to the tablespace containing the dropped tables.


Explanation/Reference:The tricky of answer is the command "RECOVER DATABASE", so that you must use "RESTORE DATABASE"to restore all the data files.

If the recover command is "RECOVER DATAFILE", then the Answer D will be correct.

QUESTION 79In your test database:

You are using Recovery Manager (RMAN) to perform incremental backups of your test databaseThe test database is running in NOARCHIVELOG modeOne of the data files is corruptedAll online redo log files are lost because of a media failure

Which option must you consider in this scenario?

A. Configuring the database in ARCHVIELOG mode and then using incremental backup to recover thedatabase

B. Using incremental backup to recover the damaged data file and then manually creating the online redo logfiles

C. Creating a new test database because the database is not recoverable due to the fact that the database isconfigured in NOARCHIVELOG mode

D. Using incremental backups to recover the database by using the RECOVER DATABASE NOREDO commandand then using the RESETLOGS option to open the database.


Explanation/Reference:Example 3-6 Recovering a NOARCHIVELOG Database

You can perform limited recovery of changes to a database running in NOARCHIVELOG mode by applyingincremental backups. The incremental backups must be consistent, like all backups of a database run inNOARCHIVELOG mode, so you cannot back up the database when it is open.

Assume that you run database prod in NOARCHIVELOG mode with a recovery catalog. You shut down thedatabase consistently and make a level 0 backup of database prod to tape on Sunday afternoon. You shutdown the database consistently and make a level 1 differential incremental backup to tape at 3:00 a.m. onWednesday and Friday.

On Saturday, a media failure destroys half the data files and the online redo logs. Because the online logs arelost, you must specify the NOREDO option in the RECOVER command. Otherwise, RMAN searches for theredo logs after applying the Friday incremental backup and issues an error message when it does not findthem.

After connecting RMAN to prod and the catalog database, recover as follows:

STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT;RESTORE CONTROLFILE; # restore control file fr om consistent backupALTER DATABASE MOUNT;RESTORE DATABASE; # restore data files from consistent backupRECOVER DATABASE NOREDO; # specify NOREDO because online redo logs are lo stALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

The recovered database reflects only changes up through the time of the Friday incremental backup. Becausethere are no archived redo log files, there is no way to recover changes made after the incremental backup.

QUESTION 80You execute the following FLASHBACK TABLE command:

SQL> FLASHBACK TABLE emp TO TIMESTAMP TO_TIMESTAMP('2008-01-04 11:00:00','YYYY-MM-DD HH24:MI:SS');

Which two statements are correct?(Choose two.)

A. The emp table that was dropped by mistake earlier is restored.

B. The FLASHBACK TABLE statement is executed as a single transaction.

C. The FLASHBACK TABLE statement does not maintain existing indexes on the emp table.

D. The changes made to the emp table since the specified time are undone if no constraint is violated duringflashback.


Explanation/Reference:FLASHBACK TABLE ( Link )Purpose

Use the FLASHBACK TABLE statement to restore an earlier state of a table in the event of human or applicationerror. The time in the past to which the table can be flashed back is dependent on the amount of undo data inthe system. Also, Oracle Database cannot restore a table to an earlier state across any DDL operations thatchange the structure of the table.

Semantics

During an Oracle Flashback Table operation, Oracle Database acquires exclusive DML locks on all the tablesspecified in the Flashback list. These locks prevent any operations on the tables while they are reverting to theirearlier state.

The Flashback Table operation is executed in a sing le transaction, regardless of the number of tablesspecified in the Flashback list . Either all of the tables revert to the earlier state or none of them do. If theFlashback Table operation fails on any table, then the entire statement fails.

At the completion of the Flashback Table operation, the data in table is consistent with table at the earlier time.However, FLASHBACK TABLE TO SCN or TIMESTAMP does not preserve rowids, and FLASHBACK TABLETO BEFORE DROP does not recover referential constraints.

Oracle Database does not revert statistics associated with table to their earlier form. Indexes on table that existcurrently are reverted and reflect the state of the table at the Flashback point. If the index exists now but did notyet exist at the Flashback point, then the database updates the index to reflect the state of the table at theFlashback point. However, indexes that were dropped during the interval between the Flashback point and thecurrent time are not restored.

Logical Flashback Features Useful in Backup and Rec overy ( Link )

The remaining flashback features operate at the logical level. The logical features documented in this chapterare as follows:

Flashback Table

You can recover a table or set of tables to a speci fied point in time in the past without taking any p art ofthe database offline . In many cases, Flashback Table eliminates the need to perform more complicated point-in-time recovery operations. Flashback Table restores tables while automatically maintaining associatedattributes such as current indexes, triggers and co nstraints, and not requiring you to find and restoreapplication-specific properties.

"Rewinding a Table with Flashback Table" explains how to use this feature.

Flashback Drop

You can reverse the effects of a DROP TABLE statement.

"Rewinding a DROP TABLE Operation with Flashback Drop" explains how to use this feature.

Note:Because the logical flashback features have uses not specific to backup and recovery, some documentation forthem is located elsewhere in the documentation set.All logical flashback features except Flashback Drop rely on undo data. Used primarily for providing readconsistency for SQL queries and rolling back transactions, undo records contain the information required toreconstruct data as it existed at a past time and e xamine the record of changes since that past time.

QUESTION 81Users are connected to a database instance that is using Automatic Storage Management (ASM). The DBAexecutes the command as follows to shut down the ASM instance:SQL> SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE;

What happens to the database instance?

A. It shuts down long with the ASM instance.

B. It is aborted and the ASM instance shuts down normally.C. It stays open and SHUTDOWN command for the ASM instance fails.

D. It shuts down only after all pending transactions are completed and the ASM instance waits for this beforeshutting down.


Explanation/Reference:IMMEDIATE or TRANSACTIONAL Clause (link)

Oracle ASM waits for any in-progress SQL to complete before performing an orderly dismount of all of the diskgroups and shutting down the Oracle ASM instance. Oracle ASM does not wait for users currently connected tothe instance to disconnect. If any database instances are connected to the Orac le ASM instance, then theSHUTDOWN command returns an error and leaves the Oracle ASM instance running . Because the OracleASM instance does not contain any transactions, the TRANSACTIONAL mode behaves the same asIMMEDIATE mode.

QUESTION 82Which two statements are true about the compressed backups in RMAN? (Choose two.)

A. Compressed backups can only be taken on the tape drives.B. The binary compression creates some performance overhead during backup operation.C. The ZLIB compression algorithm can be used only if the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter is set to

11.1.0.D. The media manager compression for the tape drive should be enabled for taking compressed backups on

the tape.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 83View the Exhibit and examine the RMAN commands.

Which statement describes the effect of a backup retention policy on the backup of a backup set?

A. Either all the copies of a backup set are obsolete or none of them are as per the retention policy.B. The copies of the backup will be reported as obsolete under a redundancy-based backup retention policy.C. The copies of the backup will be reported as obsolete under a recovery window-based backup retention

policy.D. All the copies of the backup set are counted as one instance of a backup and will deleted in backup set

exceeds the redundancy-based backup retention policy.

Correct Answer: ASection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 84The database users regularly complain about the difficulty in performing transactions. On investigation, you findthat some users perform long-running transactions that consume huge amounts of space in the undotablespace, which caused the problem. You want to control the usage of the undo tablespace only for theseuser sessions and you do not want these sessions to perform long-running operations.How would you achieve this?

A. Implement a profile for the users.B. Implement external roles for the users.C. Set the threshold for the undo tablespace.D. Implement a Database Resource Manager plan.


QUESTION 85You work in a data warehouse environment that involves the execution of complex queries. The current contentof the SQL cache contains the ideal workload for analysis. You want to analyze only a few most resource-intensive statements.What must you do to receive recommendations on efficient use of indexes and materialized views to improvequery performance?

A. Run the SQL Access Advisor.B. Run the SQ; Tuning Advisor (STA).C. Run the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) report.D. Run the Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM).


Explanation/Reference:In addition, SQL Access Advisor can recommend partitioning on an existing unpartitioned base table to improveperformance. Furthermore, it may recommend new indexes and materialized views that are themselvespartitioned. While creating new partitioned indexes and materialized view is no different from the unpartitionedcase, partitioning existing base tables should be executed with care. This is especially true when indexes,views, constraints, or triggers are defined on the table. See "Special Considerations when Script IncludesPartitioning Recommendations" for a list of issues involving base table partitioning for performing this taskonline.

Refer to here.

QUESTION 86Your company wants to upgrade the production database to a Real Application Clusters (RAC) environment.You set up the best RAC database and want to replay a recorded workload captured from the productiondatabase on the test machine.The following steps may be used to replay the database workload:

1) Preprocess the captured workload2) Restart the database in RESTRICTED mode.3) Set up Replay Clients.4) Restore the test database to the point when the capture started.5) Remap connections.

Which is the correct sequence of the required steps?

A. 1, 4, 3, 5B. 1, 4, 5, 3C. 2, 1, 5, 3, 4D. 1, 2, 4, 5, 3


Explanation/Reference:11.1 Steps for Replaying a Database Workload

Proper planning of the workload replay and preparation of the replay system ensures that the replay will beaccurate. Before replaying a database workload, review and complete the following steps as appropriate:

Setting Up the Replay DirectoryRestoring the DatabaseResolving References to External SystemsRemapping ConnectionsUser RemappingSpecifying Replay OptionsUsing Filters with Workload ReplaySetting Up Replay Clients

QUESTION 87Which two statements are true about an image copy backup? (Choose two.)

A. It may only be taken to disk.B. It will contain only the used blocks.C. It will contain all used and unused blocks.D. It can be performed on disk as well as on tape.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 88As part of archiving the historical data, you want to transfer data from one database to another database, which

is on another server. All tablespaces in the source database are read/write and online. The source and targetdatabases use the same compatibility level and character sets. View the Exhibit and examine the features inthe source and target database.

Which of the following steps are required to transport a tablespace from the database to the target database:1. Make the tablespace read-only at the source database.2. Export metadata from the source database.3. Convert data filed by using Recovery Manager (RMAN).4. Transfer the dump file and data filed to the target machine.5. Import metadata at the target database.6. Make the tablespace read/write at the target database.

Exhibit:

A. 2, 4, and 5B. All the stepsC. 2, 3, 4 and 5D. 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6


Explanation/Reference:Refer to here. Generate a Transportable Tablespace Setread_only--expdp--4-import-read_wrtie

1, 2, 4, 5, 6 (optional)

If both platforms have the same endianness, no conversion is necessary. Otherwise you must do a

conversion of the tablespace set either at the source or destination database.Transport the dump file to the directory pointed to by the DATA_PUMP_DIR directory object, or to any otherdirectory of your choosing.Run the following query to determine the location of DATA_PUMP_DIR:

SELECT * FROM DBA_DIRECTORIES WHERE DIRECTORY_NAME = 'DATA_PUMP_DIR'; OWNER DIRECTORY_NAME DIRECTORY_PATH---------- ---------------- ----------------------- ------------SYS DATA_PUMP_DIR C:\app\orauser\admin\or awin\dpdump\

Transport the data files to the location of the existing data files of the destination database.On the UNIX and Linux platforms, this location is typically /u01/app/oracle/oradata/SID/ or +DISKGROUP/SID/datafile/.

QUESTION 89Examine the following ALTER command;SQL> ALTER DISKGROUP dgroup1 UNDROP DISKS;

What is the purpose of the command?

A. It cancels all pending disk drops within the disk group.B. It adds previously dropped disks back into the disk group.C. It restores disks that are being dropped as the result of a DROP DISKGROUP operation.D. It mounts disks in the disk group for which the drop-disk operation has already been completed.E. It restores all the dropped disks in the disk group for which the drop-disk operation has already been

completed.


Explanation/Reference:The key point is PENDING.

QUESTION 90Your database is running In ARCHIVELOG mode. One of the data files, USERDATA01.DBF, in the userstablespace is damaged and you need to recover the file until the point of failure. The backup for the data file isavailable.Which three files would be used in the user-managed recovery process performed by the databaseadministrator (DBA)? (Choose three.)

A. redo logsB. control fileC. temporary files of temporary tablespaceD. the latest backup of only the damaged data fileE. the latest backup of all the data files In the USERS tablespace

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 91Which of the following cannot be used as input to the SQL Tuning Advisor? (Choose all that apply.)

A. A single SQL statement provided by a userB. An existing SQL Tuning Set (STS)C. A preprocessed Database Replay workloadD. A schema nameE. SQL statement identified in EM as using excessive resources


QUESTION 92You executed the following command in Recovery Manager (RMAN):RMAN> REPORT NEED BACKUP days 3;

What is the output of this command?

A. a list of files that require a backup within three daysB. a list of files requiring more than 3 days of archive logs to applyC. a list of files that RMAN recommends be backed up only once in every three days, based on low volatilityD. a list of files for which a backup has already been performed in the last three days and which is required to

be backed up again based on the high number of transactions performed on them


Explanation/Reference:Using RMAN REPORT NEED BACKUP with Different Retent ion Policies (link)

You can specify different criteria for REPORT NEED BACKUP, using one of the following forms of the command:

REPORT NEED BACKUP RECOVERY WINDOW OF n DAYSDisplays objects requiring backup to satisfy a recovery window-based retention policy

REPORT NEED BACKUP REDUNDANCY nDisplays objects requiring backup to satisfy a redundancy-based retention policy

REPORT NEED BACKUP DAYS nDisplays files that require more than n days' worth of archived redo log files for recovery

REPORT NEED BACKUP INCREMENTAL nDisplays files that require application of more than n incremental backups for recovery

QUESTION 93You have configured flash recovery area in your database and you set the following Initialization parameters foryour database instance:LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST 1 = 'LOCATION=/disk1/arch MANDATOR Y'LOG _ARCHIEVE_DEST 2 = 'LOCATION=/disk2/arch'LOG_ARCHIVK_DEST_3 = 'LOCATION=/diSk3/archLOG_ARCH1VK_DEST_4 = 'LOCATION=/disk4/arch'LOG_ARCHIVE_MIN-SUCCEED_DEST = 2

While the database instance is functional, you realized that the destination set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_Iparameter Is not available for the archived redo log file to be created in. All redo log groups have been used. What happens in an event of log switch?

A. The online redo log file Is not allowed to be overwritten.B. The archived redo log files are written to the flash recovery area until the MANDATORY destination is made

available.C. The database instance will crash because the archived redo log file cannot be created in a destination set

as MANDATORY.

D. The destination set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 parameter is ignored and the archived redo log files arecreated in the next two available locations to guarantee archive log success.



QUESTION 94Which two statements correctly describe the relationship among the Scheduler components: job, program, andschedule? (Choose two)

A. A job is specified as part of a program definitionB. A program can be used in the definition of multiple jobsC. A program and job can be specified as part of a schedule definitionD. A program and schedule can be specified as part of a job definition

Correct Answer: BDSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:ProgramsA program object (program) describes what is to be run by the Scheduler. A program includes:

An action: For example, the name of a stored procedure, the name of an executable found in the operatingsystem file system (an "external executable"), or the text of a PL/SQL anonymous block.A type: STORED_PROCEDURE, PLSQL_BLOCK, or EXTERNAL, where EXTERNAL indicates an externalexecutable.Number of arguments: The number of arguments that the stored procedure or external executable accepts.

A program is a separate entity from a job. A job runs at a certain time or because a certain event occurred, andinvokes a certain program. You can create jobs that point to existing program objects, which means that different jobs can use the same program and run the program at different times and with different settings. Withthe right privileges, different users can use the same program without having to redefine it. Therefore, you cancreate program libraries, where users can select from a list of existing programs.If a stored procedure or external executable referenced by the program accepts arguments, you define thesearguments in a separate step after creating the program. You can optionally define a default value for eachargument.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Oracle Scheduler

Program objects (programs) contain metadata about the command that the Scheduler will run, including defaultvalues for any arguments. Schedule objects (schedules) contain information about run date and time andrecurrence patterns. Job objects (jobs) associate a program with a schedule. To define what is executed andwhen, you assign relationships among programs, schedules, and jobs.-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A job is the combination of a schedule and a program, along with any additional arguments required by theprogram.

QUESTION 95What RMAN command is used to execute a tablespace point-in-time recovery?

A. recoverB. duplicateC. restoreD. copyE. None of the above


QUESTION 96A user performs an update on a table. Shortly after committing the transaction, they realize that they had anerror in their WHERE clause causing the wrong rows to be updated. Which Flashback option would allow you toundo this transaction and restore the table to its previous state?

A. Flashback DropB. Flashback QueryC. Flashback Versions QueryD. Flashback Transaction QueryE. Flashback Table

Correct Answer: ESection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:FLASHBACK TABLE

Purpose

Use the FLASHBACK TABLE statement to restore an earlier state of a table in the event of human orapplication error . The time in the past to which the table can be flashed back is dependent on the amount ofundo data in the system. Also, Oracle Database cannot restore a table to an earlier state across any DDLoperations that change the structure of the table.

QUESTION 97A developer calls and reports that he accidentally dropped an important lookup table from a productiondatabase. He needs the table to be recovered. What action would you take?

A. Initiate an incomplete recovery operation using RMAN.B. Copy the table from a development database.C. Advise the user to rekey the data.D. Perform a Flashback Drop operation.E. Perform a Flashback Recovery operation.


QUESTION 98

In a Database Replay workload capture, what client request information is gathered? (Choose all that apply.)

A. SQL textB. Shared server requests (Oracle MTS)C. Bind variable valuesD. Information about transactionsE. Remote DESCRIBE and COMMIT operations


QUESTION 99Which of the following are true concerning block media recovery? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Any gap in archive logs ends the recovery.B. If a gap in archive logs is encountered, RMAN will search forward for newer versions of the blocks that are

not corrupt.C. Uncorrupted blocks from the flashback logs may be used to speed recovery.D. The database can be in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

E. None of the above.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


Basic Concepts of Block Media Recovery

Whenever block corruption has been automatically detected, you can perform block media recovery manuallywith the RECOVER ... BLOCK command. By default, RMAN first searches for good blocks in the real-timequery physical standby database, then flashback logs and then blocks in full or level 0 incrementalbackups.

Prerequisites for Block Media Recovery (link)


The target database must run in ARCHIVELOG mode and be open or mounted with a current controlfile.If the target database is a standby database, then it must be in a consistent state, recovery cannot be insession, and the backup must be older than the corrupted file.The backups of the data files containing the corrupt blocks must be full or level 0 backups and not proxycopies.If only proxy copy backups exist, then you can restore them to a nondefault location on disk, in which caseRMAN considers them data file copies and searches them for blocks during block media recovery.RMAN can use only archived redo logs for the recovery.RMAN cannot use level 1 incremental backups. Block media recovery cannot survive a missing orinaccessible archived redo log, although it can sometimes survive missing redo records.Flashback Database must be enabled on the target database for RMAN to search the flashback logs forgood copies of corrupt blocks.If flashback logging is enabled and contains older, uncorrupted versions of the corrupt blocks, then

RMAN can use these blocks, possibly speeding up the recovery.The target database must be associated with a real-time query physical standby database for RMAN tosearch the database for good copies of corrupt blocks.

Restore Failover (link)

RMAN automatically uses restore failover to skip corrupted or inaccessible backups and look for usablebackups. When a backup is not found, or contains corrupt data, RMAN automatically looks for another backupfrom which to restore the desired files.

QUESTION 100The DBA has chosen to manage SGA and PGA memory separately in an OLTP database because of hisunique knowledge of the application. Which of these are good starting points to use when configuring the maximum values for SGA and PGA, basedon the amount of memory available on the system?

A. 20% SGA, 80% PGAB. 25% SGA, 75% PGAC. 50% SGA, 50% PGAD. 75% SGA, 25% PGAE. 80% SGA, 20% PGA

Correct Answer: ESection: Managing MemoryExplanation


E05

QUESTION 1What methods of point-in-time recovery are available? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Change-basedB. Cancel-basedC. Time-basedD. Sequence number-basedE. Transaction number-based

Correct Answer: ABCDSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

QUESTION 2Which files are required for a full recovery of the database in ARCHIVELOG mode? (Choose three.)

A. Database datafilesB. Online redo logsC. Archived redo logsD. Backup control fileE. Control file from a backup

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 3What is the proper procedure to recover a lost tempfile?

A. Restore the backup copy of the tempfile from the backup media.B. Re-create the tempfile with the create tempfile command.C. Copy an existing tempfile from another database.D. Re-create the tempfile with the create tablespace command.E. Re-create the tempfile with the alter tablespace command.

Correct Answer: ESection: Space ManagementExplanation

Explanation/Reference:ALTER TABLESPACE <tablespace_name> ADD TEMPFILE <ne w file name>;ALTER TABLESPACE <tablespace_name> TEMPFILE <old_fi le_name> OFFLINE;ALTER TABLESPACE <tablespace_name> TEMPFILE <> ONLI NE;

QUESTION 4Upon starting your database, you receive the following error:SQL> startup

ORACLE instance started.Total System Global Area 171581440 bytes

Fixed Size 1298640 bytes Variable Size 146804528 bytes Database Buffers 20971520 bytes Redo Buffers 2506752 bytes Database mounted.

ORA-00313: open failed for members of log group 1 o f thread 1 ORA-00312: online log 1 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo01.log' ORA-00312: online log 1 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo01a.log'

You can choose from the following steps:a: Restore the database datafiles.b: Issue the alter database clear unarchived logfile group 1 command.c: Issue the alter database open command.d: Issue the alter database open resetlogs command.e: Recover the database using point-in-time recovery.f: Issue the Startup Mount command to mount the database.g: Back up the database.

Which is the correct order of these steps in this case?

A. a, f, e, d, gB. f, e, dC. f, b, c, gD. a, f, cE. The database cannot be recovered.


Explanation/Reference:1. one step of process must be ALTER DATABASE OPEN, since the database instance is started and mountedfrom clean shutdown.2. After redo log clear done, you must backup the database immediately, so that you have a backup you canuse for complete recovery without relying on the cleared log group.

QUESTION 5A user sends you an email with the following error message: create table idtable(id number) * ERROR at line 1: ORA-01116: error in opening database file 4ORA-01110: data file 4: '/oracle01/oradata/orcl/use rs01.dbf'ORA-27041: unable to open file Linux Error: 2: No s uch file or directoryAdditional information: 3

You can choose from the following steps:a: Restore the missing database datafiles.b: Take the missing datafile offline.c: Shut down the database.d: Issue the recover tablespace USERS command.e: Issue the Startup Mount command to mount the database.f: Bring the USERS tablespace online.g: Issue the alter database open command.


A. b, a, d, fB. c, a, e, b, d, f, g

C. c, e, d, gD. b, d, fE. e, d, g


Explanation/Reference:RMAN> repair failure;

Strategy: The repair includes complete media recovery with no data lossRepair script: /u01/app/oracle/diag/rdbms/test0924/test0924/hm/reco_172511374.hm

contents of repair script: # restore and recover datafile sql 'alter database datafile4 offline'; restore datafile 4; recover datafile 4; sql 'alter database datafile 4 online';

QUESTION 6You have lost all your database control files. To recover them, you are going to use the results of the alterdatabase backup controlfile to trace command. Your datafiles and your online redo logs are all intact.Which of the following is true regarding your recovery?

A. You will need to open the database with the resetlogs command.B. All you need to do is execute the trace file from SQL*Plus and it will perform the recovery for you.C. You will use the resetlogs version of the create controlfile command.D. You will use the noresetlogs version of the create controlfile command.E. You will use the trace file to create a backup control file, and then you will recover the database with the

recover database using backup controlfile command


Explanation/Reference:Refer to here

CREATE CONTROLFILE Using NORESETLOGS ExampleThe following CREATE CONTROLFILE statement is generated by an ALTER DATABASE BACKUPCONTROLFILE TO TRACE statement for a database with Oracle managed data files and redo log files:CREATE CONTROLFILE DATABASE sample LOGFILE GROUP 1 ('/u01/oradata/SAMPLE/onlinelog/o1_m f_1_o220rtt9_.log', '/u02/oradata/SAMPLE/onlinelog/o1_m f_1_v2o0b2i3_.log') SIZE 100M, GROUP 2 ('/u01/oradata/SAMPLE/onlinelog/o1_m f_2_p22056iw_.log', '/u02/oradata/SAMPLE/onlinelog/o1_m f_2_p02rcyg3_.log') SIZE 100M NORESETLOGS DATAFILE '/u01/oradata/SAMPLE/datafile/o1_mf_s ystem_xu34ybm2_.dbf' SIZE 100M, '/u01/oradata/SAMPLE/datafile/o1_mf_s ysaux_aawbmz51_.dbf' SIZE 100M, '/u01/oradata/SAMPLE/datafile/o1_mf_s ys_undo_apqbmz51_.dbf'

SIZE 100M MAXLOGFILES 5 MAXLOGHISTORY 100 MAXDATAFILES 10 MAXINSTANCES 2 ARCHIVELOG;

QUESTION 7Your developers have asked you to restore the development database, which is in NOARCHIVELOG mode, backto last Tuesday the 20th. Your last backup is from Monday the 19th.What do you do?

A. Restore the 19ths backup, restore all archived redo logs, recover the database to the 20th, and open thedatabase.

B. Tell them that their request cannot be met with the current backup strategy.C. Restore the 19ths backup, apply the online redo logs, and open the database.D. Switch the database into ARCHIVELOG mode, restore the 19th's backup, restore all archived redo logs,

and recover the database to the 20th.E. Use the recover database command to roll back the database from today to the 19th of the month.



QUESTION 8What methods are available to recover lost control files? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Backup control file.B. Emergency control file.C. The create controlfile command.

D. The restore controlfile SQL*Plus command.

E. No backup is required. The database will re-create the control file when it is discovered to be lost.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answer is C,D. My answer is A,C.

1. The answer D is wrong, the "RESTORE CONTROLFILE" is a command of RMAN, not SQL*Plus.

Refer to here

QUESTION 9Your ARCHIVELOG mode database has lost three datafiles and shut down. One is assigned to the SYSTEMtablespace and two are assigned to the USERS tablespace. You can choose from the following steps torecover your database:

a: Restore the three database datafiles that were lost.b: Issue the Startup Mount command to mount the database.c: Issue the alter database open command.d: Issue the alter database open resetlogs command.e: Recover the database using the recover database command.

f: Recover the datafiles with the recover datafile command.g: Take the datafiles offline.


A. a, b, e, cB. b, e, dC. a, b, d, cD. b, g, c, fE. a, b, d, f


Explanation/Reference:Because the system critical data files is damaged, so that the RESETLOGS option is not applied.

four steps to recover the system critical data (SYSTEM tablespace or the tablespace with UNDO):1. SHUTDOWN ABORT, if the instance is started.2. MOUNT the instance3. restore and recover the damaged data files;4. OPEN the database

QUESTION 10You have lost all your online redo logs. As a result, your database has crashed. You have tried to restart thedatabase and clear the online redo log files, but when you try to open the database you get the following error.SQL> startup

ORACLE instance started.Total System Global Area 167395328 bytes Fixed Size 1298612 bytes Variable Size 142610252 bytes Database Buffers 20971520 bytes Redo Buffers 2514944 bytes Database mounted.

ORA-00313: open failed for members of log group 2 o f thread 1 ORA-00312: online log 2 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo02a.log'ORA-27037: unable to obtain file status Linux Error : 2: No such file or directoryAdditional information: 3ORA-00312: online log 2 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo02.log'ORA-27037: unable to obtain file status Linux Error : 2: No such file or directoryAdditional information: 3

SQL> alter database clear logfile group 2;

alter database clear logfile group 2 * ERROR at lin e 1:ORA-01624: log 2 needed for crash recovery of insta nce orcl (thread 1) ORA-00312: online log 2 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo02.log'ORA-00312: online log 2 thread 1: '/oracle01/oradat a/orcl/redo02a.log'

What steps must you take to resolve the error?a: Issue the recover database redo logs command.b: Issue the Startup Mount command to mount the database.c: Restore the last full database backup.d: Perform a point-in-time recovery, applying all archived redo logs that are available.e: Restore all archived redo logs generated during and after the last full database backup.f: Open the database using the alter database open resetlogs command.g: Issue the alter database open command.

A. b, a, fB. e, b, a, fC. e, b, a, gD. b, a, gE. c, e, b, d, f


Explanation/Reference:If the online redo log is in ACTIVE or CURRENT status, you cannot issue CLEAR LOGFILE GROUP ncommand, it occurs ORA-01624 error.The option (a) is invalid, there is NO such recover database redo log command, so that the answer must be (c,e, b, d, f).

It applies an incomplete recovery, then open database with RESETLOGS option.

QUESTION 11What does the SCN represent?

A. The system change number, which is a point in time relative to transactions within a given database.B. A number that represents time. Thus, at 1300 hours, the SCN is the same on all databases.C. The security change number, which represents the security code that is needed to access any database

structure.D. A conversion factor that converts internal database time to external clock time.E. UTC time in the database, providing a standardized way of tracking time in Oracle.


Explanation/Reference:SCN

System Change Number. A database ordering primitive. The value of an SCN is the logical point in time at which changes are made to a database.

Refer to v11.2 document

QUESTION 12You have lost datafile 4 from your database. Which is typically the fastest way to restore your database?

A. Restore and recover the datafile.B. Restore and recover the tablespace.C. Restore and recover the database.D. Restore and recover the control file.E. Restore and recover the parameter file.



QUESTION 13You are trying to recover your database. During the recovery process, you receive the following error:ORA-00279: change 5033391 generated at 08/17/2008 0 6:37:40 needed for thread 1ORA-00289: suggestion: /oracle01/flash_recovery_are a/ORCL/archivelog/2008_08_17 /o1_mf_1_11_%u_.arcORA-00280: change 5033391 for thread 1 is in sequen ce #11ORA-00278: log file '/oracle01/flash_recovery_area/ ORCL/archivelog/2008_08_17 /o1_mf_1_10_4bj6wnqm_.arc' no longer needed for this recovery Specify log:{<RET>=suggested | filename | AUTO | CANCEL}ORA-00308: cannot open archived log '/oracle01/flas h_recovery_area/ORCL/archivelog/2008_08_17 /o1_mf_1_11_%u_.arc'ORA-27037: unable to obtain file status Linux Error : 2: No such file or directoryAdditional information: 3

How do you respond to this error? (Choose two.)

A. Restore the archived redo log that is missing and attempt recovery again.B. Recovery is complete and you can open the database.C. Recovery needs redo that is not available in any archived redo log. Attempt to apply an online redo log if

available.D. Recover the entire database and apply all archived redo logs again.E. Recovery is not possible because an archived redo log has been lost.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 14During recovery, you need to know if log sequence 11 is in the online redo logs, and if so, you need to know thenames of the online redo logs so you can apply them during recovery. Which view or views would you use todetermine this information? (Choose all that apply.)

A. V$LOGFILE

B. V$RECOVER_LOG

C. V$RECOVER_DATABASE

D. V$LOG_RECOVER

E. V$LOG

Correct Answer: AESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 15How is block-change tracking enabled?

A. With alter database enable block change trackingB. With alter system enable block change tracking

C. With an init.ora parameter changeD. With an spfile parameter change


QUESTION 16What type of backup is stored in a proprietary RMAN format?

A. Backup setB. Image copyC. Backup sectionD. Backup group


Explanation/Reference:A backup set is an RMAN-specific proprietary format, whereas an image copy is a bit-for-bit copy of a file. Bydefault, RMAN creates backup sets.

Refer to here

QUESTION 17Consider the following command:backup database plus archivelog delete input;

How many backup sets would be created by this command if the following were true:Control-file auto backups were enabled.The size of backup sets was not restricted.One channel was allocated.

A. 1B. 2C. 3D. 4E. 5


Explanation/Reference:RMAN> show all;

RMAN configuration parameters for database with db_ unique_name TESTDB are:CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 1; # defau ltCONFIGURE BACKUP OPTIMIZATION OFF; # defaultCONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO DISK; # defaultCONFIGURE CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP ON;CONFIGURE CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP FORMAT FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO '%F'; # defaultCONFIGURE DEVICE TYPE DISK PARALLELISM 1 BACKUP TYP E TO BACKUPSET; # defaultCONFIGURE DATAFILE BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE DI SK TO 1; # defaultCONFIGURE ARCHIVELOG BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO 1; # default

CONFIGURE MAXSETSIZE TO UNLIMITED; # defaultCONFIGURE ENCRYPTION FOR DATABASE OFF; # defaultCONFIGURE ENCRYPTION ALGORITHM 'AES128'; # defaultCONFIGURE COMPRESSION ALGORITHM 'BASIC' AS OF RELEASE 'DEFAULT' OPTIMIZE FOR LOADTRUE ; # defaultCONFIGURE ARCHIVELOG DELETION POLICY TO NONE; # def aultCONFIGURE SNAPSHOT CONTROLFILE NAME TO '/u01/app/or acle/product/11.2.0/dbhome_1/dbs/snapcf_testdb.f'; # default

RMAN> Backup database plus archivelog delete input;

Starting backup at 19-DEC-13current log archivedusing channel ORA_DISK_1channel ORA_DISK_1: starting archived log backup se tchannel ORA_DISK_1: specifying archived log(s) in b ackup setinput archived log thread=1 sequence=10 RECID=5 STA MP=834597174input archived log thread=1 sequence=11 RECID=6 STA MP=834597417channel ORA_DISK_1: starting piece 1 at 19-DEC-13channel ORA_DISK_1: finished piece 1 at 19-DEC-13piece handle=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_area/TES TDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_annnn_TAG20131219T163657_9c5d1bn3_.bkp tag=TA G20131219T163657 comment=NONEchannel ORA_DISK_1: backup set complete, elapsed ti me: 00:00:03channel ORA_DISK_1: deleting archived log(s)archived log file name=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recover y_area/TESTDB/archivelog/2013_12_19/o1_mf_1_10_9c5csl13_.arc RECI D=5 STAMP=834597174archived log file name=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recover y_area/TESTDB/archivelog/2013_12_19/o1_mf_1_11_9c5d19cn_.arc RECI D=6 STAMP=834597417Finished backup at 19-DEC-13

Starting backup at 19-DEC-13using channel ORA_DISK_1channel ORA_DISK_1: starting full datafile backup s etchannel ORA_DISK_1: specifying datafile(s) in backu p setinput datafile file number=00001 name=/u01/app/orac le/oradata/testdb/system01.dbfinput datafile file number=00002 name=/u01/app/orac le/oradata/testdb/sysaux01.dbfinput datafile file number=00005 name=/u01/app/orac le/oradata/testdb/example01.dbfinput datafile file number=00003 name=/u01/app/orac le/oradata/testdb/undotbs01.dbfinput datafile file number=00004 name=/u01/app/orac le/oradata/testdb/users01.dbfchannel ORA_DISK_1: starting piece 1 at 19-DEC-13channel ORA_DISK_1: finished piece 1 at 19-DEC-13piece handle=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_area/TES TDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_nnndf_TAG20131219T163703_9c5d1j8c_.bkp tag=TA G20131219T163703 comment=NONEchannel ORA_DISK_1: backup set complete, elapsed ti me: 00:02:05Finished backup at 19-DEC-13

Starting backup at 19-DEC-13current log archivedusing channel ORA_DISK_1channel ORA_DISK_1: starting archived log backup se tchannel ORA_DISK_1: specifying archived log(s) in b ackup setinput archived log thread=1 sequence=12 RECID=7 STA MP=834597550channel ORA_DISK_1: starting piece 1 at 19-DEC-13channel ORA_DISK_1: finished piece 1 at 19-DEC-13piece handle=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_area/TES TDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_annnn_TAG20131219T163911_9c5d5hlk_.bkp tag=TA G20131219T163911 comment=NONEchannel ORA_DISK_1: backup set complete, elapsed ti me: 00:00:01channel ORA_DISK_1: deleting archived log(s)archived log file name=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recover y_area/TESTDB/archivelog/2013_12_19/o1_mf_1_12_9c5d5g7r_.arc RECI D=7 STAMP=834597550

Finished backup at 19-DEC-13

Starting Control File and SPFILE Autobackup at 19-D EC-13piece handle=/u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_area/TES TDB/autobackup/2013_12_19/o1_mf_s_834597553_9c5d5lz1_.bkp comment=NONEFinished Control File and SPFILE Autobackup at 19-D EC-13

RMAN> list backup;

List of Backup Sets===================

BS Key Size Device Type Elapsed Time Complet ion Time------- ---------- ----------- ------------ ------- --------5 32.68M DISK 00:00:02 19-DEC- 13 BP Key: 5 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag: TAG20131219T163657 Piece Name: /u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_a rea/TESTDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_annnn_TAG20131219T163657 _9c5d1bn3_.bkp

List of Archived Logs in backup set 5 Thrd Seq Low SCN Low Time Next SCN Next Time ---- ------- ---------- --------- ---------- ---- ----- 1 10 736975 19-DEC-13 759987 19-D EC-13 1 11 759987 19-DEC-13 760624 19-D EC-13

BS Key Type LV Size Device Type Elapsed Time Completion Time------- ---- -- ---------- ----------- ------------ ---------------6 Full 1.17G DISK 00:01:59 19-DEC-13 BP Key: 6 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag: TAG20131219T163703 Piece Name: /u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_a rea/TESTDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_nnndf_TAG20131219T163703 _9c5d1j8c_.bkp List of Datafiles in backup set 6 File LV Type Ckp SCN Ckp Time Name ---- -- ---- ---------- --------- ---- 1 Full 760633 19-DEC-13 /u01/app/oracle /oradata/testdb/system01.dbf 2 Full 760633 19-DEC-13 /u01/app/oracle /oradata/testdb/sysaux01.dbf 3 Full 760633 19-DEC-13 /u01/app/oracle /oradata/testdb/undotbs01.dbf 4 Full 760633 19-DEC-13 /u01/app/oracle /oradata/testdb/users01.dbf 5 Full 760633 19-DEC-13 /u01/app/oracle /oradata/testdb/example01.dbf

BS Key Size Device Type Elapsed Time Complet ion Time------- ---------- ----------- ------------ ------- --------7 19.00K DISK 00:00:00 19-DEC- 13 BP Key: 7 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag: TAG20131219T163911 Piece Name: /u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_a rea/TESTDB/backupset/2013_12_19/o1_mf_annnn_TAG20131219T163911 _9c5d5hlk_.bkp

List of Archived Logs in backup set 7 Thrd Seq Low SCN Low Time Next SCN Next Time ---- ------- ---------- --------- ---------- ---- ----- 1 12 760624 19-DEC-13 760709 19-D EC-13

BS Key Type LV Size Device Type Elapsed Time Completion Time------- ---- -- ---------- ----------- ------------ ---------------8 Full 9.36M DISK 00:00:02 19-DEC-13 BP Key: 8 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag: TAG20131219T163913 Piece Name: /u01/app/oracle/fast_recovery_a rea/TESTDB/autobackup/2013_12_19/o1_mf_s_834597553_9c5d5lz1_.b kp SPFILE Included: Modification time: 19-DEC-13 SPFILE db_unique_name: TESTDB Control File Included: Ckp SCN: 760721 Ckp time: 19-DEC-13

QUESTION 18Compressed backups work with which of the following commands?

A. copy as backupB. backup as copyC. backupD. copy


Explanation/Reference:The backup compression only works with backup set, NONE of image copies can work with compression.

QUESTION 19Which is the correct command to back up the database, back up the archived redo logs, and then remove thebacked-up archived redo logs?

A. backup databaseB. backup database and archivelogsC. backup database plus archivelogsD. backup database plus archivelog delete inputE. backup database and archivelog delete input


QUESTION 20Which of the following best describes a full backup?

A. All datafiles of a databaseB. All datafiles, archive logs, and control filesC. All datafiles and control filesD. All the used blocks in a datafile


Explanation/Reference:From the training book:“Full backup: Makes a copy of each data block that contains data and that is within the files being backed up.”“A full backup contains all used data file blocks.”“A full backup is different from a whole database backup.”

Conclusion – it means that not all data files are backed up when you do full backup.

QUESTION 21Which type of backup backs up only data blocks modified since the most recent backup at the same level orlower?

A. Differential incremental backup

B. Different incremental backupC. Cumulative backupD. Cumulative incremental backup

Correct Answer: ASection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation

QUESTION 22Which type of backup must be performed first with an incremental backup?

A. Level 1B. Level 0C. Level 2D. Level 3


QUESTION 23Which backup option defines a user-defined name for a backup?

A. FORMATB. NAMEC. TAGD. FORMAT U%


QUESTION 24Given the following steps, which would be the correct order to create a backup of an Oracle database in NOARCHIVELOG mode?

7. shutdown immediate from RMAN8. Log into RMAN9. startup mount from RMAN10.backup database11.alter database open12.backup database plus archivelog delete input

A. 2,3,1,4,5B. 2,1,3,6,5C. 1,3,5,4D. 2,1,3,5,6E. 2,1,3,4,5

Correct Answer: ESection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Backing Up a Database in NOARCHIVELOG Mode

If a database runs in NOARCHIVELOG mode, then the only valid database backup is a consistent backup. Forthe backup to be consistent, the database must be mounted after a consistent shutdown. No recovery isrequired after restoring the backup.

To make a consistent database backup:1. Start RMAN and connect to a target database.2. Shut down the database consistently and then mount it.For example, enter the following commands to guarantee that the database is in a consistent state for abackup:

RMAN> SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE;RMAN> STARTUP FORCE DBA;RMAN> SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE;RMAN> STARTUP MOUNT;

3. Run the BACKUP DATABASE command.For example, enter the following command at the RMAN prompt to back up the database to the default backupdevice:

RMAN> BACKUP DATABASE;The following variation of the command creates image copy backups of all data files in the database:

RMAN> BACKUP AS COPY DATABASE;4. Open the database and resume normal operations.The following command opens the database:

RMAN> ALTER DATABASE OPEN;

QUESTION 25Which of the following most closely represents an image copy?

A. Unix cp command of a fileB. Bit-by-bit copy of a fileC. Windows COPY command of a fileD. All of the above


QUESTION 26Which dynamic view displays the status of block-change tracking?

A. V$BLOCK_CHANGE

B. V$BLOCK_CHANGE_TRACKING

C. V$BLOCKCHANGE

D. V$BLOCK_TRACKING


Explanation/Reference:V$BLOCK_CHANGE_TRACKING displays the status of block change tracking for the database.

QUESTION 27What feature comes into play to help ensure the completion of the backup should one of three backup devices

fail during a backup that is using three different channels?

A. Channel failoverB. Restartable backupsC. Rescheduable backupsD. Automatic backup recoveryE. Channel recovery


QUESTION 28What command would you use to set a persistent setting in RMAN so that backups are all written to a tapedevice?

A. CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO TAPE MEDIA

B. CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO TAPE

C. CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO SBT

D. CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO SBT_TAPE


Explanation/Reference:SBT_TAPE is incorrect, it should be SBT TAPE, without underline strike.

QUESTION 29The CONTROL_FILE_RECORD_KEEP_TIME initialization parameter should be set to what value? (Choose allthat apply.)

A. The initialization parameter should be set to 0 when the RMAN repository is being used.B. The initialization parameter should be set to greater than 0 with the RMAN repository utilizing the recovery

catalog only.C. The initialization parameter should be set to greater than 0 with the RMAN repository utilizing the control file

or the recovery catalog.D. The initialization parameter should be set to 0 with the RMAN repository utilizing the control file or the

recovery catalog.E. The initialization parameter should never be set to 0 if you are using RMAN.

Correct Answer: CESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

Explanation/Reference:CONTROL_FILE_RECORD_KEEP_TIME specifies the minimum number of days before a reusable record in thecontrol file can be reused. In the event a new record needs to be added to a reusable section and the oldestrecord has not aged enough, the record section expands. If this parameter is set to 0, then reusable sectionsnever expand, and records are reused as needed.

If the number of reusable records in the control file exceeds the circular reuse record limit UB4MAXVAL, thenreusable records will be overwritten even if CONTROL_FILE_RECORD_KEEP_TIME has not elapsed.UB4MAXVAL is defined in the oratypes.h header file, which is found in the public directory. Its value may vary

according to the operating system you are using.

QUESTION 30Given the following steps, which would be the correct order to create a backup of an Oracle database in ARCHIVELOG mode with control-file autobackups enabled?

a. backup archivelog all;b. backup database all;c. backup controlfile;d. backup archivelog, database, controlfile delete input;e. backup database plus archivelog delete input

A. eB. a, b, a, cC. dD. b, a, cE. b, a, c, d, e



QUESTION 31Which of the following statements are true about the BACKUP command? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The BACKUP command can not be used to make image copies of a datafile.

B. The BACKUP command can improve performance by multiplexing backup files.

C. The BACKUP can take advantage of the block-change tracking capability.

D. The BACKUP command cannot store data in incremental backups.

E. The BACKUP command can store data in cumulative incremental backups only.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 32You need to perform a block media recovery on the tools01.dbf data file in the SALES database by usingRecovery Manager (RMAN).Which two are the prerequisites to perform this operation? (Choose two)

A. You must configure block change tracking fileB. You must have first level 1 backups for RMAN to restore blocksC. You must ensure that the SALES database is mounted or openD. You must have full or level 0 backups for RMAN to restore blocksE. You must take the tools01.dbf data file offline before you start a block media recovery

Correct Answer: CDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Prerequisites for Block Media Recovery (link)


The target database must run in ARCHIVELOG mode and be open or mounted with a current controlfile.If the target database is a standby database, then it must be in a consistent state, recovery cannot be insession, and the backup must be older than the corrupted file.The backups of the data files containing the corrupt blocks must be full or level 0 backups and not proxycopies.If only proxy copy backups exist, then you can restore them to a nondefault location on disk, in which caseRMAN considers them data file copies and searches them for blocks during block media recovery.RMAN can use only archived redo logs for the recovery.RMAN cannot use level 1 incremental backups. Block media recovery cannot survive a missing orinaccessible archived redo log, although it can sometimes survive missing redo records.Flashback Database must be enabled on the target database for RMAN to search the flashback logs forgood copies of corrupt blocks.If flashback logging is enabled and contains older, uncorrupted versions of the corrupt blocks, then RMANcan use these blocks, possibly speeding up the recovery.The target database must be associated with a real-time query physical standby database for RMAN tosearch the database for good copies of corrupt blocks.

QUESTION 33On Friday at 11:30 am you decided to flash back the database because of a user error that occurred at 8:30am.Which option must you use to check whether a flashback operation can recover the database to the specifiedtime?

A. Check the alert log fileB. Query the V$FLASHBACK_DATABASE_LOG view

C. Query the V$RECOVERY_FILE_DEST_SIZE view

D. Query the V$FLASHBACK_DATABASE_STAT view

E. Check the value assigned for the UNDO_RETENTION parameter


Explanation/Reference:To query the V$FLASHBACK_DATABASE_LOG to get the lowest SCN or the nearest TIMESTAMP to decide therecovery possibility.

QUESTION 34While performing a regular check on your recovery catalog you realized that the catalog database is running outof space and you do not have options to increase the space. However, you have another database where morespace is available and you want to move your existing recovery catalog to this database.The options that can be considered while moving the recovery catalog are as follows:1. Using one of the Oracle expdp utilities to export the catalog data2. Creating a recovery catalog user and granting the necessary privileges in the other database3. Creating the recovery catalog using the CREATE CATALOG command4. Using the corresponding impdp utility to import the catalog data into the other database5. Registering the target database in the new catalog database using the REGISTER DATABASE command.

Identify the option with the correct sequence for moving the recovery catalog.

A. 2, 3, 5B. 1, 2, 4C. 1, 2, 4, 5D. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5


Explanation/Reference:The exp/imp tools can export and import the complete data structure and data extents to the destinationdatabase, so that you don't need to do create catalog and register database.

QUESTION 35You realize that the control file is damaged in your production database. After restoring the control file fromautobackup, what is the next step that you must do to proceed with the database recovery?

A. Mount the databaseB. Open the database in NORMAL mode

C. Open the database in RESTRICTED mode

D. Open the database with the RESETLOGS option


Explanation/Reference:After restoring the control file, it is time to load the restored control file onto the database instance,to issue STARTUP MOUNT command to load it.

QUESTION 36What two are the prerequisites for enabling Flashback Database? (Choose two)

A. The database must be in ARCHIVELOG mode

B. The database must be in MOUNT EXCLUSIVE mode

C. The database must be opened in RESTRICTED mode

D. The database instance must be started in the NOMOUNT state

E. The database instance must have the keep buffer pool defined

Correct Answer: ABSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 37Identify the channel settings that can be performed using the CONFIGURE CHANNEL or ALLOCATE CHANNELcommands in RMAN. (choose all that apply)

A. Limiting the input/output (I/O) bandwidth consumptionB. Specifying the size of backup sets and backup piecesC. Specifying vendor-specific information for a media managerD. Specifying the parallelism for backup and restore operations

Correct Answer: ACSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Explaination:

For Limiting the I/O bandwith: CONFIGURE [| ALLOCATE] CHANNEL....RATEFor limiting backup pieces: CONFIGURE [| ALLOCATE] CHANNEL....MAXPIECESIZEFor backup sets, you need to use BACKUP..MAXSETSIZE command to limit!For parallelism, either to use CONFIGURE DEVICE TYPE..PARALLELISM or to allocate multiple channelsduring job. NOT to be done with CONFIGURE CHANNEL.

Link to here: Configuring Advanced Channel Options

QUESTION 38Examine the following scenario:

Database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode.Complete consistent backup is taken every Sunday.On Tuesday the instance terminates abnormally because the disk on which control files are located getscorruptedThe disk having active online redo log files is also corrupted. The hardware is repaired and the paths for online redo log files and control files are still valid.

Which option would you use to perform the recovery of database till the point of failure?

A. Restore the latest whole backup, perform complete recovery, and open the database normallyB. Restore the latest whole backup, perform incomplete recovery, and open the database with the RESETLOGS

option.C. Restore the latest backups control file, perform complete recovery, and open the database with the

RESETLOGS option.

D. Restore the latest backup control file, perform incomplete recovery using backup control file, and open thedatabase with the RESETLOG option.



QUESTION 39You are managing a 24*7 database. The backup strategy for the database is to perform user-managedbackups.Identify two prerequisites to perform the backups. (Choose two.)

A. The database must be opened in restricted mode.B. The database must be configured to run in ARCHIVELOG mode.

C. The tablespaces are required to be in backup mode before taking the backup.D. The tablespaces are required to be in read-only mode before taking the backup

Correct Answer: BCSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation


QUESTION 40Examine the following commands and their output:SQL> SELECT ename, sal FROM emp WHERE ename='JAMES' ;

ENAME SAL----- ----JAMES 1050

SQL> UPDATE emp SET sal=sal+sal*1.2 WHERE ename='JA MES';

1 row updated.

SQL> SELECT ename, sal FROM emp WHERE ename='JAMES' ;

ENAME SAL----- ----JAMES 2310

View the exhibit and examine the Flashback Version Query that was executed after the preceding commands.What could be the possible cause for the query not displaying any row?

Exhibit:

A. Flashback logging is not enabled for the database.B. The changes made to the table are not committed.C. Supplemental logging is not enabled for the database.D. The database is not configured in ARCHIVELOG mode.



QUESTION 41Which of the following advisors is run in every maintenance window by the auto-task system?

A. The Memory AdvisorB. The SQL Tuning AdvisorC. The Undo AdvisorD. The SQL Access Advisor


Explanation/Reference:About Automated Maintenance Tasks (link)

Oracle Database has three predefined automated maintenance tasks:

Automatic Optimizer Statistics CollectionAutomatic Segment Advisor

Automatic SQL Tuning Advisor

By default, all three automated maintenance tasks are configured to run in all maintenance windows.

QUESTION 42To accomplish user-managed backup for the USERS tablespace, you issued the following command to put thedatabase in backup mode:SQL> ALTER TABLESPACE users BEGIN BACKUP;

While copying the file to the backup destination a power outage caused the instance to terminate abnormally.Which statement is true about the next database startup and the USERS tablespace?

A. The database will open, and the tablespace automatically comes out of the backup mode.B. The database will be mounted, and recovery must be performed on the USERS tablespace.C. The database will be mounted, and data files in the USERS tablespace must be taken out of the backup

mode.D. The database will not be mounted, and you must restore all the data files for the USERS tablespace from

the backup, and perform recovery.



QUESTION 43Examine the following command used to perform incremental level 0 backup:RMAN> BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 0 DATABASE;To enable the block change tracking, after the incremental level 0 backup you issued the following command:SQL> ALTER DATABASE ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING USING FILE '/mydir/rman_change_track.f';To perform incremental level 1 cumulative backup, you issued the following command:RMAN> BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 1 CUMULATIVE DATABASE;

Which two statements are true in the above situation? (Choose two.)

A. The block change tracking data will be used only from the next incremental 0 backup.B. The incremental backup will use change tracking data for accomplishing the backup.C. The incremental backup will not use change tracking data for accomplishing the backup.D. The block track file will scan all the blocks and create bitmap for all the blocks backed up in the level 0

backup.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 44You want to use the automatic management of backup and recovery operations features for your database.Which configuration must you set?

A. Enable the flash recovery area and specify it as the archived redo log destination.B. Disable the flash recovery area and start the database instance in ARCHIVELOG mode.

C. Enable the flash recovery area but do not specify it as the archived redo log destination.D. Disable the flash recovery area and start the database instance in NOARCHIVELOG mode.



QUESTION 45Which three types of files can be automatically placed in the flash recovery area (fast recovery area in 11gRelease 2)?(Choose three.)

A. Alert log fileB. Archived redo log filesC. Control file autobackupsD. Server Parameter file (SPFILE)E. Recovery Manager (RMAN) backup piece

Correct Answer: BCESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

QUESTION 46Before a Flashback Table operation, you execute the following command:ALTER TABLE employees ENABLE ROW MOVEMENT;

Why would you need this to be executed?

A. Because row IDs may change during the flashback operationB. Because the object number changes after the flashback operationC. Because the rows are retrieved from the recycle bin during the flashback operationD. Because the table is moved forward and back to a temporary during the flashback opertion



QUESTION 47The EMP table has some discrepancy in data entry with a particular employee ID. You execute the query asshown in the Exhibit to retrieve all versions of the row that exist between two SCNs.View the Exhibit.

Which two statements about the results of the query shown in the Exhibit are correct? (Choose two.)

Exhibit:

A. The LAST_SCN value in the first row is NULL, which means that the versions of the row still exist at SCN6636300.

B. The LAST_SCN value in the second row in NULL, which means that the version of the row still exists at SCN6636300.

C. The LAST_SCN value in the third row is 6636280, which means that the version of row exists above SCN6636280.

D. The LAST_SCN value in the second row is NULL, which means that the version of the row no longer existsbecause it was deleted.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Using Oracle Flashback Transaction Query with Oracl e Flashback Version Query(link )The query uses Oracle Flashback Version Query pseudocolumns:SELECT versions_xid XID, versions_startscn START_SC N, versions_endscn END_SCN, versions_operation OPERATION, empname, salaryFROM empVERSIONS BETWEEN SCN MINVALUE AND MAXVALUEWHERE empno = 111;

Results are similar to:XID START_SCN END_SCN O EMPNAME SALARY---------------- ---------- ---------- - ---------- ------ ----------09001100B2200000 10093466 I Tom 927030002002B210000 10093459 D Mike 5550800120096200000 10093375 10093459 I Mike 555 3 rows selected.The results table rows are in descending chronological order.

The third row corresponds to the version of the row in the table emp that was inserted in the table when thetable was created. The second row corresponds to the row in emp that the erroneous transaction deleted. The first row corresponds to the version of the row in emp that was reinserted with a new employee name.

QUESTION 48A database instance is using an Automatic Storage Management (ASM) instance, which has a disk group,DGROUP1, created as follows:

SQL> CREATE DISKGROUP dgroup1 NORMAL REDUNDANCYFAILGROUP controller1 DISK '/devices/diska1', '/dev ices/diska2' FAILGROUP controller2 DISK '/devices/diskb1', '/dev ices/diskb2';

What happens when the whole CONTROLLER1 Failure group is damaged?

A. The transactions that use the disk group will halt.B. The mirroring of allocation units occurs within the CONTROLLER2 failure group.C. The data in the CONTROLLER1 failure group is shifted to the CONTROLLER2 failure group and implicit

rebalancing is triggered.D. The ASM does not mirror any data and newly allocated primary allocation units (AU) are stored in the

CONTROLLER2 failure group.



QUESTION 49You want to set the following initialization parameters for your database instance:LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 = 'LOCATION=/disk1/arch'LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_2 = 'LOCATION=/disk2/arch'LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_3 = 'LOACTION=/disk3/arch'LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_4 = 'LOCATION=/disk4/arch MANDATOR Y'

Identify the statement that correctly describes this setting.

A. The MANDATORY location must be a flash recovery area.B. The optional destinations may not use the flash recovery area.C. This setting is not allowed because the first destination is not set as MANDATORY.D. The online redo log file is not allowed to be overwritten if the archived log cannot be created in the fourth

destination.


Explanation/Reference:MANDATORYSpecifies that filled online log files must be successfully archived to the destination before they can be reused.

If MANDATORY is not specified, then, by default, the destination is considered to be optional.At least one destination must succeed, even if all destinations are optional. If archiving to an optionaldestination fails, the online redo log file is still available for reuse and may be overwritten eventually. However, ifthe archival operation of a mandatory destination fails, online redo log files cannot be overwritten.

QUESTION 50View the Exhibit and note the contents of V$DIAG_INFO.Which statement is true about the ADR?

Exhibit:

A. The text alert log file will be available in Diag TraceB. A copy alert log file will be kept in Diag Incident for every incident.C. The XML version of the alert log file will be available in Diag Trace.D. An Automatic Database Diagnostic Management (ADDM) report is generated and stored in the Health

Monitor whenever an incident occurs.



alert, The XML-formatted alert logcdump, Core filesincident, Multiple subdirectories, where each subdirectory is named for a particular incident, and where eachcontains dumps pertaining only to that incidenttrace, Background and server process trace files, SQL trace files, and the text-formatted alert log

(others), Other subdirectories of ADR home, which store incident packages, health monitor reports, and otherinformation

QUESTION 51You are using the control file to maintain information about the database backups that are being performed byRecovery Manager (RMAN).Identify two scenarios is which you must have a recovery catalog. (Choose two.)

A. To store the backup information of multiple databaseB. To restrict the amount of space that is used by the backupsC. To maintain a backup for a certain time is set by the CONTROL_FILE_RECORD_KEEP_TIME parameter.D. To list the data files that were in a target database at a given time by using the AT option of REPORT

SCHEMA command.


QUESTION 52You have enabled backup optimization for the RMAN environment. Identify two criteria on which RMAN will skip the file, if it has already been backed up. (Choose two.)

A. The data file backup is done with multiple channelsB. The data files is in the read-write mode after being backed up in the read only modeC. The backup was taken after the data files was taken offline-normal or is in the read only modeD. The data file backup complies with the back retention policy and the backup duplexing feature

Correct Answer: CDSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 53You need to maintain a record of all transactions on some tables for at least three years.Automatic undo management is enabled for the database.What must you do accomplish this task?

A. Enable supplemental logging for the database.B. Specify undo retention guarantee for the databaseC. Create Flashback Data Archive in the tablespace where the tables are stored.D. Create Flashback Data Archive and enable Flashback Data Archive for specific tables


QUESTION 54You issued the following commands to configure setting in RMAN; RMAN> CONFIGURE DEVICE TYPE sbt PARALLELISM 1;RMAN> CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO sbt;RMAN> CONFIGURE DATAFILE BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE sbt TO 2;

RMAN> CONFIGURE ARCHIVELOG BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE sbt TO 2;RMAN> CONFIGURE DATAFILE BACKUP COPIES FOR DEVICE TYPE DISK TO 2;

Then you issued the following command to take the backup:RMAN> BACKUP DATABASE PLUS ARCHIVELOG;

Which statement is true about the execution of the above command?

A. The backup will terminate because the FORMAT clause was not configured for the channelB. It backs up two copies of data files to tape and disk, and two copies of archived log file on tapeC. It backs up the data files and archived log files to disk, making two copies of each data file and archived log

fileD. It backs up the data files and archived log files to tape, making two copies of each data file and archived log

file



QUESTION 55You work with a newly created database. Presently, there is no application load on the database instance. Youwant to create a baseline for tuning the application, so you decide to collect recommendations that can beimplemented to improve application performance.What action must you take to achieve this?

A. Run Segment AdvisorB. Run the SQL Tuning Advisor (STA)C. Run the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) reportD. Run the SQL Access Advisor with a hypothetical workload


QUESTION 56Your database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode. One of the data files, USERDATA01.dbf , in the USERStablespace is damaged and you need to recover the file until the point of failure. The backup for the datafile isavailable.Which three files would be used in the user-managed recovery process performed by the databaseadministrator (DBA)? (Choose Three)

A. Redo logsB. Control fileC. The latest backup of only the damaged data fileD. The latest backup of all the data file in the USERS tablespaceE. Temporary files of temporary tablespaceF. Archive Logs since the latest backup to point of failure

Correct Answer: ACFSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:datafile backup + archived redo log + online redo log

QUESTION 57Which options must you configure while performing an automated Tablespace Point-in-Time Recovery(TSPITR) by using Recovery Manager (RMAN)?

A. New channels for restore and recovery tasksB. New name for the data files of the tablespaceC. Auxiliary name for the data files of the tablespaceD. Auxiliary destinations for an auxiliary set of data files

Correct Answer: DSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation

QUESTION 58In Recovery Manager (RMAN), you are taking image copies of the data files of your production database androlling them forward at regular intervals. You attempt to restart your database. After a regular maintenance task,you realize that one of the data files that belongs to the USERS tablespace is damaged and you need torecover the data file by using the image copy. Because a media failure caused the data file to be damaged, youwant to place the data file in a different location while restoring the file.Which option must you consider for this task?

A. using only the RMAN SWITCH command to set the new location for the data file

B. placing the database in the MOUNT state for the restore and recovery operations.

C. using an RMAN RUN block with the SET NEWNAME and then the SWITCH command.

D. configuring two channels: one for the restore operation and the other for the recovery operation



QUESTION 59The database is running in the ARCHIVELOG mode. It has three redo log groups with one member each. One ofthe redo log groups has become corrupted. You have issued the following command during the recovery of adamaged redo log file:ALTER DATABASE CLEAR UNARCHIVED LOGFILE GROUP 3;

Which action should you perform immediately after using this command?

A. You should perform a log switchB. You should make a backup of the databaseC. You should switch the database to the NOARCHIVELOG mode

D. You should shut down the database instance and perform a complete database recovery



QUESTION 60Which option is best practice for creating a recovery catalog owner in the catalog database?

A. Granting UNLIMITED QUOTA on the SYSTEM tablespace to the owner

B. Allocating the SYSTEM tablespace as the default tablespace and granting the SYSDBA privilege to the user

C. Creating a new tablespace, allocating this as the default, and granting UNLIMITED QUOTA on thistablespace to the user

D. Allocating the SYSAUX tablespace as the default tablespace and granting UNLIMITED QUOTA on thistablespace to the user

Correct Answer: CSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:To create the recovery catalog schema in the recovery catalog database:

1. Start SQL*Plus and connect with administrator privileges to the database containing the recovery catalog. Inthis example, the database is catdb.

2. Create a user and schema for the recovery catalog. For example, you could enter the following SQLstatement (replacing password with a user-defined password):

CREATE USER rman IDENTIFIED BY password TEMPORARY TABLESPACE temp DEFAULT TABLESPACE tools QUOTA UNLIMITED ON tools;

3. Grant the RECOVERY_CATALOG_OWNER role to the schema owner. This role provides the user with allprivileges required to maintain and query the recovery catalog.

GRANT RECOVERY_CATALOG_OWNER TO rman;

QUESTION 61Which two statements are true about encrypting RMAN backup? (Choose two.)

A. The transparent encryption of backups uses the encryption walletB. The database uses the same encryption key for every encrypted backupC. The password encryption of backups only uses the password while creating and restoring backupD. If transparent encryption is configured, you cannot use the SET ENCRYPTION BY PASSWORD command to

make password-protected backups.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation


QUESTION 62View the Exhibit and examine the output of the query in different times when the following command runs in anRMAN sessions:RMAN> BACKUP DATABASE FILESPERSET 2;The database has seven data files. Why is the %_COMPLETE refreshed to 13.59 in the third output afterreaching 88.77?Exhibit:

A. Because the progress is reported for each data fileB. Because the progress is reported for each backup setC. Because other RMAN sessions have issued the same BACKUP command

D. Because new data files have been added to the database while the RMAN backup is in progress



QUESTION 63Note the following parameter settings: Which setting is NOT allowed?

A. ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_CACHE_SIZE=50M;

B. ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_8K_CACHE_SIZE=10M;

C. ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_4K_CACHE_SIZE=10M;

D. ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_16K_CACHE_SIZE=10M;



QUESTION 64Which three statements must be true before transporting a tablespace from a database on one platform to adatabase on another platform? (Choose three.)

A. Both source and target database must be the same character setB. Both source and target database must have the same endian formatC. The COMPATIBLE parameter must be the same in the source and target databases.

D. The minimum compatibility level for both the source and target database must be 10.0.0.E. All read-only and offline data files that belong to the tablespace to be transported must be platform aware.

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 65Your database instance is running. You are not able to access Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Controlbecause the listener is not started.Which tool or utility would you use to start the listener?

A. Oracle Net ManagerB. Listener Control utilityC. Database Configuration AssistantD. Oracle Net Configuration Assistant


QUESTION 66While Monitoring the space usage in your database that is in ARCHIVELOG mode you observed that the flashrecovery area does not have enough free space to accommodate any more files and you do not havenecessary permissions to add more space to it.Identify the two events that can occur in the event of a log switch? (Choose two.)

A. An entry is created in the alert log file and the database instance continues to function normallyB. The log switch hangs occur for transactions until free space is available in the flash recovery areaC. The Oracle database server deletes a file that is on the obsolete file list to make free space in the flash

recovery areaD. The database instance status is implicitly changed to RESTRICTED mode and file creations to the flash

recovery area are prevented

Correct Answer: BCSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 67Identify the persistent configuration setting for the target database that can be set for the backup by usingRMAN. (Choose all that apply.)

A. Backup retention policyB. Default backup device typeC. Default destinations for backupsD. Multiple backup device types for single backupE. Default section size for backups

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:SECTION SIZE cannot be configured through CONFIGURE command.

QUESTION 68Which three statements are true about windows? (Choose three.)

A. Only one window can be open at any given timeB. Consumer groups are associated with windowsC. Windows work with job classes to control resource allocationD. The database service name must be provided during windows creationE. Windows can automatically start job or change resource allocation among jobs for various time periods.

Correct Answer: ACESection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 69Which three statements are true about persistent configuration? (Choose three.)

A. A user cannot set privileges on the persistent lightweight jobsB. Persistent lightweight jobs generate a large amount of metadataC. It is possible to create fully self-contained persistent lightweight jobsD. The use of a template is mandatory to create persistent lightweight jobsE. Persistent lightweight jobs are useful when users need to create a large number of jobs in a short time

Correct Answer: ADESection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 70You want to enable automatic PGA memory management in your database. Which setting is required to

achieve this?

A. Set MEMORY_TARGET to zero

B. Set the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter to BASIC

C. Set the WORKAREA_SIZE_POLICY parameter to MANUAL

D. Set the PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET parameter to nonzero value



QUESTION 71Examine the parameter setting in your database:NAME TYPE V ALUE------------------------------------ ------------ - ---------------archive_lag_target integer 0db_flashback_retention_target integer 1 440fast_start_io_target integer 0fast_start_mttr_target integer 0memory_max_target big integer 8 08Mmemory_target big integer 8 08Mpga_aggregate_target big integer 0sga_target big integer 0

SQL> SHOW PARAMETER SGA_MAX_SIZE

NAME TYPE V ALUE------------------------------------ ------------ - ---------------sga_max_size big integer 8 08M

Which statement is correct about the database?

A. Automatic memory management is disabled because PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET and SGA_TARGET are notset

B. The instance is started but the database will not be opened until PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET andSGA_TARGET are set

C. The database is opened but users cannot perform transactions until PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET andSGA_TARGET are set

D. Automatic memory management is enabled and, as per policy, 60% of the memory for System Global Area(SGA) and 40% of the memory for Program Global Area (PGA) will be distributed at startup



QUESTION 72Which three functions are performed by the SQL Tuning Advisor? (Choose three.)

A. Building the SQL profileB. Recommending optimization of materialized viewsC. Checking query objects for missing and stale statistics

D. Recommending bitmap, function-based, and B-tree indexesE. Recommending restructuring SQL queries that are using bad plans

Correct Answer: ACESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

QUESTION 73In your production database, users report that they are unable to generate reports on an important tablebecause it does not contain any data. While investigating the reason, you realize that another user executedthe TRUNCATE TABLE command, which accidentally caused the data to be lost. Now you want to recover thelost data of the table without affecting objects in other schemas.Which method must you use to recover the lost data?

A. Complete Recovery with online redo logB. Complete Recovery with archived redo logC. Tablespace Point-in-Time Recovery (TSPITR)D. Incomplete Recovery with system change number (SCN)



QUESTION 74View the Exhibit.You are creating a database by using Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA). You have chosen the FileSystem option as the storage mechanism.What would be the result of choosing this option?

Exhibit:

A. Disk mirroring and striping would be done automaticallyB. The database files would be managed by the operating system's file systemC. DBCA would not save the database files by using Optimal File Architecture (OFA)D. The data files are automatically spread across all available storage devices to optimize performance and

resource utilization



QUESTION 75View the Exhibit and examine the disk groups created at the time of migrating the database storage toAutomatic Storage Management (ASM).Why does the FRA disk group initially have more free space even though both DATA and FRA disk groups areprovided with the same size?

A. Because the FRA disk group will not support dynamic rebalancingB. Because the FRA disk group is not configured to support mirroringC. Because disks in the FRA disk group are not formatted at this stageD. Because the FRA disk group will support only a single size of allocation unit


QUESTION 76

Which two statements are true about a job chain? (Choose two.)

A. A job chain can contain a nested chain of jobs.B. The jobs in a job chain cannot have more than one dependency.C. A job of the CHAIN type can be run using event-based or time-based schedules.D. The jobs in a job chain can be executed only by using the events generated by the Scheduler

Correct Answer: ACSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Defining Chain StepsAfter creating a chain object, you define one or more chain steps. Each step can point to one of the following:

A Scheduler program object (program)Another chain (a nested chain)An event schedule, inline event, or file watcher

You define a step that points to a program or nested chain by using the DEFINE_CHAIN_STEP procedure. Anexample is the following, which adds two steps tomy_chain1:BEGIN DBMS_SCHEDULER.DEFINE_CHAIN_STEP ( chain_name => 'my_chain1', step_name => 'my_step1', program_name => 'my_program1'); DBMS_SCHEDULER.DEFINE_CHAIN_STEP ( chain_name => 'my_chain1', step_name => 'my_step2', program_name => 'my_chain2');END;/

QUESTION 77View the exhibit and examine the TRANS table's storage information. After a massive delete operation, youexecuted the following statement to shrink the TRANS table: SQL> ALTER TABLE trans SHRINK SPACE CASCADE;

Which statement describes the outcome of the command?

Exhibit:

A. An error is produced.B. The table and all related objects are compacted and the position of the high-water mark (HWM) for the table

is adjustedC. The table and related indexes are compacted but the position of the high-water mark (HWM) for the table

remains unchangedD. The unused space in the table is reclaimed and returned to the tablespace and the data manipulation

language (DML) triggers on the table are fired during the shrinking process



QUESTION 78You executed the following commands in a database session:

What could have caused the recycle bin to clean up?

A. There is demand for space from the new tableB. The undo tablespace does not have sufficient free spaceC. The new table name is the same as the table name in the recycle binD. The temporary tablespace that is assigned to you does not have sufficient free space



QUESTION 79You notice that a long-running transaction is suspended due to a space constraint, and there is no AFTERSUSPEND triggered event addressing the issue. You also note that the critical transaction is just about to reachthe RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT value.

Which of these actions is appropriate?

A. Abort the session, fix the space problem, then resubmit the transaction.B. Use the DBMS_RESUMABLE.SET_SESSION_TIMEOUT procedure to extend the time-out for the session

while you fix the problem.C. Do nothing, let the transaction fail, then fix the problem.D. Use Segment Shrink to clean up the table.E. Use the DBMS_RESUMABLE.SET_TIMEOUT procedure to extend the time-out for the session while you fix

the problem.



QUESTION 80Which of the following are not disabled by default?

A. JobsB. ChainsC. WindowsD. Window groupsE. Schedule

Correct Answer: ESection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 81You notice that a job in a chain has not completed on a nonconstrained RAC database. Which of these arevalid reasons why that might occur?

A. The job priority is 1 and the resource consumer group CPU emphasis allocation is a low percentage.B. The job affinity is to a service and one node in that service is unavailable.C. The job affinity is to an instance and that instance is unavailable.D. There is no service affinity.E. None of the above.

Correct Answer: CSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation


QUESTION 82The NLS_LANGUAGE parameter specifies the default conventions to be used for which of the followingglobalization elements?

A. Languages for server messagesB. Day and month names and abbreviationsC. Symbols to represent a.m., p.m., AD, and BCD. Affirmative and negative response strings (YES, NO)E. None of the aboveF. All of the above

Correct Answer: FSection: GlobalizationExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Parameter type StringSyntax NLS_LANGUAGE = languageDefault value Operating system-dependent, deriv ed from the NLS_LANGenvironment variable

Modifiable ALTER SESSIONRange of values Any valid language nameBasic Yes

NLS_LANGUAGE specifies the default language of the database. This language is used for messages, dayand month names, symbols for AD, BC, a.m., and p.m., and the default sorting mechanism. Thisparameter also determines the default values of the parameters NLS_DATE_LANGUAGE and NLS_SORT.

QUESTION 83The NLS_TERRITORY parameter specifies the default conventions to be used for which of the followingglobalization elements? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Date formatB. Decimal characterC. Group separatorD. First day of the monthE. None of the aboveF. All of the above

Correct Answer: ABCSection: GlobalizationExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Parameter type StringSyntax NLS_TERRITORY = territoryDefault value Operating system-dependentModifiable ALTER SESSIONRange of values Any valid territory nameBasic Yes

NLS_TERRITORY specifies the name of the territory whose conventions are to be followed for day and weeknumbering.

This parameter also establishes the default date format, the default decimal character and group separator,and the default ISO and local currency symbols.

For information on these settings, see "NLS_DATE_FORMAT", "NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS","NLS_CURRENCY", and "NLS_ISO_CURRENCY".

QUESTION 84What are three benefits of using ASM? (Choose three.)

A. Ease of disk administration and maintenanceB. Load balancing across physical disksC. Software RAID-1 data redundancy with double or triple mirrorsD. Automatic recovery of failed disks

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

QUESTION 85What components are present in an ASM instance? (Choose three.)

A. SGA

B. Database processesC. Database datafilesD. Control filesE. Database parameter file or SPFILE

Correct Answer: ABESection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 86Which of the following is a benefit of ASM fast disk resync?

A. Failed disks are taken offline immediately but are not dropped.B. Disk data is never lost.C. By default, the failed disk is not dropped from the disk group ever, protecting you from loss of that disk.D. The failed disk is automatically reformatted and then resynchronized to speed up the recovery process.E. Hot spare disks are automatically configured and added to the disk group.


Explanation/Reference:ASM Fast Mirror Resync

QUESTION 87What is the result of increasing the value of the parameter ASM_POWER_LIMIT during a rebalance operation?

A. The ASM rebalance operation will likely consume fewer resources and complete in a shorter amount oftime.

B. The ASM rebalance operation will consume fewer resources and complete in a longer amount of time.C. The ASM rebalance operation will be parallelized and should complete in a shorter amount of time.D. There is no ASM_POWER_LIMIT setting used in ASM.




QUESTION 88What is the default AU size of an ASM disk group? What is the maximum AU size in an ASM disk group?

A. 100KB default, 10TB maximumB. 256KB default, 1024MB maximumC. 10MB default, 126PB maximumD. 64KB default, 1EB maximumE. 1MB default, 64MB maximum


Explanation/Reference:The AU size is determined at creation time with the allocation unit size (AU_SIZE) disk group attribute. The values can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 MB.

Refer to here

QUESTION 89Which initialization parameter in an ASM instance specifies the disk groups to be automatically mounted atinstance startup?

A. ASM_DISKMOUNTB. ASM_DISKGROUPC. ASM_DISKSTRINGD. ASM_MOUNTGROUP


Explanation/Reference:Refer to hereWhen you run the STARTUP command, this command attempts to mount the disk groups specified by theinitialization parameter ASM_DISKGROUPS. If you have not entered a value for ASM_DISKGROUPS, then theASM instance starts and Oracle displays an error that no disk groups were mounted. You can then mount diskgroups with the ALTER DISKGROUP...MOUNT command.

QUESTION 90When an ASM instance receives a SHUTDOWN NORMAL command, what command does it pass on to alldatabase instances that rely on the ASM instances disk groups?

A. TRANSACTIONALB. IMMEDIATEC. ABORTD. NORMAL



QUESTION 91When starting up your ASM instance, you receive the following error:SQL> startup pfile=$ORACLE_HOME/dbs/init+ASM.oraASM instance started

Total System Global Area 104611840 bytesFixed Size 1298220 bytesVariable Size 78147796 bytesASM Cache 25165824 bytes

ORA-15032: not all alternations performed

ORA-15063: ASM discovered an insufficient number of disks for diskgroup “DGROUP3”ORA-15063: ASM discovered an insufficient number of disks for diskgroup “DGROUP2”ORA-15063: ASM discovered an insufficient number of disks for diskgroup “DGROUP1”

In trying to determine the cause of the problem, you issue this query:SQL> show parameter asm

NAME TYPE VA LUE------------------------------------ ----------- -- ----------------------------asm_allow_only_raw_disks boolean FA LSEasm_diskgroups string DG ROUP1, DGROUP2, DGROUP3asm_diskstring stringasm_power_limit integer 1asm_preferred_read_failure_groups string

What is the cause of the error?

A. The ASM_DISKGROUPS parameter is configured for three disk groups: DGROUP1, DGROUP2, andDGROUP3.The underlying disks for these disk groups have apparently been lost.

B. The format of the ASM_DISKGROUPS parameter is incorrect. It should reference the disk group numbers,not the names of the disk groups

C. The ASM_POWER_LIMIT parameter is incorrectly set to 1. It should be set to the number of disk groupsbeing attached to the ASM instance.

D. The ASM_DISKSTRING parameter is not set; therefore disk discovery is not possible.

E. There is insufficient information to solve this problem.


Explanation/Reference:ASM_DISKSTRING specifies an operating system-dependent value used by Automatic Storage Management tolimit the set of disks considered for discovery. When a new disk is added to a disk group, each AutomaticStorage Management instance that has the disk group mounted must be able to discover the new diskusing the value of ASM_DISKSTRING.

In most cases, the default value will be sufficient. Using a more restrictive value may reduce the time requiredfor Automatic Storage Management to perform discovery, and thus improve disk group mount time or the timefor adding a disk to a disk group. A "?" at the beginning of the string gets expanded to the Oracle homedirectory. Depending on the operating system, wildcard characters can be used. It may be necessary todynamically change ASM_DISKSTRING before adding a disk so that the new disk will be discovered.

An attempt to dynamically modify ASM_DISKSTRING will be rejected and the old value retained if the new valuecannot be used to discover a disk that is in a disk group that is already mounted.

Refer to here

QUESTION 92As DBA for the Rebalance, you have decided that you need to facilitate some redundancy in your database.Using ASM, you want to create a disk group that will provide for the greatest amount of redundancy for yourASM data (you do not have advanced SAN mirroring technology available to you, unfortunately).

Which of the following commands would create a disk group that would offer the maximum in dataredundancy?

A. CREATE DISKGROUP dg_alliance1 NORMAL REDUNDANCY

FAILGROUP diskcontrol1 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk3' NAMEfile_diska1 FAILGROUP diskcontrol2 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk4' NAMEfile_diskb1;

B. CREATE DISKGROUP dg_alliance1 EXTERNAL REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP diskcontrol1 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk3' NAMEfile_diska1;

C. CREATE DISKGROUP dg_alliance1 HIGH REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP diskcontrol1 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk1' NAME file_disk1 FAILGROUP diskcontrol2 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk2' NAME file_disk2 FAILGROUP diskcontrol3 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk3' NAMEfile_disk3;

D. CREATE DISKGROUP dg_alliance1 MAXIMUM REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP diskcontrol1 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk1' NAME file_disk1 FAILGROUP diskcontrol2 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk2' NAME file_disk2 FAILGROUP diskcontrol2 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk3' NAME file_disk3 FAILGROUP diskcontrol2 DISK 'c:\oracle\asm_disk \file_disk4' NAMEfile_disk4;



Explanation/Reference:No SAN mirroring available means no external redundancy available.The highest redundancy of ASM is the HIGH redundancy with 3 mirror copies.

QUESTION 93You want to migrate your database to ASM, so you have done a clean shutdown, made a closed backup of theentire database. You noted the location of your control files and online redo log files, and changed your spfile touse OMF. The last step is to run an RMAN script to do the conversion. Using the following steps, what is thecorrect order in which the following RMAN commands should be executed?

1. STARTUP NOMOUNT2. ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS3. SQL "ALTER DATABASE RENAME 'logfile1' path TO '+ dgrp4'" # plus all otherlogfiles4. SWITCH DATABASE TO COPY5. BACKUP AS COPY DATABASE FORMAT '+dgrp4'6. ALTER DATABASE MOUNT7. RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM 'controlfile_location'

A. 2, 5, 3, 1, 7, 6, 4B. 1, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2C. 5, 1, 2, 7, 4, 6, 3D. 7, 3, 1, 5, 6, 2, 4



QUESTION 94How can you reverse the effects of an ALTER DISKGROUP ... DROP DISK command if it has NOT yetcompleted?

A. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... ADD DISK command.

B. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... UNDROP DISKS command.

C. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... DROP DISK CANCEL command.

D. Retrieve the disk from the Recycle Bin after the operation completes.



QUESTION 95To reference existing ASM files, you need to use a fully qualified ASM filename. Your development databasehas a disk group named DG2A, the database name is DEV19, and the ASM file that you want to reference is adatafile for the USERS02 tablespace.Which of the following is a valid ASM filename for this ASM file?

A. dev19/+DG2A/datafile/users02.701.2

B. +DG2A/dev19/datafile/users02.701.2

C. +DG2A/dev19/users02/datafile.701.2

D. +DG2A.701.2

E. +DG2A/datafile/dev19.users.02.701.2


Explanation/Reference:Fully Qualified File Name Form (link)

A fully qualified file name has the following form:

+diskgroup/dbname/filetype/filetypetag.file.incarna tion

Where:

+diskgroup is the disk group name preceded by a plus sign. You can think of the plus sign (+) as the rootdirectory of the Oracle ASM file system, similar to the slash (/) on UNIX or Linux computers.

dbname is the DB_UNIQUE_NAME of the database to which the file belongs.

filetype is the Oracle file type and can be one of the file types shown in Table 7-3.

filetypetag is type-specific information about the file and can be one of the tags shown in Table 7-3.

file.incarnation is the file/incarnation pair, used to ensure uniqueness.

For example,

filetype = 'DATAFILE' , Data files and data file copiesfiletypetag = 'tblspname' , Name of the tablespace into which the file is added

QUESTION 96Which background process coordinates the rebalance activity for disk groups?

A. ORBnB. OSMBC. RBALD. ASMn


Explanation/Reference:RBALASM Rebalance Master ProcessCoordinates rebalance activityIn an ASM instance, it coordinates rebalance activity for disk groups. In a database instances, it manages ASMdisk groups.

QUESTION 97On the development database rac0, there are six raw devices: /dev/raw/raw1 through /dev/raw/raw6 . /dev/raw/raw1 and /dev/raw/raw2 are 8GB each, and the rest are 6GB each. An existing disk group +DATA1, of NORMAL REDUNDANCY, uses /dev/raw/raw1 and /dev/raw/raw2 . Which series of the following commands will drop one of the failure groups for +DATA1, create a new diskgroup +DATA2 using two of the remaining four raw devices, and then cancel the drop operation from +DATA1?

A. ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 DROP DISK DATA1_0001;

CREATE DISKGROUP DATA2 NORMAL REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP DATA1A DISK '/dev/raw/raw3' FAILGROUP DATA1B DISK '/dev/raw/raw4';

ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 UNDROP DISKS;

B. ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 DROP DISK DATA1_0001;

CREATE DISKGROUP DATA2 HIGH REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP DATA1A DISK '/dev/raw/raw3' FAILGROUP DATA1B DISK '/dev/raw/raw4;'


C. ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 DROP DISK DATA1_0001;

CREATE DISKGROUP DATA2 NORMAL REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP DATA1A DISK '/dev/raw/raw3' FAILGROUP DATA1B DISK '/dev/raw/raw4';

ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 UNDROP DATA1_0001;

D. ALTER DISKGROUP DATA1 DROP DISK DATA1_0001 ADD DISK GROUP DATA2 NORMAL REDUNDANCY FAILGROUP DATA1A DISK '/dev/raw/raw3' FAILGROUP DATA1B DISK '/dev/raw/raw4';




QUESTION 98Which type of database file is spread across all disks in a disk group?

A. All types of files are spread across all disks in the disk group.B. DatafilesC. Redo log filesD. Archived redo log filesE. Control files


QUESTION 99How can you reverse the effects of an ALTER DISKGROUP ... DROP DISK command if it has alreadycompleted?

A. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... ADD DISK command.

B. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... UNDROP DISKS command.

C. Issue the ALTER DISKGROUP ... DROP DISK CANCEL command.

D. Retrieve the disk from the Recycle Bin after the operation completes.


Explanation/Reference:You cannot UNDROP DISKS if the DROP DISK command has already completed.

QUESTION 100Which of the following ALTER DISKGROUP commands does not use V$ASM_OPERATION to record the statusof the operation?

A. ADD DIRECTORY

B. DROP DISK

C. RESIZE DISK

D. REBALANCE

E. ADD FAILGROUP



E06

QUESTION 1Which two statements regarding a SQL profile are true? (Choose two.)

A. It is built by Automatic Tuning Optimizer.B. It cannot be stored persistently in the data dictionary.C. It can be used by the query optimizer automatically.D. It can be created manually by using the CREATE PROFILE command.


QUESTION 2Evaluate the following command and its output:SQL>SELECT * FROM dba_temp_free_space;

TABLESPACE_NAME TABLESPACE_SIZE ALLOCATED_SPACE FREE_SPACE=============== =============== =============== === =======LMTEMP 250609664 101048576 14 9561088

Which two statements correctly interpret the output? (Choose two.)

A. FREE_SPACE indicates only the space that is currently unallocated.

B. ALLOCATED_SPACE indicates only the space currently allocated and in use.

C. FREE_SPACE indicates only the space that is currently allocated and available for reuse.

D. ALLOCATED_SPACE indicates both the space currently allocated and used, and the space that is availablefor reuse.

E. FREE_SPACE indicates both the space that is currently allocated and available for reuse, and the space thatis currently unallocated.

Correct Answer: DESection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 3Identify the three predefined server-generated alerts. (Choose three.)

A. Drop UserB. Tablespace Space UsageC. Resumable Session SuspendedD. Recovery Area Low On Free SpaceE. SYSTEM Tablespace Size Increment


QUESTION 4Which three actions are required to configure the Flashback Database? (Choose three.)

A. set Flash Recovery AreaB. enable Flashback loggingC. create FLASHBACK tablespace

D. start the database in the ARCHIVELOG mode

E. start the database in the NOARCHIVELOG mode

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 5View the Exhibit and examine the Data Pump architecture.Identify the numbered components.

Exhibit:

A. 1 - Oracle Loader, 2 - Oracle Data Pump, 3 - Direct Path APIB. 1 - Oracle Data Pump, 2 - Direct Path API, 3 - Oracle LoaderC. 1 - Direct Path API, 2 - Oracle Loader, 3 - Oracle Data PumpD. 1 - Oracle Loader, 2 - Direct Path API, 3 - Oracle Data Pump



QUESTION 6You executed the following command to drop a user:DROP USER scott CASCADE;

Which two statements regarding the above command are correct? (Choose two.)

A. All the objects of scott are moved to the Recycle Bin.B. Any objects in the Recycle Bin belonging to scott are purged.C. All the objects owned by scott are permanently dropped from the database.D. All the objects of scott in the Recycle Bin must be purged before executing the DROP command.E. Any objects in the Recycle Bin belonging to scott will not be affected by the above DROP command.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 7Your production database is running in archivelog mode and you are using recovery manager (RMAN) withrecovery catalog to perform the database backup at regular intervals. When you attempt to restart the databaseinstance after a regular maintenance task on Sunday, the database fails to open displaying the message thatthe data file belonging to the users tablespace are corrupted.

The steps to recover the damaged data files are follows:1. Mount the database2. Open the database3. Recover the data file4. Restore the data file5. Make the data file offline6. Make the data file online

Which option identifies the correct sequence that you must use to recover the data files?

A. 2, 4, 3B. 1, 4, 3, 2C. 2, 5, 4, 3, 6D. 5, 2, 4, 3, 6E. 1, 5, 4, 3, 6, 2



QUESTION 8You want to perform an RMAN backup of database as a copy. Which two factors will you consider whileperforming the backup operation? (Choose two).

A. The backup as copy can only be taken to diskB. The backup as copy can only be taken to tape

C. Backup can be performed only when the instance is shutdownD. Backup will constitute all used and unused blocks in the database

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

QUESTION 9In your database, the flash recovery area (FRA) is configured as the default for RMAN backups. You executedthe following commands to configure the settings in RMAN:

Which statement is true about the outcome?

A. Only one channel is allocated and the backup is created in the flash recovery areaB. Only one channel is allocated and the backup is created in the destination specified for channelC. Two channels are allocated and backup sets are created in the destinations specified for channels 1 and 2D. Three channels are allocated and backup sets are created in the destinations specified for channels 1, 2,

and FRA



QUESTION 10You are using recovery Manager (RMAN) with a recovery catalog to backup up your production database. Thebackups and the archived redo log files are copied to a tape drive on a daily basis. The database was open andtransactions were recorded in the redo logs. Because of fire in the building you lost your servers having theproduction database and the recovery catalog database. The archive log files generated after the last backupare intact on one of the remote locations.

While performing a disaster recovery of the production database what is the next step that you must performafter restoring the data files and applying archived redo logs?

A. Open the database in NORMAL mode

B. Open the database in read-only modeC. Open the database in RESTRICTED mode

D. Open the database with the RESETLOGS option

Correct Answer: D


Explanation/Reference:Recovering the Database After a Disaster

The procedure for disaster recovery is similar to the procedure for recovering the database with a backupcontrol file in NOCATALOG mode. If you are restoring the database to a new host, then you should also reviewthe considerations described in "Restoring a Database on a New Host".

This scenario assumes that the Linux server on which your database was running has been damaged beyondrepair. Fortunately, you backed up the database to Oracle Secure Backup and have the tapes available. Thescenario assumes the following:

Oracle Database is already installed on the new host.You are restoring the database to a new Linux host with the same directory structure as the old host.You have one tape drive containing backups of all the data files and archived redo logs through log 1124,and autobackups of the control file and server parameter file.You do not use a recovery catalog with the database.

To recover the database on the new host:

1. If possible, restore or re-create all relevant network files such as tnsnames.ora and listener.ora and apassword file.

2. Start RMAN and connect to the target database instance.At this stage, no initialization parameter file exists. If you have set ORACLE_SID and ORACLE_HOME, thenyou can use operating system authentication to connect as SYSDBA. For example, start RMAN as follows:% rmanRMAN> CONNECT TARGET/

3. Specify the DBID for the target database with the SET DBID command, as described in "Restoring theServer Parameter File".

For example, enter the following command:SET DBID 676549873;

4. Run the STARTUP NOMOUNT command.When the server parameter file is not available, RMAN attempts to start the instance with a dummy serverparameter file.

5. Allocate a channel to the media manager and then restore the server parameter file from autobackup. For example, enter the following command to restore the server parameter file from Oracle Secure Backup:RUN{ ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; RESTORE SPFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP;}

6. Restart the instance with the restored server parameter file.STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT;

7. Write a command file to perform the restore and recovery operation, and then execute the command file.The command file should do the following:

a. Allocate a channel to the media manager.b. Restore a control file autobackup (see "Performing Recovery with a Backup Control File and No RecoveryCatalog").c. Mount the restored control file.d. Catalog any backups not recorded in the repository with the CATALOG command.e. Restore the data files to their original locations. If volume names have changed, then run SET

NEWNAME commands before the restore operation and perform a switch after the restore operation toupdate the control file with the new locations for the data files, as shown in the following example.f. Recover the data files. RMAN stops recovery when it reaches the log sequence number specified.

RMAN> RUN{ # Manually allocate a channel to the media manage r ALLOCATE CHANNEL t1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; # Restore autobackup of the control file. This ex ample assumes that youhave # accepted the default format for the autobackup name. RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP; # The set until command is used in case the data base # structure has changed in the most recent backu ps, and you want to # recover to that point in time. In this way RMA N restores the database # to the same structure that the database had at the specified time. ALTER DATABASE MOUNT; SET UNTIL SEQUENCE 1124 THREAD 1; RESTORE DATABASE; RECOVER DATABASE;}The following example of the RUN command shows the same scenario except with new file names forthe restored data files:RMAN> RUN{ # If you must restore the files to new locations , # use SET NEWNAME commands: SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 1 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_1'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 2 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_2'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 3 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_3'; ALLOCATE CHANNEL t1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP; ALTER DATABASE MOUNT; SET UNTIL SEQUENCE 124 THREAD 1; RESTORE DATABASE; SWITCH DATAFILE ALL; # Update control file with n ew location of datafiles. RECOVER DATABASE;}

8. If recovery was successful, then open the database and reset the online logs:ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

QUESTION 11View the exhibit and examine the output. Which statement can be an inference from the output? Exhibit:

A. The FRA disk group has an asynchronous I/O bottleneckB. The least number of I/Os are performed on the last data file in the listC. The number of times that the backup or restore process directed the OS to wait until an I/O was complete is

the highest for the last data file in the listD. The number of times that the backup or restore process made an OS call to poll for I/O completion in

Nonblocking mode is the least for the FRA disk group

Correct Answer: ASection: Managing ResourcesExplanation


QUESTION 12Your database interface is running. A user SCOTT starts a SQL *Plus session, and issues the following query:SQL> SELECT * FROM sales;

Which process would retrieve the result from the database and return it to the client program?

A. User processB. Server processC. System Monitor (SMON)D. Process Monitor (PMON)E. Checkpoint process (CKPT)



QUESTION 13You observed the following output for a user session:

What do you infer from the preceding output?

A. Resumable set for session with sid 18B. The user session has entered into a deadlockC. The database instance is enabled to use asynchronous commitD. The threshold warning limit is exceeded for the tablespace that is used by the user session



QUESTION 14The database is configured in ARCHIVELOG mode and regular complete database backups are taken.The loss of which two types of files may require a recovery with the RESETLOGS option? (Choose two)

A. Control filesB. Password filesC. Inactive online redo log fileD. Archived log files required to perform recoveryE. Newly created tablespace which is not backed up

Correct Answer: ADSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The RESETLOGS options is required in:1. Imcomplete Recovery2. Change of control file

So that, the control file and archived redo logs are required.

QUESTION 15Multiple RMAN sessions are connected to the database instance. Examine the following output when backupcommands are running in server sessions: What could have helped you to correlate server sessions withchannels?

A. Implement RMAN multiplexingB. Set the DEBUG ON in the RMAN scriptC. Specify the command ID in the RMAN scriptD. Use a tag with the RMAN BACKUP command



QUESTION 16Examine the following scenario: The target database instance is running. The most recent backup available forthe target database was taken two days ago. Log files switches have occurred in last two days. The targetdatabase is duplicated on the same host, using the Recovery Manager (RMAN) duplicate command as follows:RMAN> RUN { ALLOCATE AUXILIARY CHANNEL aux 1 DEVICE TYPE DI SK; DUPLICATE TARGET DATABASE TO auxdb;}

Which statement is true about the duplicate database in this scenario?

A. It contains data till the last backupB. It contains all data from target database until the current timeC. It contains all data from only the committed transactions in the target databaseD. It contains all data except that which is used by the transactions in the current online redo file of target

database



QUESTION 17Examine the following command:SQL> ALTER TABLE booking SHRINK SPACE COMPACT;

Which activity is performed when the preceding command is executed?

A. The shrink operation touches every block in the BOOKING table

B. The high-water mark (HWM) for the BOOKING table is shifted from its original position

C. The progress of the shrink operation is saved in the bitmap blocks of the BOOKING table

D. The data manipulation language (DML) triggers on the BOOKING table are executed because the shrinkoperation is internally handled by the INSERT/DELETE operation



QUESTION 18The RECYCLEBIN parameter is set to ON for your database. You drop a table, PRODUCTS, from the SCOTTschema.

Which two statements are true regarding the outcome of this action? (Choose two)

A. All the related indexes and views are automatically droppedB. The flashback drop feature can recover only the table structureC. Only the related indexes are dropped whereas views are invalidatedD. The flashback drop feature can recover both the table structure and its data

Correct Answer: CDSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 19You plan to execute the following command to perform a Flashback Database operation in your database:SQL> FLASHBACK DATABASE TO TIMESTAMP (SYSDATE - 5/2 4);

Which two statements are true about this? (Choose two)

A. The database must have multiplexed redo log filesB. The database must be in the MOUNT state to execute the command

C. The database must be in the NOMOUNT state to execute the command

D. The database must be opened in RESTRICTED mode before this operation

E. The database must be opened with the RESETLOGS option after the flashback operation

Correct Answer: BESection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 20View the Exhibit and examine the steps that you executed to create a database resource plan.

Subsequently, you execute the following procedure which results in an error:SQL> EXECUTE dbms_resources_manager.validate_pendin g_area ( );

What could be the reason?

Exhibit:

A. The pending area is automatically submitted after the plan creationB. The procedure must be executed before creating the resources plan directiveC. The SYS_GROUP resource consumer group is not included in the resource plan directive

D. The OTHER_GROUPS resources consumer group is not included in the resource plan directive



QUESTION 21Examine the following command that is used to duplicate a database on the same host:RMAN> RUN{ ALLOCATE AUXILIARY CHANNEL aux 1 DEVICE TYPE DI SK; DUPLICATE TARGET DATABASE TO auxdb SKIP READONL Y; }

Which two statements describe the effect after the database is duplicated successfully? (Choose two)

A. The data files of the read-only tablespaces in the target database are not duplicatedB. The read-only tablespaces in the target database are still defined in new the databaseC. The read-only tablespaces in the target database are changed to online after duplicationD. The data files of the read-only tablespaces in the target database get duplicatedE. The read-only tablespaces in the target database are not defined in the new database

Correct Answer: ABSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 22Identify two situations in which you can use Data Recovery Advisor for recovery. (Choose two.)

A. The user has dropped an important table that needs to be recovered.B. The database files are corrupted when the database is open.C. You are not able to start up the database instance because the required database files are missing.D. The archived log files are missing for which backup is not available.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

QUESTION 23Examine the following values of the initialization parameters in the database having the SID ORCL:BACKGROUND_DUMP_DEST=/u01/app/oracle/product/11.1.0 /db_1/bdump USER_DUMP_DEST=/u01/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db_1/ udump CORE_DUMP_DEST=/u01/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db_1/ cdump DIAGNOSTIC_DEST=

The environment variables have the following value:ORACLE_BASE=/u01/app/oracleORACLE_HOME=/u01/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db_1

What is the location of the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) home?

A. /u01/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db_1B. /u01/app/oracleC. $ORACLE_HOME/bdumpD. $ORACLE_HOME/log


Explanation/Reference:The Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) is a directory structure that is stored outside of the database. It istherefore available for problem diagnosis when the database is down.

The ADR root directory is known as ADR base. Its location is set by the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST initializationparameter. If this parameter is omitted or left null, the database sets DIAGNOSTIC_DEST upon startup asfollows:

If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to the directory designatedby ORACLE_BASE.

If environment variable ORACLE_BASE is not set, DIAGNOSTIC_DEST is set to ORACLE_HOME/log.

QUESTION 24Observe the following PL/SQL block:BEGIN dbms_spm.configure('SPACE_BUDGET_PERCENT', 30);END;

Which statement is correct regarding the above PL/SQL block?

A. It automatically purges the SQL management objects when SMB occupies more than 30% of the SYSAUXtablespace.

B. It reserves 30% of the space in the SYSAUX tablespace for SQL Management Base (SMB).

C. It reserves 30% of the space in the SYSTEM tablespace for SMB.

D. It generates a weekly warning in the alert log file when SMB occupies more than 30% of the SYSAUXtablespace.



QUESTION 25You are managing an Oracle Database 11g ASM instance having three disks in a disk group with ASMcompatibility attribute set to 11.1.0 and redundancy set to high. One of the disks in the disk group becomesunavailable because of power failure.

Which statements will be true in this scenario? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The disk is immediately dropped from the disk group.B. The ASM tracks the extents that are modified during the outage.C. The ASM migrates the extents from the unavailable disk to the remaining disks.D. The disk automatically goes offline.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 26Which statements are true regarding table compression? (Choose all that apply.)

A. It saves disk space and reduces memory usage.B. It saves disk space but has no effect on memory usage.C. It incurs extra CPU overhead during DML as well as direct loading operations.D. It incurs extra CPU overhead during DML but not direct loading operations.E. It requires uncompress operation during I/O.

Correct Answer: ACSection: Space ManagementExplanation

QUESTION 27You are working as a DBA on the decision support system.There is a business requirement to track and store all transactions for at least three years for a few tables in thedatabase. Automatic undo management is enabled in the database. Which configuration should you use to accomplish this task?

A. Enable Flashback Data Archive for the tables.B. Specify undo retention guarantee for the database.C. Enable supplemental logging for the database.D. Query V$UNDOSTAT to determine the amount of undo that will be generated and create an undo tablespace

for that size.E. Create Flashback Data Archive on the tablespace on which the tables are stored.

Correct Answer: ASection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 28Which components are needed for successful and most efficient recovery.

A. The backup RB3 and the current online redo log filesB. the backup RB2 and the archived redo log files after the log sequence number 15622C. Backup R81 and the archived redo log hies after the log sequence number 12871D. The backup RB3 and the archived redo log files after the log sequence number 16721


QUESTION 29You are managing an Oracle Database 11g instance with ASM storage. You lost an ASM disk group DATA.You have RMAN backup of data as well as ASM metadata backup. You want to re-create the missing diskgroup by using the ASMCMD md_restore command.

Which of these methods would you use to achieve this? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Restore the disk group with the exact configuration as the backed-up disk group, using the same disk groupname, same set of disks, failure group configurations, and data on the disk group.

B. Restore the disk group with the exact configuration as the backed-up disk group, using the same disk group

name, same set of disks, and failure group configurations.C. Restore the disk group with changed disk group specification, failure group specification, disk group name,

and other disk attributes.D. Restore metadata in an existing disk group by passing the existing disk group name as an input parameter.

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Purpose

The md_restore command restores disk groups from a metadata backup file.

Syntax and Description

md_restore backup_file [--silent] [--full|--nodg|--newdg -o 'old_diskgroup:new_d iskgroup [,...]'] [-S sql_script_file] [-G 'diskgroup [,diskgrou p...]']

backup_fileReads the metadata information from backup_file.

--silentIgnore errors. Typically, if md_restore encounters an error, it stops. Specifying this flag ignores any errors.

--fullSpecifies to create a disk group and restore metadata.

--nodgSpecifies to restore metadata only.

--newdg -o old_diskgroup:new_diskgroup]Specifies to create a disk group with a different name when restoring metadata. The -o option is required with --newdg.

-S sql_script_fileWrite SQL commands to the specified SQL script file instead of executing the commands.

-G diskgroupSelect the disk groups to be restored. If no disk groups are defined, then all disk groups are restored.

QUESTION 30Which statement describes the effect of table redefinition on the triggers attached to the table?

A. All triggers on the table are invalidated and are automatically revalidated with the next DML execution on thetable.

B. All triggers on the table are invalidated and must be manually recompiled before the next DML execution onthe table.

C. All triggers on the table remain valid.D. Only triggers that are affected by the changes to the structure of the table are invalidated and automatically

revalidated with the next DML execution on the table.


QUESTION 31You plan to collect the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) data every Monday morning for a month. Youwant Oracle Database to automatically create a baseline every Monday and remove the old baseline. What isthe correct action to achieve this?

A. Create and populate a SQL Tuning Set from the AWR on every Monday.B. Change the RETENTION setting for the AWR snapshots to 7 days on Monday.C. Create a repeating baseline template.D. Insert a finding directive for future ADDM tasks.


QUESTION 32Which three statements are true regarding persistent lightweight jobs? (Choose three.)

A. Persistent lightweight jobs modify several tables in the data dictionary to generate a lot of redo.B. The user cannot set privileges on persistent lightweight jobs.C. Persistent lightweight jobs are useful when users need to create a large number of jobs in a short time.D. Persistent lightweight jobs are useful when users need to create a small number of jobs that run

infrequently.E. The use of a template is mandatory to create persistent lightweight jobs.

Correct Answer: BCESection: Administering the SchedulerExplanation

QUESTION 33Your database initialization parameter file has the following entry:SEC_MAX_FAILED_LOGIN_ATTEMPTS=3

Which statement is true regarding this setting?

A. It drops the connection after the specified number of login attempts fail for any user.B. It is enforced only if the password profile is enabled for the user.C. It locks the user account after the specified number of attempts.D. It drops the connection after the specified number of login attempts fail only for users who have the SYSDBA

privilege.



QUESTION 34Which statement is true regarding virtual private catalogs?

A. A virtual private catalog owner can create a local stored script, and have read/write access to a globalstored script.

B. The virtual private catalog owner cannot create and modify the stored scripts.C. The set of views and synonyms that make up the virtual private catalog is stored in the schema of the

RMAN recovery catalog owner.D. To perform most of the RMAN operations, the virtual catalog owner must have the SYSDBA or SYSOPER

privilege on the target database.



QUESTION 35Which tasks can be accomplished using the Enterprise Manager Support Workbench in Oracle Database 11g?(Choose all that apply.)

A. Generate reports on data failure such as data file failures.B. You can track the Service Request (SR) and implement repairs.C. You can package and upload diagnostic data to Oracle Support.D. You can manually run health checks to gather diagnostic data for a problem.


QUESTION 36What are the advantages of variable extent size support for large ASM files? (Choose two.)

A. It improves resync operations when the disk comes online after being taken offline for maintenancepurposes.

B. It improves performance in the extended cluster configuration by reading from a local copy of an extent.C. Fewer extent pointers are needed to describe the file and less memory is required to manage the extent

maps in the shared pool.D. This feature enables faster file opens because of the reduction in the amount of memory that is required to

store file extents.


QUESTION 37Which two are the uses of the ASM metadata backup and restore (AMBR) feature? (Choose two.)

A. It can be used to back up all data on ASM disks.B. It can be used to recover the damaged ASM disk group along with the data.C. It can be used to gather information about a pre-existing ASM disk group with disk paths, disk name, failure

groups, attributes, templates, and alias directory structure.D. It can be used to re-create the ASM disk group with its attributes.



QUESTION 38Which two changes and their effect on the system can be tested by using the Database Replay feature?(Choose two.)

A. multiplexing of the control fileB. adding the redo log member to the databaseC. database and operating system upgradesD. changing the database storage to ASM-managed storage


QUESTION 39Which is the source used by Automatic SQL Tuning that runs as part of the AUTOTASK framework?

A. SQL statements that are part of the AWR baseline onlyB. SQL statements based on the AWR top SQL identificationC. SQL statements that are part of the available SQL Tuning Set (STS) onlyD. SQL statements that are available in the cursor cache and executed by a user other than SYS



QUESTION 40While performing the backup of the flash recovery area, you notice that one of the archived redo log files ismissing. You have multiple destinations for archived redo log files. What implications does it have on thebackup of the flash recovery area?

A. The backup fails because one of the archived redo log files is missing.B. The backup succeeds but it would be without the missing archived log.C. During backup, you are prompted for the alternative destination for the missing archived redo log file.D. The backup succeeds because it fails over to one of the alternative archived redo log destinations.

Correct Answer: DSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation

QUESTION 41You are managing an Oracle Database 11g instance and an Oracle Database 10g instance on the samemachine. Both instances use the ASM instance as storage. Which statement regarding the ASM disk groupcompatibility attributes are true in this scenario? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The database-compatibility version settings for each instance must be greater than or equal to the RDBMScompatibility of all ASM disk groups used by that database instances.

B. RDBMS compatibility and the database version determines whether a database instance can mount theASM disk group.

C. The RDBMS compatibility settings for a disk group control the format of data structures for ASM metadataon the disk.

D. ASM compatibility controls which features for the ASM will be enabled.

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

QUESTION 42Which three statements are true regarding the functioning of the Autotask Background Process (ABP)?(Choose three.)

A. It creates jobs without considering the priorities associated with them.B. It translates tasks into jobs for execution by the scheduler.C. It determines the list of jobs that must be created for each maintenance window.D. It is spawned by the MMON background process at the start of the maintenance window.E. It maintains a repository in the SYSTEM tablespace to store the history of the execution of all tasks.

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:AutoTask Overview

Oracle 11g added a new component to the Oracle automated task infrastructure, that began in Oracle 10g,called AutoTask. AutoTask provides a central component that is responsible for management of scheduledmaintenance tasks.

AutoTask Architecture

AutoTask builds on much of the existing architecture of Oracle 10g. The AutoTask architecture consists of thefollowing components:

AutoTask Background Process (ABP) - APB is spawned by MMON and is responsible for manag ing theAutoTask features . It coordinates the AutoTask clients and the scheduler. It also maintains AutoTask relatedhistory that can be seen in the DBA_AUTOTASK_TASK view.

AutoTask Clients - Automated maintenance tasks that are scheduled by AutoTask. Oracle 11g includes clientsfor statistics gathering, the Segment Advisor, and the Automatic SQL Tuning Advisor.

The AutoTask Maintenance Windows - Individual maintenance windows exist for different days of the week.These windows can be modified as required.

Resource Manager - A resource plan is enabled that is designed to limit the amount of resources that theAutoTask tasks can consume. This resource plan can be modified as required.

OEM - You can manage the start time and duration of the various AutoTask maintenance windows and add orremove maintenance tasks with OEM. You can also use OEM to enable or disable maintenance tasks.

The Scheduler - AutoTask operations rely heavily on the Scheduler. The AutoTask architecture uses schedulerwindows and the scheduler infrastructure to execute AutoTask tasks.

QUESTION 43

Which statements are true regarding the concept of problems and incidents in the fault diagnosabilityinfrastructure for Oracle Database 11g? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Only the incident metadata and dumps are stored in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR).B. The problem key is the same as the incident number.C. The database sends an incident alert to the Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Home page.D. Every problem has a problem key, which is a text string that describes the problem.E. The database makes an entry into the alert log file when problems and incidents occur.

Correct Answer: CDESection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Reference at here

Fault Diagnosability Infrastructure Overview

The fault diagnosability infrastructure aids in preventing, detecting, diagnosing, and resolving problems. Theproblems that are targeted in particular are critical errors such as those caused by code bugs, metadatacorruption, and customer data corruption.

When a critical error occurs, it is assigned an incident number, and diagnostic data for the error (such as tracefiles) are immediately captured and tagged with this number. The data is then stored in the AutomaticDiagnostic Repository (ADR)—a file-based repository outside the database—where it can later be retrieved byincident number and analyzed.

About Incidents and ProblemsA problem is a critical error in a database instance, Oracle Automatic Storage Management (Oracle ASM)instance, or other Oracle product or component. Critical errors manifest as internal errors, such as ORA-00600,or other severe errors, such as ORA-07445 (operating system exception) or ORA-04031 (out of memory in theshared pool). Problems are tracked in the ADR. Each problem has a problem key, which is a text string thatdescribes the problem. It includes an error code (such as ORA 600) and in some cases, one or more errorparameters.

An incident is a single occurrence of a problem. When a problem (critical error) occurs multiple times, anincident is created for each occurrence. Incidents are timestamped and tracked in the Automatic DiagnosticRepository (ADR). Each incident is identified by a numeric incident ID, which is unique within the ADR. Whenan incident occurs, the database:

Makes an entry in the alert log.Sends an incident alert to Oracle Enterprise Manager (Enterprise Manager).Gathers first-failure diagnostic data about the incident in the form of dump files (incident dumps).Tags the incident dumps with the incident ID.Stores the incident dumps in an ADR subdirectory created for that incident.

QUESTION 44What two statements are true regarding the recommendations received from the SQL Access Advisor?(Choose two.)

A. It cannot generate recommendations that support multiple workload queries.B. It can recommend partitioning on tables provided that the workloads have some predicates and joins on the

columns of the NUMBER or DATE type.C. It can recommend partitioning only on tables that have at least 10,000 rows.D. It can recommend only B-tree indexes and not bitmap or function-based indexes.

Correct Answer: BC

Section: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

QUESTION 45You are managing Oracle Database 11g with an ASM storage with high redundancy. The following commandwas issued to drop the disks from the dga disk group after five hours:ALTER DISKGROUP dga OFFLINE DISKS IN FAILGROUP f2 D ROP AFTER 5H;

Which statement is true in this scenario?

A. It starts the ASM fast mirror resync.B. All the disks in the dga disk group would be OFFLINE and the DISK_REPAIR_TIME disk attribute would be

set to 5 hours.C. It drops all disk paths from the dga disk group.D. All the disks in the dga disk group in failure group f2 would be OFFLINE and the DISK_REPAIR_TIME disk

attribute would be set to 5 hours.



QUESTION 46Which statement describes the significance of the CHANGE FAILURE command in RMAN? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. It is used to change failure priority only for HIGH or LOW priorities.

B. It is used to execute the advised repair script.C. It is used to change failure priority only for the CRITICAL priority.

D. It is used to explicitly close the open failures.E. It is used to inform the database about the repair after the repair script executes.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 47Which statements are true regarding the creation of an incident package file by using the EM WorkbenchSupport? (Choose all that apply.)

A. You can add or remove the trace files to the package.B. You can create the incremental incident package ZIP file for new or modified diagnostic information for the

incident package already created.C. You can add SQL test cases to the incident package.D. You cannot create an incremental incident package when the physical files are purged from the ADR.

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Refer to here

About Quick Packaging and Custom Packaging

The Enterprise Manager Support Workbench provides two methods for creating and uploading an incidentpackage: the quick packaging method and the custom packaging method.

Quick Packaging—This is the more automated method with a minimum of steps, organized in a guidedworkflow (a wizard). You select a single problem, provide a package name and description, and then scheduleupload of the package contents, either immediately or at a specified date and time. The Support Workbenchautomatically places diagnostic data related to the problem into the package, finalizes the package, creates thezip file, and then uploads the file. With this method, you do not have the opportunity to add, edit, or removepackage files or add other diagnostic data such as SQL test cases. However, it is the simplest and quickestway to get first-failure diagnostic data to Oracle Support. Quick packaging is the method used in the workflowdescribed in "Investigating, Reporting, and Resolving a Problem".

Note that when quick packaging is complete, the package that was created by the wizard remains. You canthen modify the package with custom packaging operations at a later time and manually reupload.

Custom Packaging—This is the more manual method, with more steps. It is intended for expert SupportWorkbench users who want more control over the packaging process. With custom packaging, you can createa new package with one or more problems, or you can add one or more problems to an existing package. Youcan then perform a variety of operations on the new or updated package, including:

Adding or removing problems or incidentsAdding, editing, or removing trace files in the packageAdding or removing external files of any typeAdding other diagnostic data such as SQL test casesManually finalizing the package and then viewing package contents to determine if you must edit or removesensitive data or remove files to reduce package size.

You might conduct these operations over a number of days, before deciding that you have enough diagnosticinformation to send to Oracle Support.

With custom packaging, you create the zip file and request upload to Oracle Support as two separate steps.Each of these steps can be performed immediately or scheduled for a future date and time.

......

Select the Full or Incremental option to generate a full package zip file or an incremental package zipfile.

For a full package zip file, all the contents of the package (original contents and all correlated data) are alwaysadded to the zip file.

For an incremental package zip file, only the diagnostic information that is new or modified since the last timethat you created a zip file for the same package is added to the zip file. For example, if trace information wasappended to a trace file since that file was last included in the generated physical file for a package, the tracefile is added to the incremental package zip file. Conversely, if no changes were made to a trace file since itwas last uploaded for a package, that trace file is not included in the incremental package zip file.

QUESTION 48The application tables owned by the user TEST in a test database need to be exported to the APPS schema inthe production database by using Data Pump. Which option of Data Pump Import would you use to accomplishthis?

A. ownerB. touserC. attachD. remap_schema


QUESTION 49You want to track and store all transactional changes to a table over its lifetime.To accomplish this task, you enabled Flashback Data Archive with the retention of 5 years. After some time, the business requirement changed and you were asked to change the retention from 5 yearsto 3 years. To accomplish this, you issued the following command:ALTER FLASHBACK ARCHIVE fla1 MODIFY RETENTION 3 YEA R;


A. The command produces an error because the retention time cannot be reduced.B. All historical data is retained but the subsequent flashback data archives are maintained for only three

years.C. All historical data is purged and the new flashback data archives are maintained for three years.D. All historical data older than three years is purged from the flashback archive FLA1.



QUESTION 50You are managing an Oracle Database 11g database with ASM storage. The ASM disk group has the COMPATIBLE.ASM attribute set to 11.1. Which statements are true regarding extent management and allocation units in the ASM disk group? (Chooseall that apply.)

A. The au_size disk group attribute determines the size of allocation units in the disk group.

B. The allocation unit size may vary but the extent size is fixed.C. The allocation unit size and extent size are fixed for all the disks in a disk group and cannot be changed.D. Extent management is completely automated.



QUESTION 51Which are the prerequisites for performing flashback transactions on your database? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Undo retention guarantee for the database must be configured.B. Supplemental log must be enabled for the primary key.C. Supplemental log must be enabled.D. Execute permission on the DBMS_FLASHBACK package must be granted to the user.

Correct Answer: BCDSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 52View the Exhibit to examine the parameter values. You are planning to set the value for the MEMORY_TARGETparameter of your database instance.What value would you assign?

Exhibit:

A. 1440 MB

B. 90 MBC. 362 MBD. 272 MB



QUESTION 53You are managing an Oracle Database 11g database. You want to take the backup of MULT_DATA, a big filetablespace of size 100 TB on tape drive, but you have tapedrives of only 10 GB each.

Which method would accomplish the task quickly and efficiently?

A. parallel image copy backupB. backup with MAXPIECESIZE configured for the channel

C. parallel backup with MAXPIECESIZE configured for the channel

D. intrafile parallel backup

Correct Answer: DSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The MAXPIECESIZE option is to limit the size of backup piece. not to split the big file into pieces.

Configuring the Maximum Size of Backup PiecesBackup piece size is an issue when it exceeds the maximum file size permitted by the file system or mediamanagement software. You can use the MAXPIECESIZE parameter of the CONFIGURE CHANNEL orALLOCATE CHANNEL command to limit the size of backup pieces.For example, to limit the backup piece size to 2 gigabytes or less, you can configure the automatic DISKchannel as follows and then run BACKUP DATABASE:CONFIGURE CHANNEL DEVICE TYPE DISK MAXPIECESIZE 2G;BACKUP DATABASE;

We should use the SECTION SIZE option to split the big file into sections to the multiple backup devices.

SECTION SIZE sizeSpec Specifies the size of each backup section produced during a data filebackup.By setting this parameter, RMAN can create a multisection backup. In a multisection backup, RMAN creates abackup piece that contains one file section, which is a contiguous range of blocks in a file. All sections of amultisection backup are the same size. You can create a multisection backup for a data file, but not a data filecopy.File sections enable RMAN to create multiple steps for the backup of a single large data file. RMANchannels can process each step independently and in parallel, with each channel producing one section ofa multisection backup set.If you specify a section size that is larger than the size of the file, then RMAN does not use multisection backupfor the file. If you specify a small section size that would produce more than 256 sections, then RMANincreases the section size to a value that results in exactly 256 sections.Depending on where you specify this parameter in the RMAN syntax, you can specify different section sizes fordifferent files in the same backup job.Note: You cannot use SECTION SIZE with MAXPIECESIZE or with INCREMENTAL LEVEL 1.

QUESTION 54

You performed the RMAN database backup with the KEEP option. Which two statements are true regarding thisbackup? (Choose two.)

A. The backup contains data files, the server parameter file, and the control file even if the control fileautobackup is disabled.

B. The KEEP option overrides the configured retention policy.

C. The backup contains only data files and archived redo log files.D. The KEEP option is an attribute of an individual backup piece.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


QUESTION 55You are managing an Oracle Database 11g database. You want to take a backup on tape drives of the USERStablespace that has a single data file of 900 MB. You have tape drives of 300 MB each. To accomplish thebackup, you issued the following RMAN command:RMAN>BACKUP SECTION SIZE 300M TABLESPACE users;

What configuration should be effected to accomplish faster and optimized backups by using the abovecommand?

A. The SBT channel must be configured, with the default parallelism setting for the SBT device set to 1.

B. The COMPATIBLE initialization parameter for the database instance must be set to at least 10.0.

C. The SBT channel must be configured, with the parallelism setting for the SBT device set to 3.

D. The SBT channel must be configured, with the MAXPIECESIZE set to 300 MB.


Explanation/Reference:Dividing the Backup of a Large Data File into Secti ons ( link )

If you specify the SECTION SIZE parameter on the BACKUP command, then RMAN creates a backup set inwhich each backup piece contains the blocks from one file section. A file section is a contiguous range ofblocks in a file. This type of backup is called a multisection backup.

Note: You cannot specify SECTION SIZE with MAXPIECESIZE.

The purpose of multisection backups is to enable RMAN channels to back up a single large file in parallel.RMAN divides the work among multiple channels, with each channel backing up one file section in a file.Backing up a file in separate sections can improve the performance of backups of large datafiles.

If a multisection backup completes successfully, then none of the backup sets generated during the backupcontain a partial data file. If a multisection backup is unsuccessful, then it is possible for the RMAN metadata tocontain a record for a partial backup set. RMAN does not consider partial backups for restore and recovery.You must use the DELETE command to delete the partial backup set.

If you specify a section size that is larger than the size of the file, then RMAN does not use multisection backupfor the file. If you specify a small section size that would produce more than 256 sections, then RMANincreases the section size to a value that results in exactly 256 sections.

To make a multisection backup:

1. Start RMAN and connect to a target database and recovery catalog (if used).2. If necessary, configure channel parallelism so that RMAN can make the backup parallel.3. Execute BACKUP with the SECTION SIZE parameter.

For example, suppose that the users tablespace contains a single data file of 900 MB. Also assume that threeSBT channels are configured, with the parallelism setting for the SBT device set to 3. You can break up thedata file in this tablespace into file sections as shown in the following example:

BACKUP SECTION SIZE 300M TABLESPACE users;In this example, each of the three SBT channels backs up a 300 MB file section of the users data file.

QUESTION 56The ADMIN_EMP table has columns EMPNO, ENAME, DEPTNO, and SAL. It has a materialized viewEMP_MV with a materialized log and an ENAME_IDX index on the ENAME column. You need to perform anonline table redefinition on the ADMIN_EMP table to move it from the TBS1 tablespace to the TBS2 tablespacein the same schema.

What action is required for the dependent objects when you perform online redefinition on the table?

A. The materialized view should have a complete refresh performed after the online table redefinition iscompleted.

B. The materialized view should have a fast refresh performed after the online table redefinition is completed.C. The materialized view, materialized log, and the index should be dropped and re-created after the online

table redefinition is complete.D. The materialized view and materialized log should be dropped and all constraints disabled and re-created

after the online table redefinition is complete.


Explanation/Reference:Restrictions for Online Redefinition of Tables

After redefining a table that has a materialized view log, the subsequent refresh of any dependentmaterialized view must be a complete refresh.

QUESTION 57You issued the following command to mount the DATA disk group in restricted mode:ALTER DISKGROUP data MOUNT RESTRICT;


A. The client RDBMS instance can access the file as a read-only file.B. A new disk cannot be added to a disk group.C. A disk in a disk group can be taken offline.D. The client RDBMS instance cannot access the files in the disk group.


Explanation/Reference:MOUNT (link)

Specify MOUNT to mount the disk groups in the local Oracle ASM instance. Specify ALL MOUNT to mount alldisk groups specified in the ASM_DISKGROUPS initialization parameter. File operations can only be performedwhen a disk group is mounted. If Oracle ASM is running in a cluster or a standalone server managed by OracleRestart, then the MOUNT clause automatically brings the corresponding resource online.

RESTRICTED | NORMAL Use these clauses to determine the manner in which the disk groups aremounted.

In the RESTRICTED mode, the disk group is mounted in single-instance exclusive mode. No other Oracle ASMinstance in the same cluster can mount that disk group. In this mode the disk group is not usable by anyOracle ASM client.

In the NORMAL mode, the disk group is mounted in shared mode, so that other Oracle ASM instances andclients can access the disk group. This is the default.

QUESTION 58Your company wants to upgrade the current production database to the RAC environment. To perform testingbefore migrating to the RAC environment, you performed the workload capture on the production database torecord the peak workload. You set up the test RAC database and want to replay the recorded workload on thetestmachine. Note the following steps that you may require to replay the database workload:1) Preprocess the captured workload.2) Restart the database in RESTRICTED mode.3) Set up the Replay Clients.4) Restore the test database to the point when the capture started.5) Remap connections.Arrange the steps required in the correct sequence to accomplish this task on the test machine.

A. 1, 4, 5, 3 (2 is not required.)B. 1, 4, 3, 5 (2 is not required.)C. 1, 2, 4, 5 (3 is not required.)D. 2, 1, 5, 3, 4E. 1, 2, 4, 5, 3


Explanation/Reference:11.1 Steps for Replaying a Database Workload

Proper planning of the workload replay and preparation of the replay system ensures that the replay will beaccurate. Before replaying a database workload, review and complete the following steps as appropriate:

Setting Up the Replay DirectoryRestoring the DatabaseResolving References to External SystemsRemapping ConnectionsUser RemappingSpecifying Replay OptionsUsing Filters with Workload ReplaySetting Up Replay Clients

QUESTION 59You are working on the APPDB database as a DBA. The database has a default Flashback Data Archive DFLA1

created on it. You issued the following command to drop the Flashback Archive FLA1:DROP FLASHBACK ARCHIVE fla1;

What is the effect of this command?

A. The Flashback Archive FLA1 is dropped only if it is empty.

B. The tablespace having Flashback Archive is dropped.C. The Flashback Archive FLA1 is dropped after moving the existing data in it to the default Flashback

Archive.D. The Flashback Data Archive and historical data are dropped.



QUESTION 60Which two prerequisites are needed for performing workload capture and replay? (Choose two.)

A. Close all sessions performing queries using database links.B. running the database in shared server modeC. The database on which the workload is replayed has to be a restore of the original database to a specific

SCN.D. setting up the directory to capture the workload


QUESTION 61Which two statements are true regarding Health Monitor checks in Oracle Database 11g? (Choose two.)

A. Health Monitor checks can be used to scan the contents of the redo log and archive logs for accessibilityand corruption.

B. Health Monitor checks can be used to verify the integrity of database files and report failures if these filesare inaccessible, corrupt or inconsistent.

C. Health Monitor checks can be used to verify the contents of dictionary entries for each dictionary object andfix it automatically.

D. Health Monitor checks are always initiated manually when there is some critical error.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 62View the Exhibit for some of the current parameter settings. A user logs in to the HR schema and issues thefollowing commands:SQL> CREATE TABLE emp (empno NUMBER(3), ename VARCH AR2(20), sal NUMBER(8,2));SQL> INSERT INTO emp(empno,ename) VALUES(1,'JAMES') ;

At this moment, a second user also logs in to the HR schema and issues the following command:

SQL> ALTER TABLE emp MODIFY sal NUMBER(10,2);

What happens in the above scenario?

Exhibit:

A. The second user's session immediately produces the resource busy error.B. The second user's command executes successfully.C. The second user's session waits for a time period before producing the resource busy error.D. A deadlock is created.



QUESTION 63In which situations will the ASM metadata backup help you recover the ASM disk in a disk group? (Choose allthat apply.)

A. when one or more file directory paths are accidentally deleted from an ASM disk groupB. when one of the disks in a disk group is accidentally unpluggedC. when the data file on an ASM disk group gets corruptedD. when one or more disks in an ASM disk group are lost



QUESTION 64Note the following statements that use flashback technology:1. FLASHBACK TABLE <table> TO SCN <scn>;2. SELECT * FROM <table> AS OF SCN 123456;3. FLASHBACK TABLE <table> TO BEFORE DROP;4. FLASHBACK DATABASE TO TIMESTAMP <timestamp>;5. SELECT * FROM <table> VERSIONS AS OF SCN 123456 AND 123999;

Which of these statements will be dependent on the availability of relevant undo data in the undo segment?

A. 1, 2, and 5

B. 1, 3, and 4C. 2, 3, 4, and 5D. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5


Explanation/Reference:The BEFORE DROP clause uses Recycle Bin;The FLASHBACK DATABASE uses flashback logs at FRA area.

QUESTION 65Examine the CREATE DISKGROUP command used to create a disk group:SQL> CREATE DISKGROUP misc EXTERNAL REDUNDANCYDISK 'ORCL: FRA3' NAME misc1, 'ORCL: FRA4' NAME mis c2;

In which situation would you use this method of disk group creation?

A. When two-way disk mirroring is required for the allocation unitsB. When three-way disk mirroring is required for the allocation unitsC. When using hardware mirroring or RAIDD. When disk mirroring is required for the Automatic Storage Management (ASM) disks



QUESTION 66Which three tasks can be performed using a duplicate database? (Choose three.)

A. Testing the backup and recovery proceduresB. Testing the upgrade of an Oracle database to a new releaseC. Testing the effect of an application changes on database performanceD. Continuously updating archive log files from the target database to support failover

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 67The user SYS creates a job by using the following command:

BEGIN DBMS_SCHEDULER.CREATE_JOB ( job_name => 'update_sales', job_type => 'STORED-PROCEDURE', job_action => 'OPS.SALES_PKG.UPDATE_SALES_S UMMARY', start_date => '28-DEC-07 07.00.00 PM Austra lia/Sydney', repeat_interval => 'FREQ=DAILY; INTERVAL=2' , end_date => '20-JAN-08 07.00.00 PM Australi a/Sydney', comments => 'New sales job');END;

/

Which two statements are true about the job that was created by the preceding command? (Choose two.)

A. The job is enabled by default after creationB. The job is automatically dropped after the end dateC. The job executes with the privileges of the user SYSD. The globalization environment that exists at the time of the job creation prevails at the job runs

Correct Answer: BCSection: Automating Tasks with the SchedulerExplanation

Explanation/Reference:By default, jobs are created with auto_drop set to TRUE.

end_dateThis attribute specifies the date and time after which the job expires and is no longer run. After the end_date, ifauto_drop is TRUE, the job is dropped. If auto_drop is FALSE, the job is disabled and the STATE of the job isset to COMPLETED.If no value for end_date is specified, the job repeats forever unless max_runs or max_failures is set, in whichcase the job stops when either value is reached.The value for end_date must be after the value for start_date. If it is not, an error is generated when the job isenabled.

QUESTION 68Tape streaming is not happening while performing RMAN tape backup. On investigation, you find that it is notbecause of the incremental backup or the empty file backup and that RMAN is sending data blocks to the tapedrive fast enough.What could be a solution to make tape streaming happen during the backup?

A. Configure backup optimizationB. Configure the channel to increase MAXOPENFILES

C. Configure the channel to increase the capacity with the RATE parameterD. Configure the channel to adjust the tape buffer size with the BLKSIZE option



QUESTION 69You are using Recovery Manager (RMAN) with a recovery catalog to back up your production database. Thebackups and the archived redo log files are copied to a tape drive on a daily basis. Because of media failure,you lost your production database completely along with the recovery catalog database. You want to recoverthe target database and make it functional. You consider performing the following steps to accomplish the task:1. Restore an autobackup of the server parameter file.2. Restore the control file3. Start the target database instance4. Mount the database5. Restore the data files6. Open the database with RESETLOGS option7. Recover the data files8. Set DBID for the target database

Which option illustrates the correct sequence that you must use?

A. 8, 1, 3, 2, 4, 5, 7, 6B. 1, 8, 3, 4, 2, 5, 7, 6C. 1, 3, 4, 2, 8, 5, 6, 7D. 1, 3, 2, 4, 6, 5, 7, 8


Explanation/Reference:Recovering the Database After a Disaster

The procedure for disaster recovery is similar to the procedure for recovering the database with a backupcontrol file in NOCATALOG mode. If you are restoring the database to a new host, then you should also reviewthe considerations described in "Restoring a Database on a New Host".

This scenario assumes that the Linux server on which your database was running has been damaged beyondrepair. Fortunately, you backed up the database to Oracle Secure Backup and have the tapes available. Thescenario assumes the following:

Oracle Database is already installed on the new host.You are restoring the database to a new Linux host with the same directory structure as the old host.You have one tape drive containing backups of all the data files and archived redo logs through log 1124,and autobackups of the control file and server parameter file.You do not use a recovery catalog with the database.

To recover the database on the new host:

1. If possible, restore or re-create all relevant network files such as tnsnames.ora and listener.ora and apassword file.

2. Start RMAN and connect to the target database instance.At this stage, no initialization parameter file exists. If you have set ORACLE_SID and ORACLE_HOME, thenyou can use operating system authentication to connect as SYSDBA. For example, start RMAN as follows:% rmanRMAN> CONNECT TARGET/

3. Specify the DBID for the target database with the SET DBID command, as described in "Restoring theServer Parameter File".

For example, enter the following command:SET DBID 676549873;

4. Run the STARTUP NOMOUNT command.When the server parameter file is not available, RMAN attempts to start the instance with a dummy serverparameter file.

5. Allocate a channel to the media manager and then restore the server parameter file from autobackup. For example, enter the following command to restore the server parameter file from Oracle Secure Backup:RUN{ ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; RESTORE SPFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP;}

6. Restart the instance with the restored server parameter file.STARTUP FORCE NOMOUNT;

7. Write a command file to perform the restore and recovery operation, and then execute the command file.The command file should do the following:

a. Allocate a channel to the media manager.b. Restore a control file autobackup (see "Performing Recovery with a Backup Control File and No RecoveryCatalog").c. Mount the restored control file.d. Catalog any backups not recorded in the repository with the CATALOG command.e. Restore the data files to their original locations. If volume names have changed, then run SETNEWNAME commands before the restore operation and perform a switch after the restore operation toupdate the control file with the new locations for the data files, as shown in the following example.f. Recover the data files. RMAN stops recovery when it reaches the log sequence number specified.

RMAN> RUN{ # Manually allocate a channel to the media manage r ALLOCATE CHANNEL t1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; # Restore autobackup of the control file. This ex ample assumes that youhave # accepted the default format for the autobackup name. RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP; # The set until command is used in case the data base # structure has changed in the most recent backu ps, and you want to # recover to that point in time. In this way RMA N restores the database # to the same structure that the database had at the specified time. ALTER DATABASE MOUNT; SET UNTIL SEQUENCE 1124 THREAD 1; RESTORE DATABASE; RECOVER DATABASE;}The following example of the RUN command shows the same scenario except with new file names forthe restored data files:RMAN> RUN{ # If you must restore the files to new locations , # use SET NEWNAME commands: SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 1 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_1'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 2 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_2'; SET NEWNAME FOR DATAFILE 3 TO '/dev/vgd_1_0/rlvt5 _500M_3'; ALLOCATE CHANNEL t1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; RESTORE CONTROLFILE FROM AUTOBACKUP; ALTER DATABASE MOUNT; SET UNTIL SEQUENCE 124 THREAD 1; RESTORE DATABASE; SWITCH DATAFILE ALL; # Update control file with n ew location of datafiles. RECOVER DATABASE;}

8. If recovery was successful, then open the database and reset the online logs:ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

QUESTION 70The BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES parameter is set to FALSE for the database instance. Which statement is true while performing a tape backup in an RMAN session?

A. The tape I/O performed is asynchronousB. The tape buffer is allocated from the System Global Area (SGA)C. The tape buffer is allocated from the Program Global Area (PGA)D. Oracle I/O uses an interrupt mechanism to determine when each I/O completes

Correct Answer: C

Section: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Tape I/O Slaves

RMAN allocates the tape buffers in the System Global Area (SGA) or the Program Global Area (PGA),depending on whether I/O slaves are used. If you set the initialization parameter BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES=true, then RMAN allocates tape buffers from the SGA. Tape devices can only beaccessed by one process at a time, so RMAN starts as many slaves as necessary for the number of tapedevices. If the LARGE_POOL_SIZE initialization parameter is also set, then RMAN allocates buffers from thelarge pool. If you set BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES=false, then RMAN allocates the buffers from the PGA.

If you use I/O slaves, then set the LARGE_POOL_SIZE initialization parameter to dedicate SGA memory toholding these large memory allocations. This parameter prevents RMAN I/O buffers from competing with thelibrary cache for SGA memory. If I/O slaves for tape I/O were requested but there is not enough space in theSGA for them, slaves are not used, and a message appears in the alert log.

The parameter BACKUP_TAPE_IO_SLAVES specifies whether RMAN uses slave processes rather than thenumber of slave processes. Tape devices can only be accessed by one process at a time, and RMAN uses thenumber of slaves necessary for the number of tape devices.

QUESTION 71The database is currently open and the temp03.dbf tempfile belonging to the default temporary tablespace TEMP has been corrupted.

What steps should you take to recover from this tempfile loss in an efficient manner?

A. Allow the database to continue running, drop the TEMP tablespace, and then re-create it with new tempfiles

B. Shut down the database, restore and recover the tempfile from backup, and then open the database with RESETLOGS

C. Allow the database to continue running, take the TEMP tablespace offline, drop the missing tempfile, andthen create a new tempfile

D. Allow the database to continue running, add a new tempfile to TEMP tablespace with a new name, and dropthe tempfile that has been corrupted.



QUESTION 72Which two commands never trigger an implicit rebalancing within the disk group?. (Choose two.)

A. ALTER DISKGROUP misc MOUNT;

B. ALTER DISKGROUP misc DROP DISK misc2;

C. ALTER DISKGROUP misc CHECK ALL NOREPAIR;

D. ALTER DISKGROUP misc RESIZE ALL SIZE 1023m;

E. ALTER DISKGROUP dgroupA ADD DISK '/devices/A*';

Correct Answer: ACSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


Altering Disk Groups

You can use the ALTER DISKGROUP SQL statement to alter a disk group configuration. You can add, resize,or drop disks while the database remains online. Whenever possible, multiple operations in a single ALTERDISKGROUP statement are recommended. Grouping operations in a single ALTER DISKGROUP statementcan reduce rebalancing operations.

Oracle ASM automatically rebalances when the configuration of a disk group changes. By default, theALTER DISKGROUP statement does not wait until the operation is complete before returning. Query theV$ASM_OPERATION view to monitor the status of this operation.

add_disk_clauseUse this clause to add one or more disks to the disk group and specify attributes for the newly added disk. Oracle ASM automatically rebalances the disk group as part of this operation.

drop_disk_clauseUse this clause to drop one or more disks from the disk group.DROP DISK The DROP DISK clause lets you drop one or more disks from the disk group and automatically rebalance thedisk group. When you drop a disk, Oracle ASM relocates all the data from the disk and clears the disk headerso that it no longer is part of the disk group. The disk header is not cleared if you specify the FORCE keyword.

QUESTION 73You want to configure the Flashback Database feature and retain flashback logs for three days.Presently the database is open and configured in ARCHIVELOG mode.The following steps must be performed in the correct sequence to do this:

1.Set the retention target:SQL> ALTER SYSTEM SET DB_FLASHBACK_RETENTION_TARGET=4320;

2.Enable Flashback Database:SQL> ALTER DATABASE FLASHBACK ON;

3.Mount the database:SQL> STARTUP MOUNT EXCLUSIVE

4.Shutdown the instance:SQL> SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE

5.Open the database:SQL> ALTER DATABASE OPEN;

Choose the correct sequence.

A. 4, 1, 3, 2, 5B. 4, 3, 1, 2, 5C. 2, 4, 3, 5, 1D. 4, 2, 5, 3, 1

Correct Answer: BSection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation


QUESTION 74

View the Exhibit and examine the output. You execute the following RMAN command to perform the backupoperation:RMAN> RUN{ ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE disk MAXOPENFIL ES 8; BACKUP DATABASE FILESPERSET 4;}What is the multiplexing level in the preceding backup process?

A. 4B. 8C. 7D. 0



QUESTION 75To enable faster incremental backups, you enabled block change tracking for the database. Which twostatements are true about the block change tracking file? (Choose two.)

A. Multiple change tracking files can be created for a database.B. The change tracking file must be created after the first level 0 backup.C. RMAN does not support backup and recovery of the change tracking file.D. The database clears the change tracking file and starts tracking changes again, after whole database

restore and recovery operations.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation

QUESTION 76Which options would you consider while configuring a flash recovery area (fast recovery area in 11g Release 2)for your production database that is running in ARCHIVELOG mode? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Setting the FAST_START_MTTR_TARGET to set the mean time to recover

B. Setting the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM parameter to twice the number of CPUs

C. Using the DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST parameter to set the location for flash recovery area

D. Using the DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST_SIZE parameter to define the disk space limit for the recovery filescreated in the flash recovery area

Correct Answer: CDSection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 77You want to take a complete database backup using RMAN. The backup should consist only the used blocksfrom your database.

Which two statements are true about this backup operation? (Choose two.)

A. Backup compression should be enabledB. Parallelism for the channel should be set to 2C. All the files must be backed up as backup setsD. The backup may be stored either on disk or on media with media manager


QUESTION 78The following command is executed to shut down an Automatic Storage Management (ASM) instance:SQL>SHUTDOWN ABORT;

Which two statements describe the consequences of the above command? (Choose two.)

A. The disk groups are orderly dismounted.B. The ASM instance requires recovery when it is started.C. The database instance that are currently clients of the ASM instance are aborted.D. The CSS daemon stops and has to be restarted before the ASM instance is restarted.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 79If you use ALTER DISKGROUP ... ADD DISK and specify a wildcard for the discovery string, what happensto disks that are already a part of the same or another disk group?

A. The command fails unless you specify the FORCE option.B. The command fails unless you specify the REUSE option.C. The command must be reissued with a more specific discovery string.D. The other disks, already part of the disk group, are ignored.


Explanation/Reference:Refer to an Oracle Example for adding disk to diskgroup (link)

How A Disk is Discovered

While an ASM instance is initialized, ASM discovers and examines the contents of all of the disks that are in thepaths that you designated with values in the ASM_DISKSTRING initialization parameter. Disk discovery alsooccurs when you:

Run the ALTER DISKGROUP...ADD DISK and ALTER DISKGROUP...RESIZE DISK commandsQuery the V$ASM_DISKGROUP and V$ASM_DISK views

Disk Discovery Rules(link)

The rules for discovering ASM disks are as follows:

ASM can discover up to 10,000 disks. That is, if more than 10,000 disks match the ASM_DISKSTRINGinitialization parameter, then ASM discovers only the first 10,000.

ASM only discovers disks that contain a partition table.Note:ASM does not discover a disk that contains an operating system partition table, even if the disk is in anASM disk string search path and ASM has read and write permission for the disk.

When adding a disk, the FORCE option must be used if ASM recognizes that the disk was managed byOracle. Such a disk appears in the V$ASM_DISK view with a status of FOREIGN. In this case, you can onlyadd the disk to a disk group by using the FORCE keyword.

In addition, ASM identifies the following configuration errors during discovery:

Multiple paths to the same diskIn this case, if the disk is part of a disk group, then disk group mount fails. If the disk is being added toa disk group with the ADD DISK or CREATE DISKGROUP command, then the command fails. To correctthe error, adjust the ASM_DISKSTRING value so that ASM will not discover multiple paths to the same disk.Or if you are using multipathing software, then ensure that you include only the pseudo-device name in the ASM_DISKSTRING value. See "ASM and Multipathing".

Multiple ASM disks with the same disk headerThis can be caused by having copied one disk onto another. In this case, the disk group mountoperation fails.

QUESTION 80You are an Oracle DBA responsible for an ASM instance. The disk controller on your system fails. You suspectthat the disk itself is okay. You know it will take 24 hours to replace the controller and you don't want to have torebuild the disks from scratch.

What do you do?

A. Take the whole disk group offline and wait for the controller card to be installed. Once it's installed, bring thedisk group online again.

B. Change the ASM parameter ASM_PREFERRED_READ_FAILURE_GROUPS to indicate that you want to readfrom the non-failed disk. Once the disk controller is replaced, reset the parameter to its original value.

C. You have no choice but to rebuild the disk. Drop the disk from the disk group and wait for the controller tobe replaced. Once the controller is replaced, add the disk back into the disk group and allow ASM to rebuildit.

D. If you are using any setting other than REDUNDANCY EXTERNAL for your disk group, you will have torecover any data on that disk from a backup. The database will be unavailable until you can correct theproblem and perform recovery.

E. Change the attribute DISK_REPAIR_TIME on the disk group to a time greater than 24 hours.



QUESTION 81As the DBA, you run the following query on your ASM instance. What is the implication of the results of thequery? (Choose two.)

SQL> select group_number, name, state from v$ASM_DI SKGROUP;

GROUP_NUMBER NAME STATE============ ======= ========== 0 DGROUP1 DISMOUNTED 2 DGROUP2 MOUNTED 3 DGROUP3 MOUNTED

A. The DGROUP1 disk group was unmounted by another DBA.B. A datafile has been lost, causing the ASM disk group DGROUP1 to go into the DISMOUNTED state

C. One of the redundant disks (DGROUP1) has been lost in a disk group.D. This query has no meaning in an ASM instance.E. A disk associated with a disk group was discovered after the ASM instance initially opened.

Correct Answer: AESection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 82Your database is in NOARCHIVELOG mode. You start to do a backup, but your users complain that they don'twant you to shut down the database to perform the backup. What options are available to you?

A. Put the database in hot backup mode and perform an online backup, including backing up the archived redologs.

B. Just back up the database datafiles without shutting down the database.C. You will have to wait until you can shut down the database to perform the backup.D. Mark each datafile as backup in progress, back them up individually, and then mark them as backup not in

progress. No archived redo logs will need to be backed up.E. Only back up the datafiles that the user will not be touching. Once the user has finished what they were

doing, you can shut down the database and back up the datafiles the user changed during the course of theremaining backup



QUESTION 83When performing an online backup, what is the proper order of the following steps?

a: Issue the ALTER DATABASE END BACKUP command.b: Back up the archived redo logs.c: Issue the ALTER DATABASE BEGIN BACKUP command.d: Back up the database files.e: Determine the beginning log sequence number.f: Determine the ending log sequence number.g: Force a log switch with the ALTER SYSTEM SWITCH LOGFILE command.

A. a, b, c, d, e, f, g

B. c, d, a, b, e, g, f

C. f, d, b, g, a, c, e

D. e, c, d, a, g, f, b

E. a, f, b, g, e, c, d


Explanation/Reference:There are two big steps to complete the online database backup:1. Enclose with BEGIN BACKUP and END BACKUP options to use O/S file copy command to backup data files;Which is e, c, d, a2. Use SWITCH LOGFILE command to archive all the online redo log. backup all the archived redo log file. Which is g, f, b

According to Oracle document, after online backup done, you must archive the online redo log, otherwise youwill have no chance to recover the database with consistence.

QUESTION 84You want to put a specific tablespace called MY_DATA in hot backup mode so you can back it up.What command would you use?

A. alter tablespace MY_DATA begin backup;

B. alter tablespace MY_DATA start backup;

C. alter tablespace MY_DATA backup begin;

D. alter MY_DATA begin backup;

E. You cannot back up individual tablespaces.



QUESTION 85You backed up the database at 8 a.m. today using an online backup. Accounting made a large change to theunderlying data between 10 a.m. and noon. Which of the following actions would ensure that the changes could be recovered using the 8 a.m. backup?

A. Create a manual incremental online database backup.B. Back up all the archived redo logs generated since the 8 a.m. backup.C. Create a brand-new backup after all the changes have been applied.D. There is no way to make the changes recoverable based on the 8 a.m. backup.E. Perform an online backup of the tablespace(s) that contained changed data.



QUESTION 86What are the different logging modes available in Oracle Database 11g? (Choose two.)

A. NOLOG mode

B. NOARCHIVELOG mode

C. LOGGING modeD. HOTDATABASE modeE. ARCHIVELOG mode

Correct Answer: BESection: Configuring for RecoverabilityExplanation


QUESTION 87Which is the correct command to put the database in ARCHIVELOG mode?

A. alter database archivelog

B. alter system enable archivelog mode

C. alter database enable archive

D. alter database archivelog enable




QUESTION 88What is the correct order of steps to perform an online database backup?

a: alter database begin backup;b: alter database end backup;c: Back up the database datafiles.d: Back up the archive log files.e: alter system switch logfile;

A. a, b, c, d, eB. e, d, a, b, cC. a, c, b, d, eD. d, b, c, a, eE. a, c, b, e, d


Explanation/Reference:(link )To back up online read/write tablespaces in an open database:1. use the DBA_DATA_FILES data dictionary view to identify all of the data files in the tablespace.2. ALTER TABLESPACE users BEGIN BACKUP;3. Back up the online data files of the online tablespace with operating system commands.4. ALTER TABLESPACE users END BACKUP;5. ALTER SYSTEM ARCHIVE LOG CURRENT; Archive the unarchived redo logs so that the redo required to

recover the tablespace backup is archived.

QUESTION 89Which command will result in a trace file being created with the create controlfile command contained in it?

A. alter database backup controlfile;B. alter database backup controlfile to trace;C. alter database controlfile backup;D. alter database controlfile backup to '/ora01/oracle/ctrl_backup.ctl';E. alter database begin controlfile backup;


Explanation/Reference:ALTER DATABASE BACKUP CONTROLFILE TO TRACE Specify TO TRACE if you want Oracle Database to write SQL statements to a trace file rather than making aphysical backup of the control file. You can use SQL statements written to the trace file to start up thedatabase, re-create the control file, and recover and open the database appropriately, based on the createdcontrol file. If you issue an ALTER DATABASE BACKUP CONTROLFILE TO TRACE statement while blockchange tracking is enabled, then the resulting trace file will contain a command to reenable block changetracking.

The trace file will also include ALTER DATABASE REGISTER LOGFILE statements for existing logfiles thatreside in the current archivelog destinations. This will implicitly create database incarnation records for thebranches of redo to which the logfiles apply.

You can copy the statements from the trace file into a script file, edit the statements as necessary, and use thescript if all copies of the control file are lost (or to change the size of the control file).

QUESTION 90Which of the following is a valid way of putting a tablespace named DAVE_TBS into hot backup mode?

A. alter tablespace DAVE_TBS backup mode;

B. alter tablespace DAVE_TBS start backup;

C. alter tablespace DAVE_TBS begin backup;

D. alter tablespace DAVE_TBS backup begin;

E. alter tablespace DAVE_TBS backup;



QUESTION 91Every Sunday the Unix system administrator has a job that executes a full backup of the entire Unix systemyour database is on. Is this backup usable for backup and recovery of your database?

A. Yes, if the database is in ARCHIVELOG mode.

B. Yes, if the database is in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

C. No, the backup is not usable in any way.D. Only if the ENABLE_ONLINE_BACKUP parameter is set to TRUE.



QUESTION 92Which is NOT a valid way of backing up a control file?

A. Backing up the control file to traceB. Copying the existing control file of the database to the backup location during a hot backupC. Copying the existing control file of the database to the backup location during a cold backupD. Creating a backup control fileE. Using the create controlfile command



QUESTION 93Which of the following parameters defines the location where Oracle should create archived redo logs?

A. LOG_ARCHIVE_1

B. LOG_DESTINATION_1

C. LOG_ARCHIVED_DESTINATION_1

D. LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1

E. LOG_ARCHIVE_SOURCE_1



QUESTION 94Archived redo logs can be copied to more than one destination by Oracle.

A. TrueB. False


QUESTION 95What will be the result of the following configuration?Log_archive_dest_1 = 'location=c:\oracle\arch\mydb'Log_archive_dest_2 = 'location=z:\oracle\arch\mydb'

A. An error will occur during database startup because the second parameter is not valid.B. An error will occur during database startup since you are trying to create archived redo logs in two different

locations.C. Archived redo logs will be created in two different locations by the ARCH process.

D. Archived redo logs will be created in two different locations by the LGWR process.

E. Neither parameter setting is valid, so the database will not start up.



QUESTION 96Which view provides information on the backup status of the datafiles in the database?

A. V$BACKUP

B. V$BACKUP_STATUS

C. V$BACKUP_DATAFILE

D. V$DATAFILE_BACKUP

E. V$TABLESPCE_BACKUP



QUESTION 97Another DBA issues a shutdown abort command on a database on which you were running an onlinebackup. What will happen when you try to restart the database?

A. Oracle will automatically take the datafile out of hot backup mode, generate a warning message, and thenopen the database.

B. Oracle will automatically take the datafile out of hot backup mode and then open the database.C. Oracle will generate an error when trying to open the database, indicating that a datafile is in hot backup

mode. You will need to correct this error before you can open the database.D. The database will open with the file in hot backup mode. You can restart the backup at any time.E. The datafile in hot backup mode will be corrupted and you will have to recover it.



QUESTION 98What is the proper command to shut down the database in a consistent manner?

A. shutdown abort

B. shutdown kill

C. shutdown nowait

D. shutdown immediate

E. shutdown halt



QUESTION 99If you issue the command shutdown abort prior to trying to put the database in ARCHIVELOG mode, what will bethe result when you issue the command alter database archivelog ?

A. The alter database archivelog command will fail.B. The alter database archivelog inconsistent command must be used to put the database in ARCHIVELOG

mode.C. The alter database archivelog command will succeed.D. The alter database archivelog command will ask if you want to make the database consistent first.E. There is no alter database archivelog command. The correct command is alter database alterlogging.


Explanation/Reference:Before you change database to archivelog mode, you need to have a clean database shutdown.

QUESTION 100Your archive-log destination directory runs out of space. What is the impact of this on the database?

A. None. The database will switch over to the stand-by archive-log destination directory.B. A warning message will be written to the alert log of the database, but no adverse impacts to the database

will be experienced.C. The database will shut down, and will not restart until you correct the out-of-space situation.D. The database will continue to try to write to the archive-log destination directory for one hour. After one hour,

the database will shut down normally.E. Once Oracle has cycled through all online redo logs, it will stop processing any DML or DDL until the out-of-

space condition is corrected.



E07

QUESTION 1You are managing an Oracle Database 11g instance with ASM storage. The ASM instance is down. To knowthe details of the disks in the DATA disk group , you issued the following ASMCMD command:ASMCMD> lsdsk -I -d DATAWhich statement is true regarding the outcome of this command?

A. The command succeeds but it retrieves only the disk names.B. The command produces an error because the ASM instance is down.C. The command succeeds but it shows only the status of the ASM instance.D. The command succeeds and retrieves information by scanning the disk headers based on an

ASM_DISKSTRING value.


Explanation/Reference:See details at Options for the lsdsk command.

-I Scans disk headers for information rather than extracting the information from an Oracle ASM instance.This option forces non-connected mode.

QUESTION 2You plan to set up the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) baseline metric thresholds for a moving windowbaseline. Which action would you take before performing this task?

A. Compute the baseline statistics.B. Take an immediate AWR snapshot.C. Decrease the window size for the baseline.D. Decrease the expiration time for the baseline.


Explanation/Reference:A moving window baseline corresponds to all AWR data that exists within the AWR retention period. This isuseful when using adaptive thresholds because the database can use AWR data in the entire AWR retentionperiod to compute metric threshold values.

QUESTION 3You need to create a partitioned table to store historical data and you issued the following command:CREATE TABLE purchase_interval PARTITION BY RANGE (time_id) INTERVAL (NUMTOYMI NTERVAL(1,'month')) STORE IN (tbs1,tbs2,tbs3) ( PARTITION p1 VALUES LESS THAN(TO_DATE('1-1- 2005', 'dd-mm-yyyy')), PARTITION p2 VALUES LESS THAN(TO_DATE('1-1- 2007', 'dd-mm-yyyy')) ) ASSELECT * FROM purchases WHERE time_id < TO_DATE('1-1-2007','dd-mm-yyyy');

What is the outcome of the above command?

A. It returns an error because the range partitions P1 and P2 should be of the same range.

B. It creates two range partitions (P1, P2). Within each range partition, it creates monthwise subpartitions.C. It creates two range partitions of varying range. For data beyond '1-1-2007,' it creates partitions with a width

of one month each.D. It returns an error because the number of tablespaces (TBS1,TBS2,TBS3)specified does not match the

number of range partitions (P1,P2) specified.



QUESTION 4View the Exhibit to examine the Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM) tasks. You executed thefollowing commands:SQL> VAR tname VARCHAR2(60);SQL> BEGIN :tname := 'my_instance_analysis_mode_task'; DBMS_ADDM.INSERT_SEGMENT_DIRECTIVE(:tname,'Sg_di rective','SCOTT');END;

Which statement describes the consequence?

Exhibit:

A. The ADDM task is filtered to suppress the Segment Advisor suggestions for the SCOTT schema.

B. The ADDM task is filtered to produce the Segment Advisor suggestions for the SCOTT schema only.

C. The PL/SQL block produces an error because the my_instance_analysis_mode_task task has notbeen reset to its initial state.

D. All subsequent ADDM tasks including my_instance_analysis_mode_task are filtered to suppress theSegment Advisor suggestions for the SCOTT schema.


Explanation/Reference:sys@TEST1107> VAR tname VARCHAR2(60);sys@TEST1107> BEGIN :tname := 'my_instance_analysis _mode_task'; 2 DBMS_ADDM.INSERT_SEGMENT_DIRECTIVE(:tname,'Sg_ directive','SCOTT'); 3 END; 4 /

PL/SQL procedure successfully completed.

sys@TEST1107> SELECT DBMS_ADVISOR.GET_TASK_REPORT(:tname, 'TEXT', 'ALL') FROMDUAL;ERROR:ORA-13631: The most recent execution of task my_ins tance_analysis_mode_taskcontains no results.ORA-06512: at "SYS.PRVT_ADVISOR", line 3189ORA-06512: at "SYS.DBMS_ADVISOR", line 590ORA-06512: at line 1

no rows selected

QUESTION 5Examine the following PL/SQL block:DECLARE my_plans PLS_INTEGER;BEGIN my_plans := DBMS_SPM.LOAD_PLANS_FROM_CURSOR_CACHE( sql_id => '99twu5t2dn5xd');END;/

Which statement is true about the plan being loaded into the SQL plan baseline by the above command?

A. It is loaded with the FIXED status.B. It is loaded with the ACCEPTED status.C. It is not loaded with the ENABLED status.D. It is not loaded with the ACCEPTED status.


Explanation/Reference:You can create SQL plan baselines by manually loading existing plans for a set of SQL statements as planbaselines. The database does not verify manually loaded plans for performance, but adds them as acceptedplans to existing or new SQL plan baselines. (Refer to here 15.2.1.2 Creating Baselines from Existing Plans)

----------------------------------------------The DBMS_SPM package supports the SQL plan management feature by providing an interface for the DBA orother user to perform controlled manipulation of plan history and SQL plan baselines maintained for variousSQL statements.

LOAD_PLANS_FROM_CURSOR_CACHE Functions, This function loads one or more plans present in the cursorcache for a SQL statement, or a set of SQL statements. It has four overloads: using SQL statement text, usingSQL handle, using SQL ID, or using attribute_name and attribute_value pair.

By default, the parameter of LOAD_PLANS_FROM_CURSOR_CACHE has:1. fixed = 'NO', means loaded with non-fixed plans.2. enabled = 'YES', means that it is enabled for use by the optimizer.

Refer to here for details.

QUESTION 6You plan to control idle sessions that are blocking other sessions from performing transactions. Yourrequirement is to automatically terminate these blocking sessions when they remain idle for a specified amountof time.How would you accomplish this task?

A. Set metric thresholdB. Implement Database Resource ManagerC. Enable resumable timeout for user sessionsD. Add directives to Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM)


QUESTION 7Evaluate the following statements:CREATE TABLE purchase_orders ( po_id NUMBER(4), po_date TIMESTAMP, supplier_id NUMBER(6), po_total NUMBER(8,2), CONSTRAINT order_pk PRIMARY KEY(po_id)) PARTITION BY RANGE(po_date) ( PARTITION Q1 VALUES LESS THAN (TO_DATE('1-apr-2 007','d-mon-yyyy'), PARTITION Q2 VALUES LESS THAN (TO_DATE('1-jul-2 007','d-mon-yyyy'), PARTITION Q3 VALUES LESS THAN (TO_DATE('1-oct-2 007','d-mon-yyyy'), PARTITION Q4 VALUES LESS THAN (TO_DATE('1-jan-2 008','d-mon-yyyy'));

CREATE TABLE purchase_order_items ( po_id NUMBER(4) NOT NULL, product_id NUMBER(6) NOT NULL, unit_price NUMBER(8,2), quantity NUMBER(8), CONSTRAINT po_items_fk FOREIGN KEY (po_id) REFERENCES purchase_orders(po_id)) PARTITION BY REFERENCE(po_items_fk);

What are the two consequences of the above statements? (Choose two.)

A. Partitions of PURCHASE_ORDER_ITEMS have system-generated names.

B. Both PURCHASE_ORDERS and PURCHASE_ORDER_ITEMS tables are created with four partitions each.

C. Partitions of the PURCHASE_ORDER_ITEMS table exist in the same tablespaces as the partitions of thePURCHASE_ORDERS table.

D. The PURCHASE_ORDER_ITEMS table inherits the partitioning key from the parent table by automaticallyduplicating the key columns.

E. Partition maintenance operations performed on the PURCHASE_ORDER_ITEMS table are automaticallyreflected in the PURCHASE_ORDERS table.

Correct Answer: BCSection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 8Which statements are true regarding SecureFile LOB s? (Choose all that apply.)

A. The amount of undo retained is user controlled.B. SecureFile LOBs can be used only for nonpartitioned tables.

C. Fragmentation is minimized by using variable-sized chunks dynamically.D. SecureFile encryption allows for random reads and writes of the encrypted data.

E. It automatically detects duplicate LOB data and conserves space by storing only one copy.

Correct Answer: CDESection: Space ManagementExplanation

Explanation/Reference:One of the new feature of Oracle 11g is that Oracle SecureFiles use variable chunk sizes, which can be aslarge as 64 MB.By storing these chunks next to one another, Oracle also minimizes fragmentation.

About Deduplication

SecureFiles Intelligent Deduplication, available with the Oracle Advanced Compression Option, enables OracleDatabase to automatically detect duplicate LOB data within a LOB column or partition, and conserve spaceby storing only one copy of the data.

Note that you must have a license for the Oracle Advanced Compression Option before implementingSecureFiles Intelligent Deduplication. See Oracle Database Licensing Information for more information.

Note also that Oracle Streams does not support SecureFiles LOBs that are deduplicated.

About Encryption

SecureFiles Intelligent Encryption, available with the Oracle Advanced Security Option, introduces a newencryption facility for LOBs. The data is encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE), which allows thedata to be stored securely, and still allows for random read and write access.

QUESTION 9You plan to use Flashback Drop feature to recover a dropped table SALES_EMP. No other table with the samename exists in the schema.You query RECYCLEBIN and find multiple entries for the SALES_EMP table as follows: You then issue thefollowing statement to recover the table:

SQL> SELECT object_name, original_name, droptime FR OM recyclebin;

OBJECT_NAME ORIGINAL_NAME DRO PTIME-------------------------------- -------------- --- -----------------BIN$/m0DrBV9RFGOAA53dC-FPW==$0 SALES_EMP 200 7-12-07:11:08:55BIN$2DeIssLeQTqgH/n80Rm2JQ==$0 SALES_EMP 200 7-12-07:11:11:38BIN$UuqroNodQy6ouDtaA+XOVw==$0 SALES_EMP 200 7-12-07:11:08:18

SQL> FLASHBACK TABLE sales_emp TO BEFORE DROP;

What would be the outcome of the precedent statement?

A. It retrieves the latest version of the table from the recycle binB. It retrieves the oldest version of the table from the recycle binC. It retrieves the version of the table for which undo information is availableD. It returns an error because the table name is not specified as per the names in the OBJECT_NAME column



QUESTION 10You upgraded Oracle Database 10g to Oracle Database 11g. How would this affect the existing users'passwords?

A. All passwords automatically become case-sensitive.B. All passwords remain non-case-sensitive till they are changed.C. All passwords remain non-case-sensitive and cannot be changed.D. All passwords remain non-case-sensitive until their password attribute in the profile is altered.


QUESTION 11What recommendations does the SQL Access Advisor provide for optimizing SQL queries? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. selection of SQL plan baselinesB. partitioning of tables and indexesC. creation of index-organized tablesD. creation of bitmap, function-based, and B-tree indexesE. optimization of materialized views for maximum query usage and fast refresh

Correct Answer: BDESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation


SQL Access Advisor helps you achieve your performance goals by recommending the proper set of materialized views, materialized view logs, partitions, and indexes for a given workload.

SQL Access Advisor index recommendations include bitmap, function-based, and B-treeindexes.

SQL Access Advisor materialized view recommendations include fast refreshable and full refreshable MVs, foreither general rewrite or exact text match rewrite.

QUESTION 12Your system has been upgraded from Oracle Database 10g to Oracle Database 11g. You imported SQLTuning Sets (STS) from the previous version. After changing the OPTIMIZER_FEATURES_ENABLE parameterto 10.2.0.4 and running the SQL Performance Analyzer, you observed performance regression for a few SQLstatements. What would you do with these SQL statements?

A. Set OPTIMIZER_USE_PLAN_BASELINES to FALSE to prevent the use of regressed plans.

B. Capture the plans from the previous version using STS and then load them into the stored outline.C. Capture the plans from the previous version using STS and then load them into SQL Management Base

(SMB).D. Set OPTIMIZER_CAPTURE_SQL_PLAN_BASELINES to FALSE to prevent the plans from being loaded to

the SQL plan baseline.


Explanation/Reference:The SQL management base (SMB) is a part of the data dictionary that resides in the SYSAUX tablespace. Itstores statement logs, plan histories, SQL plan baselines, and SQL profiles.


Parameters Relating to Stored Outline Migration:OPTIMIZER_CAPTURE_SQL_PLAN_BASELINES, Enables or disables the automatic recognition ofrepeatable SQL statement and the generation of SQL plan baselines for these statements.OPTIMIZER_USE_SQL_PLAN_BASELINES, Enables or disables the use of SQL plan baselines stored inSQL Management Base.

QUESTION 13Which type of backup contains only the blocks that have changed since the last level 0 incremental backup?

A. a cumulative level 1 backupB. a differential level 1 backupC. a full backupD. a whole backup


QUESTION 14The ORACLE_SID environment variable is set to +ASM. ASMLIB is not used in the configuration. You executedthe following command to startup the Automatic Storage Management (ASM) instance.SQL> STARTUP;

Which two activities are performed during a successful start up operation? (Choose two.)

A. The databases configured to use the ASM instance are mountedB. The disk groups are mounted as per the ASM_DISKGROUPS initialization parameter

C. ASM starts the Oracle Cluster Synchronization Services (CSS) daemon if it is not startedD. ASM discovers and examines the contents of all files that are in the paths specified in the

ASM_DISKGROUPS initialization parameters

Correct Answer: BCSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Refer to Starting Up an ASM Instance.

To start up an ASM instance, you must:1. To connect to the ASM instance with SQL*Plus, you must set the ORACLE_SID environment variable to the

ASM SID.2. The initialization parameter file, which can be a server parameter file, must contain: INSTANCE_TYPE =

ASM3. The STARTUP command, tries to mount the disk groups specified by the initialization parameter

ASM_DISKGROUPS.

If ASM_DISKGROUPS is blank, the ASM instance starts and warns that no disk groups were mounted. Youcan then mount disk groups with the ALTER DISKGROUP...MOUNT command.

The Cluster Synchronization Services (CSS) daemon i s required to enable synchronization between ASMand its client database instances. The CSS daemon is normally started (and configured to start upon reboot)when you use Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA) to create your database. If you did not use DBCA tocreate the database, you must ensure that the CSS daemon is running before you start the ASM instance.

QUESTION 15Your database is running in ARCHIVELOG mode, and the database is open. You execute an RMAN backup andspecify the KEEP clause.Which components are backed up when this option is specified?

A. only the control file, the current SPFILE, and data filesB. only the current SPFILE and data files if autobackup is disabled

C. only the data files and the archived redo logsD. the control file, current SPFILE file, data files, and archived redo logs



QUESTION 16You executed the following commands in an RMAN session for your database instance that has failures:RMAN> LIST FAILURE;After some time, you executed the following command in the same session:RMAN> ADVISE FAILURE;But there are new failures recorded in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) after the execution of thelast LIST FAILURE command. Which statement is true for the above ADVISE FAILURE command in this scenario?

A. It produces a warning for new failures before advising for CRITICAL and HIGH failures.B. It ignores new failures and considers the failures listed in the last LIST FAILURE command only.C. It produces an error with recommendation to run the LIST FAILURE command before the ADVISE

FAILURE command.D. It produces advice only for new failures and the failures listed in the last LIST FAILURE command are

ignored.

Correct Answer: A



QUESTION 17View the Exhibit to examine the output for the V$DIAG_INFO view. Which statements are true regarding thelocation of diagnostic traces? (Choose all that apply.)

Exhibit:

A. The path to the location of the background as well as the foreground process trace files is /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/trace.

B. The location of the text alert log file is /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/alert.C. The location of the trace file for the current session is /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/trace.D. The location of the XML-formatted version of the alert log is /u01/oracle/diag/rdbms/orclbi/orclbi/alert.

Correct Answer: ACDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 18Evaluate the following command:SQL>ALTER SYSTEM SET db_securefile = 'IGNORE';What is the impact of this setting on the usage of SecureFiles?

A. It forces BasicFiles to be created even if the SECUREFILE option is specified to create the LOB.

B. It forces SecureFiles to be created even if the BASICFILE option is specified to create the LOB.C. It does not allow the creation of SecureFiles and generates an error if the SECUREFILE option is specified

to create the LOB.D. It ignores the SECUREFILE option only if a Manual Segment Space Management tablespace is used and

creates a BasicFile.


Explanation/Reference:Parameter type StringSyntax DB_SECUREFILE = { NEVER | PERMITT ED | ALWAYS | IGNORE }Default value PERMITTEDModifiable ALTER SESSION, ALTER SYSTEMBasic No

DB_SECUREFILE specifies whether or not to treat LOB files as SecureFiles.

Values :

NEVER

Any LOBs that are specified as SecureFiles are created as BasicFile LOBs. All SecureFile-specific storageoptions and features (for example, compress, encrypt, deduplicate) will cause an exception. The BasicFileLOB defaults will be used for storage options not specified.

PERMITTED

LOBs are allowed to be created as SecureFiles.

ALWAYS

Attempts to create all LOBs as SecureFile LOBs but creates any LOBs not in an Automatic Segment SpaceManaged tablespace as BasicFile LOBs, unless SECUREFILE is explicitly specified. Any BasicFile LOBstorage options that are specified will be ignored and the SecureFile defaults will be used for all storageoptions not specified.

IGNORE

The SECUREFILE keyword and all SecureFile options a re ignored.

If the COMPATIBLE initialization parameter is not s et to 11.1.0 or higher, thenLOBs are not treated as SecureFiles.

QUESTION 19You are managing an Oracle Database 11g ASM instance with a disk group dg01 having three disks. One ofthe disks in the disk group becomes unavailable because of power failure. You issued the following commandto change the DISK_REPAIR_TIME attribute from 3.6 hours to 5 hours:ALTER DISKGROUP dg01 SET ATTRIBUTE 'disk_repair_tim e' = '5h';

To which disks in the disk group will the new value be applicable?

A. all disks in the disk groupB. all disks that are currently in OFFLINE modeC. all disks that are not currently in OFFLINE modeD. all disks in the disk group only if all of them are ONLINE


Explanation/Reference:Check out the answer options, it is tricky. The NOT OFFLINE disks equals ONLINE disks.

Refer to Set the DISK_REPAIR_TIME Disk Group Attribute Appropriately.The DISK_REPAIR_TIME disk group attribute specifies how long a disk remains offline before Oracle ASMdrops the disk. If a disk is made available before the DISK_REPAIR_TIME parameter has expired, the storage

administrator can issue the ONLINE DISK command and Oracle ASM resynchronizes the stale data from themirror side. In Oracle Database 11g, the online disk operation does not restart if there is a failure of theinstance on which the disk is running. You must reissue the command manually to bring the disk online.

QUESTION 20You issued the following RMAN command to back up the database:RMAN> RUN{

ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbtBACKUP DATABASETAG quarterlyKEEP FOREVERRESTORE POINT FY06Q4;

}Which two statements are true regarding the backup performed? (Choose two.)

A. Archived redo log files are backed up along with data files.B. Only data files are backed up and a restore point named FY06Q4 is created.C. Archived log files are backed up along with data files, and the archived log files are deleted.D. The command creates a restore point named FY06Q4 to match the SCN at which this backup is consistent.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Monitoring and Tuning RMANExplanation


keepOptionOverrides any configured retention policy for this backup so that the backup is not considered obsolete, asshown in Example 2-26.You can use the KEEP syntax to generate archival database backups that satisfy business or legalrequirements. The KEEP setting is an attribute of the backup set (not individual backup piece) or image copy.Note: You cannot use KEEP with BACKUP BACKUPSET.With the KEEP syntax, you can keep the backups so that they are considered obsolete after a specified time(KEEP UNTIL), or make them never obsolete (KEEP FOREVER). As shown in Example 2-27, you must beconnected to a recovery catalog when you specify KEEP FOREVER.Note: You can use CHANGE to alter the status of a backup generated with KEEP.See Also: keepOption for more information about backups made with the KEEP option

Creating a Consistent Database Backup for Archival PurposesThis example uses a keepOption to create an archival backup set that cannot be considered obsolete for oneyear. The example backs up the database, archives the redo in the current online logs to ensure that thisnew backup is consistent, and backs up only those archived redo log files needed to restore the data filebackup to a consistent state.The BACKUP command also creates a restore point to match the SCN at which this backup is consistent.The FORMAT parameter must be capable of creating multiple backup pieces in multiple backup sets.

BACKUP DATABASE FORMAT '/disk1/archival_backups/db_%U.bck' TAG quarterly KEEP UNTIL TIME 'SYSDATE + 365' RESTORE POINT Q1FY06;

QUESTION 21You want to create the Recovery Manager (RMAN) Virtual Private Catalog (VPC) to maintain a separation ofresponsibilities along with a consolidation of RMAN repository. Which condition must be met before you create the VPC?

A. A base catalog existsB. The recovery catalog is emptyC. The base recovery catalog must be droppedD. A target database is registered in the recovery catalog



QUESTION 22Which two kinds of failures make the Data Recovery Advisor (DRA) generate a manual checklist? (Choosetwo.)

A. failures because a data file is renamed by errorB. failures when no standby database is configuredC. failures that require no archive logs to be applied for recoveryD. failures due to loss of connectivity-for example, an unplugged disk cable

Correct Answer: ADSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 23Which two statements are true regarding the starting of the database instance using the following command?(Choose two.)SQL>STARTUP UPGRADE

A. It enables all system triggers.B. It allows only SYSDBA connections.

C. It ensures that all job queues remain active during the upgrade process.D. It sets system initialization parameters to specific values that are required to enable database upgrade

scripts to be run.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 24Which statements are true regarding system-partitioned tables? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Only a single partitioning key column can be specified.B. All DML statements must use partition-extended syntax.C. The same physical attributes must be specified for each partition.D. Unique local indexes cannot be created on a system-partitioned table.E. Traditional partition pruning and partitionwise joins are not supported on these tables.

Correct Answer: DE

Section: Space ManagementExplanation

QUESTION 25The OPTIMIZER_USE_PLAN_BASELINES parameter is set to TRUE. The optimizer generates a plan for aSQL statement but does not find a matching plan in the SQL plan baseline. Which two operations areperformed by the optimizer in this scenario? (Choose two.)

A. The optimizer adds the new plan to the plan history.B. The optimizer selects the new plan for the execution of the SQL statement.C. The optimizer adds the new plan to the SQL plan baseline as an accepted plan.D. The optimizer adds the new plan to the SQL plan baseline but not in the ENABLED state.E. The optimizer costs each of the accepted plans in the SQL plan baseline and picks the one with the lowest

cost.

Correct Answer: AESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:15.2.2 Selecting SQL Plan Baselines

During the SQL plan baseline selection phase, Oracle Database detects plan changes based on the stored planhistory, and selects plans to avoid potential performance regressions for a set of SQL statements.

Each time the database compiles a SQL statement, the optimizer does the following:1. Uses a cost-based search method to build a best-cost plan2. Tries to find a matching plan in the SQL plan baseline3. Does either of the following depending on whether a match is found:

If found, then the optimizer proceeds using the matched planIf not found, then the optimizer evaluates the cost of each accepted plan in the SQL plan baselineand selects the plan with the lowest cost

The best-cost plan found by the optimizer that does not match any plans in the plan history for the SQLstatement represents a new plan. The database adds this plan as a nonaccepted plan to the plan history.The database does not use the new plan until it is verified to not cause a performance regression. However, if achange in the system (such as a dropped index) causes all accepted plans to become non-reproducible, thenthe optimizer selects the best-cost plan. Thus, the presence of a SQL plan baseline causes the optimizer to useconservative plan selection strategy for the SQL statement.

To enable the use of SQL plan baselines, set the OPTIMIZER_USE_SQL_PLAN_BASELINES initializationparameter to TRUE (default ).

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A SQL plan baseline contains one or more accepted plans.The plan history is the set of plans, both accepted and not accepted, that the optimizer generates for a SQLstatement over time, the plans in the baseline form a subset of the plan history. For example, after the optimizergenerates the first acceptable plan for a SQL plan baseline, subsequent plans are part of the plan history butnot part of the plan baseline.

QUESTION 26Which two statements about Oracle Direct Network File System (NFS) are true? (Choose two.)

A. It bypasses the OS file system cache.B. A separate NFS interface is required for use across Linux, UNIX, and Windows platforms.C. It uses the operating system kernel NFS layer for user tasks and network communication modules.D. File systems need not be mounted by the kernel NFS system when being served through Direct NFS.E. Oracle Disk Manager can manage NFS on its own, without using the operating system kernel NFS driver.

Correct Answer: AESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Direct NFS provides faster performance that what can be provided by the operating system's NFS driver asOracle bypasses the operating system and generates exactly the requests it needs (no user configuration ortuning required). Data is cached just once in user space, which saves memory (no second copy in kernelspace). Performance is further improved by load balancing across multiple network interfaces (if available).

QUESTION 27You want the ability to recovery any time within the last seven days and therefore you configured the recoverywindow retention policy using the command:RMAN> CONFIGURE RETENTIOH POLICY TO RKCOVFRY WINDOW OF 7 DAYS;

After configuring the recovery window, you performed the database backup as follows:

A. Backup RB1 at log sequence number 12871 on 5th JanB. Backup RB2 at log sequence number 15622 on 12th JanC. Backup RB3 at log sequence 16721 on 15th JanD. On 20th Jan when the log sequence number was 18112 you realize that there Is a need to a point in time at

the beginning of the recovery window. You have all archived redo log files to date.



QUESTION 28You want to schedule a job to rebuild all indexes on the SALES table after the completion of a bulk loadoperation.The bulk load operation must also be a scheduled job that executes as soon as the first file that contains dataarrives on the system.How would you create these jobs?

A. Create both jobs by using events raised by the schedulerB. Create both jobs by using events raised by the applicationC. Create a job to rebuild indexes by using events raised by the application and then create another job to

perform bulk load by using events raised by the schedulerD. Create a job to rebuild indexes by using events raised by the Scheduler and then create another job to

perform bulk load by using events raised by the application


Explanation/Reference:The bulk load operation can be done by setting up a file watcher, then raise the event to inform the scheduler, itis kind of application based event.After the bulk load job, you can use Scheduler raised event, e.g. JOB COMPLETE, to fire the index rebuild job.

---------------------------------------------------------------There are two kinds of events consumed by the Scheduler:

Events raised by your application

An application can raise an event to be consumed by the Scheduler. The Scheduler reacts to the event bystarting a job. For example, when an inventory tracking system notices that the inventory has gone below acertain threshold, it can raise an event that starts an inventory replenishment job.

See "Starting Jobs with Events Raised by Your Application".

File arrival events raised by a file watcher

You can create a file watcher—a Scheduler object introduced in Oracle Database 11g Release 2—to watch forthe arrival of a file on a system. You can then configure a job to start when the file watcher detects thepresence of the file. For example, a data warehouse for a chain of stores loads data from end-of-day revenuereports uploaded from the point-of-sale systems in the stores. The data warehouse load job starts each time anew end-of-day report arrives.

QUESTION 29You are working on a CATDB database that contains an Oracle Database version 11.1 catalog schema owned

by the user RCO11. The INST1 database contains an Oracle Database version 10.1 catalog schema owned bythe user RCAT10.You want the RMAN to import metadata for database IDs 1423241 and 1423242, registered in RCAT10, intothe recovery catalog owned by RCO11.You executed the following RMAN commands:RMAN> CONNECT CATALOG rco11/password@catdbRMAN> IMPORT CATALOG rcat10/oracle@inst1;

What happens when you execute the above commands? (Choose all that apply.)

A. They deregister all databases registered in the RCAT10 catalog.B. They import metadata for all registered databases in the RCAT10 database.C. They register all the RCAT10-catalog registered databases in the RCO11 catalog.D. They overwrite all stored scripts in the RCO11 catalog with the same name as that in the RCAT10 catalog.

Correct Answer: ABCSection: Using the RMAN Recovery Catalog (RC)Explanation


QUESTION 30Which three are the valid statements in relation to SQL plan baselines? (Choose three.)

A. The plans can be manually loaded to the SQL plan baseline.B. The plans in the SQL plan baseline are verified and accepted plans.C. The plans generated for every SQL statement are stored in the SQL plan baseline by default.D. The plan baselines are stored temporarily in the memory as long as the database instance is running.E. For the SQL plan baselines to be accessible to the optimizer, the SYSAUX tablespace must be online.

Correct Answer: ABESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:The SQL management base (SMB), which is part of the data dictionary, stores the SQL plan baselines and planhistory in the SYSAUX tablespace. The SMB also contains SQL profiles. The SMB uses automatic spacemanagement.

Capturing SQL Plan Baselines (refer to here).You can configure the SQL Plan Baseline Capture phase for automatic capture of plan history and SQL planbaselines for repeatable SQL statements. Alternatively, you can manually load plans as SQL plan baselines.

Not all the new generated SQL plan can be accepted, so that all SQL plan stored in the plan history, only afterevolving the plans in the plan history, it becomes in the plan baseline.

You can evolve an existing SQL plan baseline by manually loading plans from the shared SQL area or from aSQL tuning set. When you manually load plans into a SQL plan baseline, the database adds these loaded plansas accepted plans.

QUESTION 31You run the SQL Tuning Advisor (STA) to tune a SQL statement that is part of a fixed SQL plan baseline. TheSTA generates a SQL profile for the SQL statement, which recommends that you accept the profile.Which statement is true when you accept the suggested SQL profile?

A. The tuned plan is not added to the SQL plan baseline.

B. The tuned plan is added to the fixed SQL plan baseline as a fixed plan.C. The tuned plan is added to the fixed SQL plan baseline as a nonfixed plan.D. The tuned plan is added to a new nonfixed SQL plan baseline as a nonfixed plan.


Explanation/Reference:15.4 Using Fixed SQL Plan Baselines (Refer to here)

When you tune a SQL statement with a fixed SQL plan baseline using SQL Tuning Advisor, a SQL profilerecommendation has special meaning. When the SQL profile is accepted, the database adds the tunedplan to the fixed SQL plan baseline as a non-fixed plan. However, as described above, the optimizer doesnot use the tuned plan when a reproducible fixed plan is present. Therefore, the benefit of SQL tuning may notbe realized. To enable the use of the tuned plan, manually alter the tuned plan to a fixed plan by setting itsFIXED attribute to YES.

QUESTION 32Which three statements correctly describe the features of the I/O calibration process? (Choose three.)

A. Only one I/O calibration process can run at a time.B. It automates the resource allocation for the Automated Maintenance Tasks.C. It improves the performance of the performance-critical sessions while running.D. It can be used to estimate the maximum number of I/Os and maximum latency time for the system.E. The latency time is computed only when the TIMED_STATISTICS initialization parameter is set to TRUE.

Correct Answer: ADESection: Managing ResourcesExplanation


QUESTION 33Which two statements about the SQL Management Base (SMB) are true? (Choose two.)

A. It contains only SQL profiles generated by SQL Tuning Advisor.B. It stores plans generated by the optimizer using a stored outline.C. It is part of the data dictionary and stored in the SYSAUX tablespace.D. It is part of the data dictionary and stored in the SYSTEM tablespace.E. It contains the statement log, the plan history, plan baselines, and SQL profiles.

Correct Answer: CESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

QUESTION 34Sales details are being stored on a daily basis in the SALES_2007 table. A large amount of data is added to thetable daily. To save disk space, you issued the following command:ALTER TABLE sales_2007 COMPRESS FOR ALL OPERATIONS;


A. It produces an error because data already exists in the table.

B. It produces an error because compression can be enabled at table creation only.C. It compresses all data added or modified henceforth but the existing data in the table is not compressed

immediately.D. It immediately compresses all existing data as well as new data, resulting from either fresh additions or

modifications to existing data.



QUESTION 35Which client requests to the database can be captured as a part of the workload capture? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. flashback queryB. distributed transactionsC. logging in and logging out of sessionsD. all DDL statements having bind variablesE. direct path load of data from external files


QUESTION 36Which two statements are true regarding the SQL Repair Advisor? (Choose two.)

A. The SQL Repair Advisor can be invoked to tune the performance of the regressed SQL statements.B. The SQL Repair Advisor can be invoked even when the incident is not active for a SQL statement crash.C. The SQL Repair Advisor is invoked by the Health Monitor when it encounters the problematic SQL

statement.D. The DBA can invoke the SQL Repair Advisor when he or she receives an alert generated when a SQL

statement crashes and an incident is created in the ADR.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

Explanation/Reference:You can run SQL Repair Advisor through the EM Support Workbench when an incident raised.Or You run the SQL Repair Advisor by creating and executing a diagnostic task using the DBMS_SQLDIAG.CREATE_DIAGNOSIS_TASK and DBMS_SQLDIAG. respectively. The SQL Repair Advisor first reproduces thecritical error and then tries to produce a workaround in the form of SQL patch.

QUESTION 37Which setting enables the baselines by default in Oracle Database 11g?

A. setting the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter to TYPICAL

B. adding filters to the Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM)C. enabling Automated Maintenance Task using Oracle Enterprise ManagerD. setting the OPTIMIZER_USE_PENDING_STATISTICS parameter to TRUE



QUESTION 38Which two activities are NOT supported by the Data Recovery Advisor? (Choose two.)

A. Diagnose and repair a data file corruption offline.B. Diagnose and repair a data file corruption online.C. Diagnose and repair failures on a standby database.D. Recover from failures in the Real Application Cluster (RAC) environment.

Correct Answer: CDSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 39In which cases is reference partitioning effective in enhancing performance?

A. It is effective only in partition pruning.B. It is effective only in partitionwise joins provided that the query predicates are different from the partitioning

key.C. It is effective in both partition pruning as well as partitionwise joins provided that the query predicates are

identical to the partitioning key.D. It is effective in both partition pruning as well as partitionwise joins irrespective of whether the query

predicates are different from or identical to the partitioning key.


QUESTION 40In Oracle 11g, which recommendations does the SQL Access Advisor generate? (Choose all that apply.)

A. partitioning recommendationsB. statistics collection recommendationsC. index creation recommendationsD. materialized view recommendationsE. materialized view log recommendations

Correct Answer: ACDESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:18.1 Overview of SQL Access Advisor

Materialized views, partitions, and indexes are essential when tuning a database to achieve optimum

performance for complex, data-intensive queries. SQL Access Advisor helps you achieve your performancegoals by recommending the proper set of materialized views, materialized view logs, partitions, andindexes for a given workload. Understanding and using these structures is essential when optimizing SQL asthey can result in significant performance improvements in data retrieval. The advantages, however, do notcome without a cost. Creation and maintenance of these objects can be time consuming, and spacerequirements can be significant. In particular, partitioning of an unpartitioned base table is a complex operationthat must be planned carefully.

QUESTION 41Which statement is true for enabling Enterprise Manager Support Workbench in Oracle Database 11g toupload the physical files generated by Incident Packaging Service (IPS) to MetaLink?

A. The database must be running in ARCHIVELOG mode.B. No special setup is required, and the feature is enabled by default.C. The path for the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR) must be configured with the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST

initialization parameter.D. The Enterprise Manager Support Workbench can be enabled only if the background process manageability

monitor (MMON) is configured.E. Select the Enable option in the Oracle Configuration Manager Registration window during the installation of

the Oracle Database 11g software, provide valid MetaLink credentials and select license agreement.

Correct Answer: ESection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation

QUESTION 42Using the LIST command in Recovery Manager (RMAN), which two pieces of information in the RMANrepository can be listed? (Choose two.)

A. stored scripts in the recovery catalogB. backups that can be deleted from diskC. backup sets and image copies are obsoleteD. backups that do not have the AVAILABLE status in the RMAN repository

Correct Answer: ADSection: Using RMAN to Create BackupsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:About the LIST command

The primary purpose of the LIST command is to list backup and copies. For example, you can list:

Backups and proxy copies of a database, tablespace, data file, archived redo log, or control fileBackups that have expiredBackups restricted by time, path name, device type, tag, or recoverabilityArchived redo log files and disk copies

Besides backups and copies, RMAN can list other types of data. For example, you can list:Backup sets and proxy copiesImage copiesArchived redo log filesDatabase incarnationsDatabases in a Data Guard environmentBackups and copies for a primary or standby database in a Data Guard environmentRestore points

Names of stored scriptsFailures for use with Data Recovery Advisor

QUESTION 43View the Exhibit for the object interdependency diagram.

The PRODUCTS table is used to create the PRODCAT_VW view. PRODCAT_VW is used in the GET_DATA procedure. GET_DATA is called in the CHECK_DATA function. A new column PROD_QTY is added to the PRODUCTS table.

How does this impact the status of the dependent objects?

Exhibit:

A. All dependent objects remain valid.B. Only the procedure and function become invalid and must be recompiled.C. Only the view becomes invalid and gets automatically revalidated the next time it is used.D. Only the procedure and function become invalid and get automatically revalidated the next time they are

called.



QUESTION 44View the Exhibit to examine the parameters set for your database instance. You execute the following command to perform I/O calibration after the declaration of bind variables in thesession that are used in the command:SQL> EXECUTE dbms_resource_manager.calibrate_io(

num_physical_disks=>1, max_latency=>50, max_iops=>:max_iops, max_mbps=>:max_mbps,actual_latency=>:actual_latency);

Which statement describes the consequence?

Exhibit:

A. The command produces an error.B. The calibration process runs successfully and populates all the bind variables.C. The calibration process runs successfully but the latency time is not computed.D. The calibration process runs successfully but only the latency time is computed.


Explanation/Reference:Requisition of Calibrate I/O (link)

Before running I/O calibration, ensure that the following requirements are met:

The user must be granted the SYSDBA privilegetimed_statistics must be set to TRUEAsynchronous I/O must be enabledWhen using file systems, asynchronous I/O can be enabled by setting the FILESYSTEMIO_OPTIONSinitialization parameter to SETALL.Ensure that asynchronous I/O is enabled for data files by running the following query:

COL NAME FORMAT A50SELECT NAME,ASYNCH_IO FROM V$DATAFILE F,V$IOSTAT_FI LE IWHERE F.FILE#=I.FILE_NOAND FILETYPE_NAME='Data File';

Additionally, only one calibration can be performed on a database instance at a time.

QUESTION 45You plan to control the sessions performing a huge number of I/O operations. Your requirement is to kill thesession when it exceeds a specified number of I/Os. Which statement describes a solution to the above?

A. Set a threshold for the default system-defined moving window baseline.B. Add directives to the Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM).C. Modify the profile for the targeted users for which control needs to be imposed.D. Implement the database resource manager to add the SWITCH_IO_REQS and SWITCH_GROUP directives.



QUESTION 46You are using Recovery Manager (RMAN) for backup and recovery operations with a recovery catalog. Youhave been taken database backups every evening. On November 15, 2007, at 11:30 AM, you were informedthat the USER_DATA tablespace was accidentally dropped. On investigation, you found that the tablespaceexisted until 11:00 AM, and important transactions were done after that.So you decided to perform incomplete recovery until 11:00 AM. All the archive logs needed to perform recoveryare intact. In NOMOUNT state you restored the control file that has information about the USER_DATA tablespacefrom the latest backup. Then you mounted the database. Identify the next set of commands that are required toaccomplish the task?

A. RMAN> run{

SET UNTIL TIME 'Nov 15 2007 11:00:00';RESTORE DATABASE;RECOVER DATABASE;

}

B. RMAN> run{

SET UNTIL TIME 'Nov 15 2007 11:00:00';RESTORE DATABASE;RECOVER DATABASE USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE;

}

C. RMAN> run{

RESTORE DATABASE;RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 'Nov 15 2007 11:00:00';

}

D. RMAN> run{

RESTORE TABLESPACE user_data;RECOVER TABLESPACE user_data UNTIL TIME 'Nov 15 200 7 11:00:00';

}



QUESTION 47Examine the following set of RMAN commands:RMAN> CONFIGURE CHANNEL dc1 DEVICE TYPE DISK FORMAT '/u02/backup/%U';RMAN> RUN ( ALLOCATE CHANNEL Chi DEVICE TYPE DISK; EXECUTE SCRIPT full_backup;)Which statement is true when the RMAN RUN block Is executed?

A. The execution of the script fails because multiple channels cannot coexist.B. The script is executed and both the channels are used for the script execution.

C. The new channel 'CHI' is Ignored because a channel has been configured already.D. configuration parameter dc1 is overridden because a new channel is allocated in RMAN RUN block.



QUESTION 48Which tasks are run automatically as part of the Automated Maintenance Task by default? (Choose all thatapply.)

A. Segment AdvisorB. SQL Access AdvisorC. Optimizer statistics gatheringD. Automatic SQL Tuning AdvisorE. Automatic Database Diagnostics Monitor


Explanation/Reference:About Automated Maintenance Tasks (link)

Oracle Database has three predefined automated maintenance tasks:

Automatic Optimizer Statistics Collection—Collects optimizer statistics for all schema objects in thedatabase for which there are no statistics or only stale statistics. The statistics gathered by this task areused by the SQL query optimizer to improve the performance of SQL execution.See Also:Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide for more information on automatic statistics collection

Automatic Segment Advisor—Identifies segments that have space available for reclamation, andmakes recommendations on how to defragment those segments.You can also run the Segment Advisor manually to obtain more up-to-the-minute recommendations or toobtain recommendations on segments that the Automatic Segment Advisor did not examine for possiblespace reclamation.

See Also:"Using the Segment Advisor" for more information.

Automatic SQL Tuning Advisor—Examines the performance of high-load SQL statements, andmakes recommendations on how to tune those statements. You can configure this advisor to automaticallyimplement SQL profile recommendations.See Also:Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide for more information on SQL Tuning Advisor

By default, all three automated maintenance tasks are configured to run in all maintenance windows.

QUESTION 49Examine the output of the query that you executed to list the objects in the recycle bin:

You verified that no table named SALES_TAB exists in the schema. Then you executed the following commandto purge the objects in the recycle bin:SQL> PURGE TABLE sales_tab;


A. All three tables in the recycle bin are purgedB. Only the table with the oldest DROPSCN is purged

C. The command returns an error because multiple entries with the same name exist in the recycle binD. Only the table with the latest DROPSCN is purged



QUESTION 50You issue the following RMAN command to set a retention policy on a database:RMAN>CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 2;

What will be the outcome of issuing this command?

A. After two days, a backup will be marked obsoleteB. After two days, a backup will be deleted from the mediaC. If the RMAN repository has records of two or more recent backups of a file, then older backups will be

deleted from the media.D. If the RMAN repository has records of two or more recent backups of a file, then older backups will be

marked obsolete.



QUESTION 51Which statements are true regarding the system-defined moving window baseline in Oracle Database 11g?(Choose all that apply.)

A. It does not allow you to change the moving window size.B. Adaptive threshold functionalities use it by default to compute statistics.C. It is created by default with the window size being equal to the AWR retention time.D. It is created when the first snapshot is collected by the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR).


Explanation/Reference:A moving window baseline corresponds to all AWR data that exists within the AWR retention period. This is useful when using adaptive thresholds because the database can use AWR data in the entire AWR retentionperiod to compute metric threshold values.

Oracle Database automatically maintains a system-defined moving window baseline. The default window sizefor the system-defined moving window baseline is the current AWR retention period, which by default is 8 days.If you are planning to use adaptive thresholds, consider using a larger moving window—such as 30 days—toaccurately compute threshold values. You can resize the moving window baseline by changing the number ofdays in the moving window to a value that is equal to or less than the number of days in the AWR retentionperiod. Therefore, to increase the size of a moving window, you must first increase the AWR retention periodaccordingly.

QUESTION 52The SQL Tuning Advisor has been configured with default configurations in your database instance. Whichrecommendation is automatically implemented without the DBA's intervention after the SQL Tuning Advisor isrun as part of the AUTOTASK framework?

A. statistics recommendationsB. SQL profile recommendationsC. index-related recommendationsD. restructuring of SQL recommendations


QUESTION 53You have enabled resumable space allocation in your database by setting the RESUMABLE_TIMEOUTparameter set to a nonzero value.Which three statements about resumable space allocation are true? (Choose three.)

A. Even with resumable space allocation enabled for your database, you can disable resumable spaceallocation for a single session.

B. A resumable statement is suspended only if an out of space error occurs.C. When a resumable statement is suspended, the transaction that contains the statement is also suspended.D. A resumable statement can only be suspended and resumed once during the execution of the statement.E. You can query the V$SESSION_WAIT dynamic performance view to identify the statements that are

suspended for a session.

Correct Answer: ACESection: Space ManagementExplanation


QUESTION 54The following command is executed to create the baseline template:

SQL> EXECUTE DBMS_WORKLOAD_REPOSITORY.CREATE_BASELINE_TEMPLATE(START_TIME=> TO_TIESTAMP(SYSDATE+2),END_TIME=>TO_TIMESTAMP(SYSDATE+10),BASELINE_NAME=>'Mybase4',TEMPLATE_NAME=>'Mytemp4',EXPIRATION=>NULL);

Which statement is true about the effect of the above command?

A. It creates a baseline template that never expires.B. It produces an error because no snapshot information is provided to create the baseline.C. It creates a baseline template that expires after the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR) retention period.D. It creates a repeating baseline template that repeats after the Automatic Workload Repository (AWR)

retention period.



QUESTION 55The BOOKINGS table contains online booking information. When a booking is confirmed, the details aretransferred to an archival table BOOKINGS_HIST and deleted from the BOOKINGS table. There is no fixedtime interval between each online booking and its confirmation. Because sufficient space is not always availablefrom the delete operations the high-water mark (HWM) is moved up and many rows are inserted below theHWM of the table. The BOOKINGS table has Automatic Segment Space Management (ASSM) and rowmovement enabled. The table is accessible in 24x7 mode.

What is the most efficient method to reclaim the space released by the delete operations in the BOOKINGStable?

A. Perform EXPORT, DROP, and IMPORT operations on the BOOKINGS table sequentially

B. Shrink the BOOKINGS table by using the ALTER TABLE... SHRINK SPACE command

C. Move the BOOKINGS table to a different location by using the ALTER TABLE... MOVE command

D. Deallocate the space in the BOOKINGS table by using the ALTER TABLE ... DEALLOCATE UNUSEDcommand



QUESTION 56You issued the following command:CREATE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE admin_work_area (startdate DATE, enddate DATE, class CHAR(20)) ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS TABLESPACE tbs_t1;

An index is then created on the ADMIN_WORK_AREA temporary table. Which two statements are true regarding the TBS_T1 tablespace in the above command? (Choose two.)

A. It stores only the temporary table but not its indexes.B. It stores both the temporary table as well as its indexes.

C. It must be a nondefault temporary tablespace for the database.D. It can be a default or nondefault temporary tablespace for the database.E. It must be the default temporary tablespace of the user who issues the command.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 57Identify the activities performed as part of the Automatic SQL Tuning process in the maintenance window?(Choose all that apply.)

A. generating the SQL profileB. testing and accepting the SQL profileC. generating a list of candidate SQLs for tuningD. adding tuned SQL plans into the SQL plan baselineE. tuning each SQL statement in the order of importanceF. generating baselines that include candidate SQLs for tuning

Correct Answer: ABCESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:17.2.1 How Automatic SQL Tuning Works (link)

Oracle Database automatically runs SQL Tuning Advisor on selected high-load SQL statements from theAutomatic Workload Repository (AWR) that qualify as tuning candidates. This task, called Automatic SQLTuning, runs in the default maintenance windows on a nightly basis. By default, automatic SQL tuning runs forat most one hour. You can customize attributes of the maintenance windows, including start and end time,frequency, and days of the week.

After automatic SQL tuning begins, the database performs the following steps:

1. Identifies SQL candidates in the AWR for tuningOracle Database analyzes statistics in AWR and generates a list of potential SQL statements that are eligiblefor tuning. These statements include repeating high-load statements that have a significant impact on thedatabase.

The database tunes only SQL statements that have an execution plan with a high potential for improvement.The database ignores recursive SQL and statements that have been tuned recently (in the last month), parallelqueries, DML, DDL, and SQL statements with performance problems caused by concurrency issues.

The database orders the SQL statements that are selected as candidates based on their performance impact.The database calculates the impact by summing the CPU time and the I/O times in AWR for the selectedstatement in the past week.

2. Tunes each SQL statement individually by calling SQL Tuning AdvisorDuring the tuning process, the database considers and reports all recommendation types, but it can implementonly SQL profiles automatically.

3. Tests SQL profiles by executing the SQL statementIf a SQL profile is recommended, the database tests the new profile by executing the SQL statement both withand without the profile. If the performance improvement improves at least threefold, then the database accepts

the SQL profile, but only if the ACCEPT_SQL_PROFILES task parameter is set to TRUE. Otherwise, theautomatic SQL tuning reports merely report the recommendation to create a SQL profile.

4. Optionally, implements the SQL profiles provided they meet the criteria of threefold performanceimprovementThe database considers other factors when deciding whether to implement the SQL profile. For example, thedatabase does not implement a profile when the objects referenced in the statement have stale optimizerstatistics. SQL profiles that have been implemented automatically show type is AUTO in the DBA_SQL_PROFILES view.

If the database uses SQL plan management, and if a SQL plan baseline exists for the SQL statement, then thedatabase adds a new plan baseline when creating the SQL profile. As a result, the optimizer uses the new planimmediately after profile creation. See Chapter 15, "Using SQL Plan Management".

At any time during or after the automatic SQL tuning process, you can view the results using the automatic SQLtuning report. This report describes in detail all the SQL statements that were analyzed, the recommendationsgenerated, and the SQL profiles that were automatically implemented.

QUESTION 58View the Exhibit to examine the replay settings for replay parameters. What is the implication for setting the values for replay parameters? (Choose all that apply.)

Exhibit:

A. The COMMIT order in the captured workload is preserved during replay.B. The value 100 in the THINK_TIME_SCALE parameter attempts to make the replay client shorten the think

time between calls.C. The value 100 in the CONNECT_TIME_SCALE parameter attempts to connect all sessions as captured.

D. The value 100 in the THINK_TIME_SCALE parameter attempts to match the captured user think time whilereplaying.

E. The value 100 in the CONNECT_TIME_SCALE parameter attempts to connect all sessions immediately assoon as the replay begins.



QUESTION 59You are working on a 24X7 database. You want to design a backup strategy for your database that uses usermanaged backups. You want to be able to perform all backups while the database remains online.Which statement about performing user-managed backups in a 24x7 environment is true?

A. You must have change tracking enabled in your databaseB. Your database must be running in NOARCHIVELOG mode

C. To back up a tablespace, it must be in backup modeD. To back up a tablespace, it must first be taken offline



QUESTION 60You are managing an Oracle 11g database with ASM storage, for which the COMPATIBLE initializationparameter is set to 11.1.0. In the ASM instance, the COMPATIBLE.RDBMS attribute for the disk group is set to10.2 and the COMPATIBLE.ASM attribute is set to 11.1.

Which two statements are true in this scenario for the features enabled for ASM? (Choose two.)

A. The ASM-preferred mirror read feature is enabled.B. The ASM supports variable sizes for extents of 1, 8, and 64 allocation units.C. The ASM disk is dropped immediately from a disk group when it becomes unavailable.D. The RDBMS always reads the primary copy of a mirrored extent of the ASM disk group.

Correct Answer: ABSection: Database Architecture and ASMExplanation


QUESTION 61You set the following parameters in the parameter file and restarted the database:MEMORY_MAX_TARGET=0MEMORY_TARGET=500MPGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET=90MSGA_TARGET=270M

Which two statements are true regarding these parameters after the database instance is restarted? (Choosetwo.)

A. The MEMORY_MAX_TARGET parameter is automatically set to 500 MB.

B. The value of the MEMORY_MAX_TARGET parameter remains zero till it is changed manually.

C. The PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET and SGA_TARGET parameters are automatically set to zero.

D. The lower bounds of PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET and SGA_TARGET parameters are set to 90 MB and 270MB, respectively.

Correct Answer: ADSection: Managing MemoryExplanation


QUESTION 62Evaluate the following SQL statement used to create the PRODUCTS table:CREATE TABLE products ( product_id NUMBER(3) PRIMARY KEY, product_desc VARCHAR2(25), qty NUMBER(8,2), rate NUMBER(10,2), total_value AS ( qty * rate)) PARTITION BY RANGE (total_value) ( PARTITION p1 VALUES LESS THAN (100000), PARTITION p2 VALUES LESS THAN (150000), PARTITION p3 VALUES LESS THAN (MAXVALUE)) COMPRESS FOR ALL OPERATIONS;

Which statement is true regarding this command?

A. It executes successfully but partition pruning cannot happen for this partition key.B. It produces an error because the TOTAL_VALUE column cannot be used as a partition key.

C. It produces an error because compression cannot be used for the TOTAL_VALUE partition key.

D. It executes successfully but the values in the TOTAL_VALUE column would not be physically stored in thepartitions.



QUESTION 63View the Exhibit to examine the error while executing the REPAIR FAILURE command in an RMAN session.What is the reason for this error?

Exhibit:

A. Another repair session is running concurrently.B. The failure ID has not been mentioned in the command for data file 5.C. There are new failures recorded in the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR).D. The ADVISE FAILURE command has not been issued before the REPAIR FAILURE command.



QUESTION 64You are working in an online transaction processing (OLTP) environment. You use the FLASHBACK TABLEcommand to flash back the CUSTOMERS table. Before executing the FLASHBACK TABLE command, the systemchange number (SCN) was 663571. After flashing back the CUSTOMERS table, you realize that the table is notin the correct state. Now, you need to reverse the effects of the FLASHBACK TABLE command.

Which is the fastest and the most efficient option to reverse the effects of the FLASHBACK TABLE command?

A. Restore the backup control file and open the database with RESETLOGS option.

B. Perform point-in-time recovery because flashback cannot be performed again on this tableC. Execute the FLASHBACK DATABASE statement to retrieve the CUSTOMERS table as it was at SCN 663571

D. Execute another FLASHBACK TABLE statement to retrieve the CUSTOMERS table as it was at SCN 663571



QUESTION 65What does the DB_FLASHBACK_RETENTION_TARGET parameter configure?

A. An upper limit on how far you can flash back the database, depending on the information in the redo logsB. An upper limit on how far you can flash back the database, depending on the information in the undo

tablespaceC. The amount of time for which the flashback data is to be kept in the flash recovery area, provided that there

is enough spaceD. The amount of time for which the flashback data is guaranteed to be kept in the undo tablespace, provided

that there is enough space



QUESTION 66Examine the following RMAN script:RMAN> run { debug on; allocate channel c1 type disk; backup datafile 5;}Which statement describes the purpose of the script?

A. The data file is checked for physical corruption and backed up if found clean.B. The backup of data file 5 is performed and the interactive messages during the backup are suppressed.C. The existing backup for the data file is checked and the backup is performed if there are changes in the

data file after the last backup.D. The backup of data file 5 is performed and all SQL statements that are executed during RMAN compilation

and their results are displayed



QUESTION 67User SCOTT wants to back out the transactions on the REGIONS table in his schema. As a DBA, whichcommands must you execute to enable SCOTT to flash back the transactions? (Choose four.)

A. ALTER DATABASE FLASHBACK ON;

B. GRANT SELECT ANY TRANSACTION TO scott;

C. GRANT EXECUTE ON dbms_flashback TO scott;

D. ALTER DATABASE ADD SUPPLEMENTAL LOG DATA;

E. ALTER TABLESPACE undots1 RETENTION GUARANTEE;

F. ALTER DATABASE ADD SUPPLEMENTAL LOG DATA (PRIMARY KEY) COLUMNS;

Correct Answer: BCDFSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 68After you have restored and recovered a database to a new host by using a previously performed RecoveryManager (RMAN) backup, which is the best option you would consider for the new database?

A. Opening the database in RESTRICTED mode

B. Opening the database with the RESETLOGS option

C. Setting a new DBID for the newly restored database

D. Restoring the server parameter file (SPFILE ) to the new host



QUESTION 69Examine the following RMAN command:RMAN> CONFIGURE ENCRYPTION FOR DATABASE ON;RMAN> BACKUP DATABASE PLUS ARCHIVELOG;

Which prerequisite must be met before accomplishing the backup?

A. Provide a password for the encryptionB. Set up an Oracle wallet for the encryptionC. No setup is required as it is a default encryption methodD. Both Oracle wallet and password must be set up for the encryption



QUESTION 70In Recovery Manager (RMAN), you are taking image copies of the datafiles of your production database and

rolling them forward as regular intervals. You attempt to restart your database instance after a regularmaintenance task, you realize that one of the data files that belongs to the USERS tablespace is damaged andyou need to recover the datafile by using the image copy. You could perform the following steps to accomplishthis:1) Mount the database2) Take the data file offline3) Bring the data file online4) Use the RMAN SWITCH TO command to switch the image copy5) Apply the archived redo logs6) Open the database7) Use the RMAN RESTORE TO command to switch to the image copy

Which two options illustrate the correct sequence of steps that you could follow? (Choose two.)

A. 2, 6, 4, 5, 3B. 1, 2, 4, 5, 3, 6C. 1, 2, 4, 6, 3D. 1, 2, 7, 5, 3, 6

Correct Answer: BDSection: Using RMAN to Perform RecoveryExplanation


QUESTION 71View the Exhibit to observe the error.You receive this error regularly and have to shutdown the database instance to overcome the error. AutomaticShared Memory Management is configured for the instance.

What can you do to reduce the chance of this error in the future?

Exhibit:

A. Increase the value of SGA_MAX_SIZE

B. Enable automatic memory managementC. Set the PRE_PAGE_SGA parameter to true

D. Lock the System Global Area (SGA) in memory


Explanation/Reference:ORA-04031: unable to allocate string bytes of shared memory (" string"," string"," string"," string")

Cause : More shared memory is needed than was allocated in the shared pool or Streams pool.Action : If the shared pool is out of memory, either use the DBMS_SHARED_POOL package to pin largepackages, reduce your use of shared memory, or increase the amount of available shared memory byincreasing the value of the initialization parameters SHARED_POOL_RESERVED_SIZE andSHARED_POOL_SIZE. If the large pool is out of memory, increase the initialization parameterLARGE_POOL_SIZE. If the error is issued from an Oracle Streams or XStream process, increase theinitialization parameter STREAMS_POOL_SIZE or increase the capture or apply parameter MAX_SGA_SIZE.

QUESTION 72Which two client requests are captured during database replay Capture? (Choose two)

A. Flashback queriesB. Shared server requestsC. Login and logoff activities of sessionsD. Direct path load of data from external files by using utilities such as SQL *loaderE. Data definition language (DDL) and data manipulation language (DML) operations

Correct Answer: CESection: Managing Database PerformanceExplanation

Explanation/Reference:9.3 Workload Capture Restrictions

Certain types of user sessions and client requests may sometimes be captured in a workload, but they are notsupported by Database Replay. Capturing these session and request types in a workload may result in errorsduring workload replay.

The following types of user sessions and client requests are not supported by Database Replay:

Direct path load of data from external files using utilities such as SQL*LoaderNon-PL/SQL based Advanced Queuing (AQ)Flashback queriesOracle Call Interface (OCI) based object navigationsNon SQL-based object accessDistributed transactions, Any distributed transactions that are captured will be replayed as local transactions.XA transactions, XA transactions are not captured or replayed. All local transactions are captured.JAVA_XA transactions, If the workload uses the JAVA_XA package, JAVA_XA function and procedure callsare captured as normal PL/SQL workload. To avoid problems during workload replay, consider dropping theJAVA_XA package on the replay system to enable the replay to complete successfully.Database Resident Connection Pooling (DRCP)Workloads using OUT bindsMulti-threaded Server (MTS) and shared server sessi ons with synchronization mode set toOBJECT_IDMigrated sessions, The workload is captured for migrated sessions. However, user logins or sessionmigration operations are not captured. Without a valid user login or session migration, the replay may causeerrors because the workload may be replayed by a wrong user.

Typically, Database Replay refrains from capturing these types of non-supported user sessions and clientrequests. Even when they are captured, Database Replay will not replay them. Therefore, it is usually notnecessary to manually filter out non-supported user sessions and client requests. In cases where they arecaptured and found to cause errors during replay, consider using workload capture filters to exclude them fromthe workload.

QUESTION 73Which command creates an image copy?

A. backup as copy

B. backup copyC. copy as backupD. copy back


QUESTION 74What are the prerequisites for performing flashback transactions? (Choose all that apply)

A. Supplemental log must be enabledB. Supplemental log must be enabled for the primary keyC. Undo retention guarantee for the database must be configuredD. "EXECUTE " permission on the DBMS_FLASHBACK package must be granted to the user

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Using Flashback TechnologyExplanation


QUESTION 75Which are the two prerequisites before setting up Flashback Data Archive? (Choose two.)

A. Flash recovery area must be definedB. Undo retention guarantee must be enabled.C. Database must be running in archivelog mode.D. Automatic undo management must be enabled.E. The tablespace in which the Flashback Data Archive is created must have automatic segment space

Management (ASSM).

Correct Answer: DESection: Additional Flashback OperationsExplanation

QUESTION 76Which mode of database shutdown requires an instance recovery at the time of the next database startup?

A. ABORTB. NORMALC. IMMEDIATED. TRANSACTIONAL


QUESTION 77Which two operations are NOT performed by the DUPLICATE command in Recovery Manager (RMAN) whileduplicating a running database? (Choose Two)

A. Creating the control file for the duplicate databaseB. Restoring the target data files to the duplicate databaseC. Performing complete recovery using all available backupsD. Generating a new, unique DBID for the duplicate databaseE. Copying the online redo log files from the target database to the duplicate database

Correct Answer: CESection: Using RMAN to Duplicate a DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 78Which two statements are true about the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR)? (Choose two.)

A. The ADR base keeps all diagnostic information in binary formatB. SQL*Plus provides the ADRI script, which can be used to work with ADRC. The ADR can be used for problem diagnosis only when the database is openD. The ADR can be disabled by settting the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter to null

E. The ADR can be used for problem diagnosis even when the database instance is downF. The ADR base is shared across multiple instances

Correct Answer: EFSection: Diagnosing the DatabaseExplanation


QUESTION 79How many individual archive-log destination directories are supported by Oracle Database11g?

A. 7B. 1C. 10D. 11E. 21


QUESTION 80Your database has experienced a loss of datafile users_01.dbf, which is associated with a tablespace calledUSERS. The database is still running.

Which answer properly describes the order of the steps that you would use to recover from this error?1. Shut down the database.2. Take the users_01.dbf datafile offline with the alter database command.3. Restore the users_01.dbf datafile from backup media with the required archived redo logs.4. Restore all users tablespace-related datafiles from backup media.5. Issue the recover tablespace users command.

6. Issue the recover datafile users_01.dbf command.7. Start up the database.8. Bring the users_01.dbf datafile online with the alter database command.

A. 1, 3, 6, 7B. 2, 3, 6, 8C. 1, 2,3,6,7D. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8E. 2, 3,6,5,7



QUESTION 81As soon as you discover that you have lost an online redo log, if the database is still functioning, what should beyour first action?

A. Shut down the databaseB. Clear the online redo logC. Back up the databaseD. Checkpoint the databaseE. Call Oracle support



QUESTION 82You have lost all your SYSTEM tablespace datafiles (system_01.dbf and system_02.dbf) and the database hascrashed.

What would be the appropriate order of operations to correct the situation?

a. Mount the database with the startup mount command.b. Take the SYSTEM data file offline with the alter database command.c. Restore the SYSTEM_01.dbf data file from backup media with the required archived redo logs.d. Restore all SYSTEM tablespace–related datafiles from backup media.e. Issue the recover tablespace SYSTEM command.f. Issue the recover data file SYSTEM_01.dbf command.g. Open the database with the alter database open command.h. Open the database with the alter database open RESETLOGS command.

A. a, c, f, gB. b, d, e, hC. a, b, c, f, gD. d, a, e, gE. b, c, f, e, g


Explanation/Reference:Because there is NO controlfile damaged, and there is NO PITR recover, you don't need to use RESETLOGSoption.

QUESTION 83You have discovered that one of three control files has been lost. What steps would you follow to recover thatcontrol file?

a. Shut down the database.b. Restore a control-file copy from backup media.c. Use the create control file command to create a new control file.d. Copy the backup control file into place.e. Create a new copy of the control file from one of the surviving control files.f. Recover the database using the recover database using BACKUP CONTROLFILE command.g. Start up the database.

A. a, b, f, gB. c, f, gC. a, d, f, gD. a, f, gE. a, e, g



QUESTION 84Which files will you need to perform a full recovery of a database backed up in NOARCHIVELOG mode?(Choose all that apply.)

A. Database datafilesB. Control filesC. Archived redo logsD. Online redo logsE. Flashback logs

Correct Answer: ABDSection: Performing User-Managed Backup and Recover yExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Recovering a Database in NOARCHIVELOG Mode

1. Restore all the data files and control files2. (optional) if the media failure is not fixed, you need to modify the control file to the new location of data filesand redo log files.

SQL> STARTUP MOUNT;SQL> ALTER DATABASE RENAME FILE '<damaged file, dat afile, redo log>' TO '<newlocation>';

3. SQL> RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL CANCEL Because online redo logs are never backed up, you cannot

restore them with the data files and control files. To enable the database to reset the online redo logs, you mustfirst mimic incomplete recovery:4. SQL> ALTER DATABASE OPEN RESETLOGS;

QUESTION 85Identify two options that Oracle recommends while configuring the backup and recovery environment for yourrecovery catalog. (Choose two.)

A. configuring control file autobackup to be ONB. backing up data filed only and not the archived redo log filesC. running the recovery catalog database in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

D. setting the retention policy to a REDUNDANCY value greater than 1

E. backing up the recovery catalog to the same disk as that of the target database



Configuring the Recovery Catalog Database

When you use a recovery catalog, RMAN requires that you maintain a recovery catalog schema. The recoverycatalog is stored in the default tablespace of the schema. The SYS user cannot be the owner of the recoverycatalog.

Decide which database you will use to install the recovery catalog schema, and also how you will back up thisdatabase. Also, decide whether to operate the catalog database in ARCHIVELOG mode, which isrecommended.

Note: Do not use the target database to be backed up as the database for the recovery catalog. Therecovery catalog must be protected if the target database is lost.

QUESTION 86Examine the following command for RMAN backup:

RMAN> RUN { ALLOCATE CHANNEL c1 DEVICE TYPE sbt; ALLOCATE CHANNEL c2 DEVICE TYPE sbt; ALLOCATE CHANNEL c3 DEVICE TYPE sbt;

BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL = 0 (DATAFILE 1,4,5 CHANNEL c1) (DATAFILE 2,3,9 CHANNEL c2) (DATAFILE 6,7,8 CHANNEL c3);

SQL 'ALTER SYSTEM ARCHIVE LOG CURRENT';}

Which statement Is true regarding the approach in the command?

A. The RMAN multiplexing level is 4.B. It is the use of asynchronous I/O by RMAN.C. It is a case of parallelization of the backup set.D. It is an implementation of a multisection backup.



QUESTION 87Which statement is true about a Scheduler-generated event?

A. It can be generated when a file arrives on the file system.B. it indicates state changes that occur within the Scheduler itself.C. it is raised by an application that is consumed by the Scheduler to start a job.D. it requires jobs to be defined with an event condition and a queue specification.


Explanation/Reference:Consuming Job State Events with your Application

To consume job state events, your application must subscribe to the Scheduler event queueSYS.SCHEDULER$_EVENT_QUEUE. This queue is a secure queue and is owned by SYS. To create asubscription to this queue for a user, do the following:1. Log in to the database as the SYS user or as a user with the MANAGE ANY QUEUE privilege.2. Subscribe to the queue using a new or existing agent.3. Run the package procedure DBMS_AQADM.ENABLE_DB_ACCESS as follows:

DBMS_AQADM.ENABLE_DB_ACCESS(agent_name, db_username);where agent_name references the agent that you used to subscribe to the events queue, anddb_username is the user for whom you want to create a subscription.

There is no need to grant dequeue privileges to the user. The dequeue privilege is granted on the Schedulerevent queue to PUBLIC.

QUESTION 88In your production database, you:

Are using Recovery Manager (RMAN) with a recovery catalog to perform the backup operation at regularintervalsSet the control file autobackup to "on"Are maintaining image copies of the database files

You have lost the server parameter file (SPFILE) and the control file.

Which option must you consider before restoring the SPFILE and the control file by using the control fileautobackup?

A. Setting DBID for the databaseB. Using the RMAN SWITCH commandC. Using the RMAN SET NEWNAME commandD. Starting up the database instance in the NOMOUNT state



QUESTION 89Your database is using a default temporary tablespace that contains the temp01.tmp temporary file. All theusers on the database use the default temporary tablspace. A user issues a query on the ORDERS table andreceives the following error:

ERROR at line 1:ORA-01565: error in identifying file '/u01/app/orac le/oradata/TEST/temp01.tmp'ORA-27037: unable to obtain file status

What would be the most efficient way to rectify this error? ##

A. Add a new tempfile to the user's temporary tablespace and drop the tempfile that produced the error.B. Shut down the database instance, restore the temp01.tmp file from the backup, and then restart the

database.C. Allow the database to continue running, drop the temp01.tmp temporary file, and then re-create it with new

tempfiles.D. Take the temporary tablespace offline, recover the missing tempfile by applying redo logs, and then bring

the temporary tablespace online.


Explanation/Reference:The original answer was D, but it is definitely wrong.

QUESTION 90Which two statements are true about a duplicate database that is created by using the DUPLICATE commandin RMAN? (Choose two.)

A. It is a copy or a subset of the target database.B. It is opened in RESTRICT mode after a duplicating operation.C. It is created by using backups and archived redo log files from the target database.D. It is created with the same database identifier (DBID) as that of target database.


Explanation/Reference:Duplicating a Database

Overview of RMAN Database Duplication

Database duplication is the use of the DUPLICATE command to copy all or a subset of the data in a sourcedatabase. The duplicate database (the copied database) functions entirely independently from the sourcedatabase (the database being copied).

Purpose of Database Duplication

If you copy a database with operating system utilities instead of the DUPLICATE command, then the DBID ofthe copied database remains the same as the original database. To register the copy database in the samerecovery catalog with the original, you must change the DBID with the DBNEWID utility (see Oracle DatabaseUtilities). In contrast, the DUPLICATE command automatically assigns the duplicate database a differentDBID so that it can be registered in the same recovery catalog as the source database.

Backup-Based Duplication

In backup-based duplication, RMAN creates the duplicate database by using pre-existing RMAN backups andcopies. This technique of duplication uses one of the following mutually exclusive subtechniques:

Duplication without a target database connection, RMAN obtains metadata about backups from a recoverycatalog.

Duplication without a target database connection and without a recovery catalog. RMAN obtains metadataabout where backups and copies reside from BACKUP LOCATION.

Duplication with a target database connection. RMAN obtains metadata about backups from the targetdatabase control file or from the recovery catalog.

How RMAN Duplicates a Database

For backup-based duplication, the principal work of the duplication is performed by the auxiliary channels.These channels correspond to a server session on the auxiliary instance on the destination host. For activedatabase duplication the primary work is performed by target channels.

RMAN must perform database point-in-time recovery, even when no explicit point in time is provided forduplication. Point-in-time recovery is required because the online redo log files in the source database arenot backed up and cannot be applied to the duplicate database. The farthest point of recovery of theduplicate database is the most recent redo log file archived by the source database.

As part of the duplicating operation, RMAN automates the following steps:

1. Creates a default server parameter file for the auxiliary instance if the following conditions are true:Duplication does not involve a standby database.Server parameter files are not being duplicated.The auxiliary instance was not started with a server parameter file.

2. Restores from backup or copies from active database the latest control file that satisfies the UNTIL clauserequirements.

3. Mounts the restored or copied backup control file from the active database.

4. Uses the RMAN repository to select the backups for restoring the data files to the auxiliary instance. Thisstep applies to backup-based duplication.

5. Restores and copies the duplicate data files and recovers them with incremental backups and archived redolog files to a noncurrent point in time.

6. Shuts down and restarts the database instance in NOMOUNT mode.

7. Creates a new control file, which then creates and stores the new DBID in the data files.

8. Opens the duplicate database with the RESETLOGS option and creates the online redo log for the newdatabase.

QUESTION 91A user receives the following error while performing a large volume of inserts into a table:

ERROR at line 1:ORA-01536: space quota exceeded for tablespace 'USE RS'

The issue is resolved by increasing the space quota on the USERS tablespace for the user. But the user mayperform such transaction in the future. You want to ensure that the command waits rather than produce anerror when such an event occurs the next time.

What can you do to achieve this before running the command in the future?

A. Set RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT for the instance.

B. Set the RESOURCE_LIMIT Parameter to TRUE.

C. Enable the database instance to use asynchronous commit.D. Set the LOG_CHECKPOINT_TIMEOUT parameter to a nonzero value for the database instance.


Explanation/Reference:How Resumable Space Allocation Works

The following is an overview of how resumable space allocation works. Details are contained in later sections.A statement executes in resumable mode only if its session has been enabled for resumable spaceallocation by one of the following actions:

The ALTER SESSION ENABLE RESUMABLE statement is issued in the session before the statementexecutes when the RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT initialization parameter is set to a nonzero value.The ALTER SESSION ENABLE RESUMABLE TIMEOUT timeout_value statement is issued in the sessionbefore the statement executes, and thetimeout_value is a nonzero value.

A resumable statement is suspended when one of the following conditions occur (these conditions result incorresponding errors being signalled for non-resumable statements):

Out of space conditionMaximum extents reached conditionSpace quota exceeded condition.

When the execution of a resumable statement is suspended, there are mechanisms to perform usersupplied operations, log errors, and query the status of the statement execution. When a resumablestatement is suspended the following actions are taken:The error is reported in the alert log.The system issues the Resumable Session Suspended alert.If the user registered a trigger on the AFTER SUSPEND system event, the user trigger is executed. A usersupplied PL/SQL procedure can access the error message data using the DBMS_RESUMABLE package andthe DBA_ or USER_RESUMABLE view.Suspending a statement automatically results in suspending the transaction. Thus all transactionalresources are held through a statement suspend and resume.When the error condition is resolved (for example, as a result of user intervention or perhaps sort spacereleased by other queries), the suspended statement automatically resumes execution and the ResumableSession Suspended alert is cleared.A suspended statement can be forced to throw the exception using the DBMS_RESUMABLE.ABORT()procedure. This procedure can be called by a DBA, or by the user who issued the statement.A suspension time out interval, specified by the RESUMABLE_TIMEOUT initialization parameter or by thetimeout value in the ALTER SESSION ENABLE RESUMABLETIMEOUT statement, is associated withresumable statements. A resumable statement that is suspended for the timeout interval wakes up andreturns the exception to the user if the error condition is not resolved within the timeout interval.A resumable statement can be suspended and resumed multiple times during execution.

QUESTION 92View the Exhibit and examine the parameter settings in your server-side parameter file (SPFILE). When youtried to start the database instance, you received the following error:SQL> startupORA-00824: cannot set SGA_TARGET or MEMORY_TARGET d ue to existing internalsettings, see alert log for more information.

Why did the instance fail to start?

Exhibit:

A. Because the PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET parameter is not set

B. Because the STATISTICS_LEVEL parameter is set to BASIC

C. Because MEMORY_TARGET and MEMORY_MAX_TARGET cannot be equal

D. Because both the SGA_TARGET and MEMORY_TARGET parameters are set.


Explanation/Reference:Setting SGA Target SizeYou enable the automatic shared memory management feature by setting the SGA_TARGET parameter to anonzero value. This parameter sets the total size of the SGA. It replaces the parameters that control thememory allocated for a specific set of individual components, which are now automatically and dynamicallyresized (tuned) as needed.Note:The STATISTICS_LEVEL initialization parameter must be set to TYPICAL (the default) or ALL forautomatic shared memory management to function.

QUESTION 93Given below are RMAN commands to enable backup optimization and set the retention policy:

RMAN> CONFIGURE DEFAULT DEVICE TYPE TO sbt;RMAN> CONFIGURE BACKUP OPTIMIZATION ON;RMAN> CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 2;

The USERS tablespace has never been backed up. You take the USERS tablespace offline on Monday. View

the Exhibit to examine the operations performed by using RMAN. Which two statements are true about the backup of the USERS tablespace? (Choose two.)

Exhibit:

A. It will be backed up as a part of database backup on Friday.B. It will be backed up as a part of database backup on Tuesday.C. It will not be backed up as a part of database backup on Wednesday.D. The command on Sunday deletes the backup of the USERS tablespace taken on Tuesday.

Correct Answer: BDSection: Configuring Backup SpecificationsExplanation

Explanation/Reference:Refer to here.Backup Optimization for SBT Backups With Redundancy Retention Policy

QUESTION 94View the Exhibit and examine the data manipulation language (DML) operations that you performed on the NEWEMP table. Note that the first two updated are not listed by the Flashback Versions Query.

What could be the reason?

Exhibit:

A. The first two updated were not explicitly committed.B. ALTER TABLE caused the recycle bin to release the space.C. The data definition language (DDL) operation caused a log switch.D. Flashback Versions Query stops producing versions of rows that existed before a change in the table

structure.



QUESTION 95View Exhibit1 to examine the CRS11G disk group when all the disks are online.View Exhibit2 to examine the CRS11G disk group when one disk is offline.

Why is the rebalancing not performed and the content of the disk group not empty in Exhibit2?

ASM-disk-group-1 (exhibit):

ASM-disk-group-2 (exhibit):

A. Because the disk group is created with NORMAL redundancy

B. Because the disk repair time attribute is set to a nonzero valueC. Because the mirrored extents cannot be rebalanced across the other three disksD. Because the other three disks have 60% free space, the disk rebalancing is delayed


Explanation/Reference:Key points:1. The COMPATIBILITY.ASM>=11.1 and COMPATIBILITY.RDBMS>=11.12. The DISK_REPAIR_TIME is set to non-zero. by default it is 3.6hr.

Refer to here.

Note: To use this feature, the disk group compatibility attributes must be set to 11.1 or higher. For moreinformation, refer to "Disk Group Compatibility".

Oracle ASM fast resync keeps track of pending changes to extents on an OFFLINE disk during an outage. Theextents are resynced when the disk is brought back online.By default, Oracle ASM drops a disk in 3.6 hours after it is taken offline. You can set the DISK_REPAIR_TIME

disk group attribute to delay the drop operation by specifying a time interval to repair the disk and bring itback online.

QUESTION 96You execute the following command to set the redundancy retention policy in Recovery Manager (RMAN):RMAN> CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 3;

Identify the statement that correctly describes the implications of this command.

A. when there are already three backups, for the fourth backup RMAN removes the oldest backup.B. When there are already three backups, for the fourth backup RMAN marks the oldest backup as obsolete.C. the number of backups that are retained is equal to three and it includes full, incremental, and cumulative

backups.D. when there are already three backup, one of the existing backups must be removed manually before taking

the fourth backup.


Explanation/Reference:The original answer is A, but my personal preferred answer is B.

Configuring a Redundancy-Based Retention Policy

The REDUNDANCY parameter of the CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY command specifies how many full orlevel 0 backups of each data file and control file that RMAN should keep. If the number of full or level 0 backupsfor a specific data file or control file exceeds the REDUNDANCY setting, then RMAN considers the extra backupsas obsolete. The default retention policy is REDUNDANCY 1.

As you produce more backups, RMAN keeps track of which ones to retain and which are obsolete. RMANretains all archived logs and incremental backups that are needed to recover the nonobsolete backups.

Assume that you make a full backup of data file 7 on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday. You nowhave four full backups of this data file.If REDUNDANCY is 2, then the Monday and Tuesday backups areobsolete. If you make another backup on Friday, then the Wednesday backup of data file 7 becomes obsolete.Assume a different case in which REDUNDANCY is 1. You run a level 0 database backup at noon on Monday, alevel 1 cumulative backup at noon on Tuesday and Wednesday, and a level 0 backup at noon on Thursday.Immediately after each daily backup you run the command DELETE OBSOLETE. The Wednesday DELETEcommand does not remove the Tuesday level 1 backup because this backup is not redundant: the Tuesdaylevel 1 backup could be used to recover the Monday level 0 backup to a time between noon on Tuesday andnoon on Wednesday. However, the DELETE command on Thursday removes the previous level 0 and level 1backups.Run the CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY command at the RMAN prompt, as in the following example:CONFIGURE RETENTION POLICY TO REDUNDANCY 3;

QUESTION 97Because of a logical corruption in the EMPLOYES tables, you want to perform Tablespace Point-in-TimeRecovery (TSPITR) to recover the table. Before you started the TSPITR process, you queried the TS_PITR_CHECK view and you realized that the table has a referential constraint with DEPARTMENTS thatexists in another tablespace, MASTERTBS.

Which two actions will permit the TSPITR to work? (Choose two.)

A. Taking the MASTERTBS tablespace offlineB. Dropping the relationship between the tablesC. Adding the MASTERTBS tablespace to the recovery set

D. Putting the MASTERTBS tablespace in read-only mode

Correct Answer: BCSection: Performing Tablespace Point-in-Time Recove ry (TSPITR)Explanation

Explanation/Reference:The original answers are A, D. but the personal preferred answer is B & C.

QUESTION 98You executed the following query:SELECT oldest_flashback_scn, oldest_flashback_time FROM V$FLASHBACK_DATABASE_LOG;

Considering that all the redo logs are available, what information can you derive from the output of thepreceding query?

A. The time when the last flashback operation in your database was performedB. The time when the first flashback operation in your database was performedC. The approximate time and the lowest system change number (SCN) to which you can flash back your

databaseD. The system change number (SCN) and the time when the Flashback Database was enabled in the

database instance


Explanation/Reference:V$FLASHBACK_DATABASE_LOG displays information about the flashback data. Use this view to help estimatethe amount of flashback space required for the current workload.

QUESTION 99A database has three online redo log groups with one member each. A redo log member with the status ACTIVE is damages while the database is running.What is the first step you should take to solve this problem?

A. Attempt to Issue a checkpoint.B. Restart the database using the RESETLOGS option.

C. Drop the redo log number and create it in a different location.D. Perform and incomplete recovery up to the most recent available redo log.


Explanation/Reference:Recovering After Losing All Members of an Online Re do Log Group

If a media failure damages all members of an online redo log group, then different scenarios can occurdepending on the type of online redo log group affected by the failure and the archiving mode of the database.If the damaged online redo log group is current and active, then it is needed for crash recovery; otherwise, it isnot.

Recovering After the Loss of an Online Redo Log Group

InactiveIt is not needed for crash recoveryClear the archived or unarchived group.

ActiveIt is needed for crash recoveryAttempt to issue a checkpoint and clear the log; if impossible, then you must either use FlashbackDatabase or restore a backup and perform incomplete recovery up to the most recent available redo log.

CurrentIt is the redo log that the database is currently writing toAttempt to clear the log; if impossible, then you must either use Flashback Database or restore a backup andperform incomplete recovery up to the most recent available redo log.

QUESTION 100Which two are the prerequisites to enable Flashback Data Archive? (Choose two.)

A. Database must be running in archivelog mode.B. Automatic undo management must be enabled.C. Undo retention guarantee must be enabled.D. The tablespace on which the Flashback Data Archive is created must be managed with Automatic Segment

Space Management (ASSM).




- · PDF fileOracle Database automatically maintains a system-defined moving window baseline....

Documents

Transcript of - · PDF fileOracle Database automatically maintains a system-defined moving window baseline....